Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 8/20/12

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 8/20/12 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-41 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-48 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-13
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-21
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-27
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-31
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-49
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-18
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this
For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your
substitute the name “General dealer or from:
Motors of Canada Limited” for
The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and appears in this manual. ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited Keep this manual in the vehicle for suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, quick reference.
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and Helm, Incorporated
TRAVERSE are trademarks and/or Attention: Customer Service
service marks of General Motors 47911 Halyard Drive
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, Plymouth, MI 48170
or licensors.
Using this Manual
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific To quickly locate information about
vehicle either because they are the vehicle, use the Index in the
options that you did not purchase or back of the manual. It is an
due to changes subsequent to the alphabetical list of what is in the
printing of this owner manual. manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22744238 A First Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Notice: This means there is Symbols

something that could result in
Cautions property or vehicle damage. This The vehicle has components and
Warning messages found on vehicle would not be covered by the labels that use symbols instead of
labels and in this manual describe vehicle's warranty. text. Symbols are shown along with
hazards and what to do to avoid or the text describing the operation or
reduce them. information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
Danger indicates a hazard with a gauge, or indicator.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death. M: This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
Warning or Caution indicates a for additional instructions or
hazard that could result in injury or information.
A circle with a slash through it is a
death.
safety symbol which means “Do *: This symbol is shown when
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let you need to see a service manual
{ WARNING this happen.” for additional instructions or
These mean there is something information.
that could hurt you or other
people.

Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart O : Exterior Lamps } : Power

Here are some additional symbols # : Fog Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more . : Fuel Gauge > : Safety Belt Reminders
information on the symbol, refer to + : Fuses 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
the Index.
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam _ : Tow/Haul Mode
9 : Airbag Readiness Light Changer t : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) j: LATCH System Child M : Windshield Washer Fluid
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls Restraints
or OnStar * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
$ : Brake System Warning Light : : Oil Pressure
" : Charging System g : Outside Power Foldaway
I : Cruise Control Mirrors
B : Engine Coolant Temperature

vi Introduction
2 NOTES

In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Performance and Maintenance

Steering Wheel StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-24
Instrument Panel Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-24
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Driving for Better Fuel
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Initial Drive Information Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Roadside Assistance
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-20
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Driver Information Center
Heated and Ventilated (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 1-21
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-22
Head Restraint Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Universal Remote System . . . 1-23
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel

In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8‑10. 7. Exterior Lamp Controls on 15. Steering Wheel Controls on
2. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. page 6‑1. page 5‑2 (If Equipped).
See Turn and Lane-Change Fog Lamps on page 6‑4 (If 16. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Signals on page 6‑4 (Out Equipped). Buttons. See Driver Information
of View). 8. Hood Release. See Hood on Center (DIC) (Without DIC
Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 10‑4. Buttons) on page 5‑28 or
page 5‑4 (Out of View). Driver Information Center (DIC)
9. Parking Brake on page 9‑26. (With DIC Buttons) on
3. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑11. 10. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 5‑23.
4. Instrument Panel Storage on (Out of View). See Malfunction 17. Climate Control Systems on
page 4‑1. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17. page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
USB Port (Inside IP Storage) (If 11. Dome Lamp Override. Dual Automatic Climate Control
Equipped). See Auxiliary SeeDome Lamps on page 6‑5. System on page 8‑4 (If
Devices on page 7‑34. Instrument Panel Illumination Equipped).
5. CD Player. See CD Player Control on page 6‑5. 18. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
(Radio without Touchscreen) on 12. Cruise Control on page 9‑29. Park on page 9‑18.
page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio
with Touchscreen) on page 7‑23. 13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on 19. Power Outlets on page 5‑8.
page 5‑2.
6. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
14. Horn on page 5‑4.
Navigation/Radio System (If
Equipped). See the infotainment
manual.

1-4 In Brief
20. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

page 5‑5.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Information
Disable Button. See This section provides a brief
StabiliTrak® System on overview about some of the
page 9‑27. important features that may or may
Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped). not be on your specific vehicle.
See Tow/Haul Mode on For more detailed information, refer
page 9‑24. to each of the features which can be
Power Liftgate Button (If found later in this owner manual.
Equipped). See Liftgate on
page 2‑8. Remote Keyless Entry
Press K to unlock the driver door.
21. Heated and Ventilated Front (RKE) System
Press K again within five seconds
Seats on page 3‑8 (If The RKE transmitter is used to to unlock all remaining doors.
Equipped). remotely lock and unlock the doors
22. Hazard Warning Flashers on from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Press Q to lock all doors.
page 6‑3. the vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
23. Passenger Sensing System on personalized.
page 3‑30. To open or close the liftgate, press
and hold 8 until the liftgate
begins to move.
Press L and release to locate the
vehicle.

In Brief 1-5
Press L and hold for more than When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks
two seconds to sound the panic lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The To lock or unlock a door manually:
alarm.
doors will be locked and the climate . From the inside use the door
Press L again to cancel the panic control system may come on. lock knob on the window sill.
alarm. The engine will continue to run for . From the outside turn the key
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a toward the front or rear of the
System Operation on page 2‑2. 10-minute time extension. Remote vehicle, or press the K or Q
start can be extended only once.
button on the Remote Keyless
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Starting the Vehicle To cancel a remote start:
With this feature the engine can be . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
started from outside of the vehicle. vehicle and press and hold /
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the until the parking lamps turn off.
vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning
2. Press and release Q. flashers.
. Turn the ignition switch on and
3. Immediately after completing
then off.
Step 2, press and hold / until
the parking lamps flash. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑4.

1-6 In Brief
Power Door Locks K: Press to unlock the doors.

Q: Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.
Liftgate
To open the liftgate the vehicle must
be in P (Park). Press the touch pad
under the liftgate handle. To close
the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull
strap as an aid.
Power Liftgate . Press O.
Base Model On vehicles with a power liftgate, . Press the touch pad on the
the vehicle must be in P (Park) to
outside liftgate handle.
operate it.
For more information see Liftgate on
. Press and hold 8 on the page 2‑8.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
Uplevel Model

In Brief 1-7
Windows Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and

forth to be sure it is locked in
Manual Seats place.
Move the lever (2) up or down to
raise or lower the seat.
Use the lever (3) to adjust the
seatback.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
and Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
Power Seats
Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to 1. Seat Adjustment Handle
raise it. 2. Driver Seat Height Adjustment
For more information, see Power Lever
Windows on page 2‑18. 3. Seatback Lever
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat
to unlock it.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position, and then release the 1. Seat Adjustment Control
handle (1). 2. Seatback Control

1-8 In Brief
3. Lumbar Control Memory Features Second Row Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
control (1) forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control (1) up
or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control (1)
up or down.
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or If available, the controls on the The second row seat can be folded
rearward. driver door are used to program and to access the third row. Pull the
recall memory settings for the driver sliding seat lever forward; the seat
See Reclining Seatbacks on seat and outside mirrors. cushion folds, and the seat slides
page 3‑5. forward.
See Memory Seats on page 3‑6 and
. Increase or decrease lumbar Vehicle Personalization (With DIC See Rear Seats on page 3‑9.
support by pressing the front or Buttons) on page 5‑41.
rear of the control (3).
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.

In Brief 1-9
Third Row Seats Heated and Ventilated

The third row seatbacks can be Seats
folded forward, and the seats can
be removed.
To fold the third row seatback:
1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons

3. Pull up on the release lever on Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
the back of the seat.
Similar
4. Push the seatback forward to
If available, the buttons are on the
lay flat.
center console. To operate, the
See Third Row Seats on page 3‑11. engine must be running.
I: If available, press to heat the
seatback only.
2. Disconnect the rear safety belt

H: If available, press to cool the
entire seat.
mini-latch using a key in the slot
on the mini-buckle, and let the J : Press to heat the seat and
belt retract into the headliner. seatback.
Stow the mini-latch in the holder
in the headliner.

1-10 In Brief
Press the button once for the Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
System
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
for the lowest.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑8.
United States
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
Refer to the following sections for
adjusted properly.
important information on how to use
To achieve a comfortable seating safety belts properly: Canada and Mexico
position, change the seatback . Safety Belts on page 3‑13. The passenger sensing system will
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head . How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the front outboard
restraint height in the proper Properly on page 3‑15. passenger frontal airbag under
position. certain conditions. No other airbag
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑16. is affected by the passenger
See Head Restraints on page 3‑2 . Lower Anchors and Tethers for sensing system.
and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3. Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑44.

In Brief 1-11
The passenger airbag status 3. Return the switch to the center Folding Mirrors
indicator will light on the instrument to deselect the mirror.
For vehicles with manual folding
panel when the vehicle is started.
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
See Passenger Sensing System on
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return
page 3‑30.
to its original position.
Mirror Adjustment For vehicles with power folding
mirrors:
Exterior Mirrors
Uplevel Model
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Press (1) or (2) to select a
mirror.
2. Press the control pad to adjust
the mirror. 1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out
Base Model
3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect to the driving position.
To adjust the mirrors: the mirror. 2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to
1. Press o or p to select a mirror. the folded position.
2. Press the control pad to adjust See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑15.
the mirror.

1-12 In Brief
Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Adjustment Adjustment Dome Lamps
Adjust the rearview mirror to clearly The dome lamps are in the
view the area behind the vehicle. overhead console and above the
Manual Rearview Mirror rear seat passengers.
For vehicles with a manual rearview The dome lamps come on when a
mirror, push the tab forward for door is opened, unless the dome
daytime use and pull it for nighttime lamp override button is pressed in.
use to avoid glare from the To manually turn them on, turn the
headlamps from behind. See instrument panel brightness control
Manual Rearview Mirror on clockwise to the farthest position.
page 2‑17.
Dome Lamp Override
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
To adjust the steering wheel:
The mirror will automatically reduce
the glare from the headlamps from 1. Pull the lever down.
behind. The dimming feature comes 2. Move the steering wheel up
on when the vehicle is started. See or down.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
on page 2‑17.
closer or away from you.
4. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.

In Brief 1-13
The dome lamp override button is Reading Lamps AUTO: Automatic operation of the
next to the exterior lamps control. Press the button near each lamp to headlamps at normal brightness and
E DOME OFF: Press the button turn them on or off. other exterior lamps.
and the dome lamps remain off For more information, see: ;: Manual operation of the
when a door is opened. An indicator parking lamps and other exterior
light on the button comes on to . Dome Lamps on page 6‑5. lamps.
show that the dome lamps are off. . Instrument Panel Illumination 5: Manual operation of the
Press the button again so the dome Control on page 6‑5. headlamps and other exterior
lamps come on when a door is lamps.
opened. Exterior Lighting See:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑2
. Delayed Headlamps on page 6‑3
The exterior lamp control is on the

instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped): O: Turns the automatic light
Press the button to turn the ambient control on or off.
lights off. Press the button again to
turn ambient lights on.

1-14 In Brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer Windshield Washer

The windshield wiper/washer lever J FRONT : Press the button at
is located on the left side of the the end of the lever to spray washer
steering column. fluid on the windshield.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol Rear Window Wiper/Washer
to control the windshield wipers. The rear wiper and rear wash button
is located on the instrument panel
below the climate control system.
Z: Press to turn the rear wiper on
and off. The wiper speed cannot be
changed.
Y: Press to spray washer fluid on
the rear window. The window wiper
8: Use for a single wiping cycle. will also come on.
OFF : Use to turn the wipers off. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4 and Rear Window Wiper/
6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn the Washer on page 5‑5.
band up for more frequent wipes or
down for less frequent wipes.
LO: Slow wipes.
HI: Fast wipes.

In Brief 1-15
Climate Controls
1. Fan Control 5. Air Delivery Mode Control

2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) 6. Air Conditioning
3. Temperature Control 7. Rear Window Defogger
4. Recirculation

1-16 In Brief
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving downhill or towing a trailer.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
position indicator within the
instrument cluster. When using the
ERS mode a number will display
next to the L, indicating the current
gear that has been selected.
1. Driver and Passenger Side 9. Recirculation To use this feature:
Temperature Controls 10. Air Conditioning 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls See Climate Control Systems on 2. Press the plus/minus button on
3. SYNC (Synchronized page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic Climate the shift lever, to increase or
Temperature) Control System on page 8‑4 (If decrease the gear range
Equipped). For more information available.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
about the rear climate control, see See Manual Mode on page 9‑23.
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Rear Climate Control System on
6. Defrost page 8‑8 or Rear Climate Control
System (with Rear Seat Audio) on
7. Rear Window Defogger page 8‑9.
8. Fan Control

In Brief 1-17
Vehicle Features 4: Change the display between the

radio station frequency and the
Radio(s) time, if equipped. While the ignition
is off, press 4 to display the time.
Radio without Touchscreen
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 7‑5 or
Operation (Radio with Touchscreen)
on page 7‑8.
For vehicles with a Rear Audio
Controller (RAC). See Rear Audio
Controller (RAC) on page 7‑44.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE). See the
infotainment manual.
Storing a Favorite Station
A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six
softkeys located below the radio
station frequency tabs and by using
O: Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped. go through up to six pages of
decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations. favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
© or ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

1-18 In Brief
page of favorites can contain any Radio with Touchscreen

combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
stations.
See AM-FM Radio (Radio without
AM-FM Radio (Radio with
Touchscreen) on page 7‑12.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year).
3. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the labels to be AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
PUSH/O : Press to turn the system
changed. connection for external audio
on and off. Turn to adjust the
4. To increase or decrease the time volume. devices.
or date, turn f clockwise or Z : Press to eject a disc from the PUSH/SEL: Turn to manually find a
counterclockwise. CD. See CD Player (Radio without station or highlight a menu
See Clock (Radio with Touchscreen) Touchscreen) on page 7‑21 or CD selection. Press to select a
on page 5‑8 or Clock (Radio without Player (Radio with Touchscreen) on highlighted selection.
Touchscreen) on page 5‑7. page 7‑23.

In Brief 1-19
. Press OK or the Back screen
D: Press to go to the Home Page. 1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM
button to save the adjustments
See “Home Page” in Operation main page, press and hold any
1−5 buttons or one of the preset that were made.
(Radio without Touchscreen) on
page 7‑5 or Operation (Radio with screen buttons at the bottom of Set Date:
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8. the screen. After a few seconds,
a beep is heard and the new
. Press the up or down arrows to
SRCE: Press to change the audio preset information displays on increase or decrease the Month,
source to AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if that screen button. Day, and Year settings.
equipped), CD, USB, iPod®, . Press and hold to quickly
or AUX. 2. Repeat for each preset.
increase or decrease the date
FAV: Press to display the favorite Setting the Time and Date settings.
list or add a favorite. See Operation Press Settings on the Home Page, . Press OK or the Back screen
(Radio without Touchscreen) on then press the Set Time or Set Date button to save the adjustments
page 7‑5 or Operation (Radio with settings screen button to display the that were made.
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8. different options for setting the time See Clock (Radio with Touchscreen)
© SEEK or SEEK ¨ : Seek or scan and date. on page 5‑8 or Clock (Radio without
stations and tracks. See Operation Set Time: Touchscreen) on page 5‑7.
page 7‑5 or Operation (Radio with . Press the up or down arrows to
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8. increase or decrease the Hours, Satellite Radio
/ BACK: Press to return to the
Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite
the clock. radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
previous screen in a menu.
. Press and hold to quickly satellite radio subscription can
Storing Radio Station Presets increase or decrease the time receive SiriusXM programming.
Up to 30 preset stations can be settings.
stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if
equipped) can be mixed.

1-20 In Brief
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls

Service
This vehicle may have an auxiliary
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service input on the radio faceplate and a
based in the 48 contiguous United USB port in the instrument panel
States and 10 Canadian provinces. storage area. External devices such
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3
variety of programming and players, CD changers, USB storage
commercial-free music, coast to devices, etc. can be connected to
coast, and in digital-quality sound. the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm
A fee is required to receive the (1/8 in) input jack or the USB port
SiriusXM service. depending on the audio system.
Refer to: See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑34.
. www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.). Bluetooth®
. www.xmradio.ca or call The Bluetooth® system allows users w or x : Press to change favorite
1-877-209-0079 (Canada). with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile radio stations, select tracks on a
phone to make and receive CD/DVD, or navigate tracks or
See Satellite Radio (Radio without folders on an iPod or USB device.
hands-free calls using the vehicle
audio system and controls. g: Press to silence the vehicle
Satellite Radio (Radio with
Touchscreen) on page 7‑18. The Bluetooth-enabled mobile speakers only. Press again to turn
phone must be paired with the the sound on. Press and hold longer
in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it than two seconds to interact with
can be used in the vehicle. Not all OnStar® or Bluetooth systems.
phones will support all functions. x: Press to reject an incoming
See Bluetooth on page 7‑45. call, or end a current call.

In Brief 1-21
SRCE: Press to switch between Cruise Control [: Press to disengage cruise

the radio, CD, and for equipped control without erasing the set
vehicles, DVD, front auxiliary, and speed from memory.
rear auxiliary.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑29.
¨: Press to seek the next radio
station, track, or chapter while Infotainment System
sourced to the CD or DVD slot, or to
select tracks and folders on an iPod If the vehicle has a base radio it is
or USB device. included in this manual. See the
separate infotainment manual for
+ e or − e : Press to increase or to information on the connected radios,
decrease the volume. audio players, phone, navigation
See Steering Wheel Controls on system, and voice or speech
page 5‑2. recognition. There is also
information on settings and
T: Press to turn cruise control on downloadable applications (if
and off. The indicator comes on equipped).
when cruise control is on.
Driver Information Center
+ RES: Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)
speed, or press and hold to To access the DIC, some vehicles
accelerate. have buttons located on the
SET–: Press to set the speed and instrument panel.
activate cruise control or to make
the vehicle decelerate.

1-22 In Brief
Some vehicles do not have the Power Outlets

buttons shown, however some of
the menus can be viewed by using The vehicle has 12-volt accessory
the trip odometer reset stem. power outlets which can be used to
plug in electrical equipment, such as
See Driver Information Center (DIC) a cell phone or MP3 player.
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28
or Driver Information Center (DIC) The power outlets are located:
V: Press to set or reset certain (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑23. . On the instrument panel below
functions and to turn off or the climate controls.
acknowledge messages on the DIC. Ultrasonic Parking Assist . Inside the center floor console.
U: Press to customize the feature If available, this system uses
settings on your vehicle. See
. At the rear of the center floor
sensors on the rear bumper to console.
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC assist with parking and avoiding
Buttons) on page 5‑41 for more objects while in R (Reverse). . In the rear cargo area.
information. It operates at speeds less than To use the outlets, remove the
T: Press to display the oil life, 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible cover.
park assist on vehicles with this beeps to provide distance and
system information. See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.
feature, units, tire pressure readings
on vehicles with this feature, and Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
compass calibration and zone rear bumper clean to ensure proper
setting on vehicles with this feature. operation.
3 : Press this button to display See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
the odometer, trip odometers, fuel page 9‑31.
range, average economy, timer, fuel
used, and average speed.

In Brief 1-23
Universal Remote System Performance and

Maintenance
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has a traction control
system that limits wheel spin, and
the StabiliTrak system that assists
The Universal Home Remote with directional control of the vehicle
System allows for garage door in difficult driving conditions. Both
openers, security systems, and systems turn on automatically every
home automation devices to be time the vehicle is started.
programmed to work with these Vent: Press the front or rear of the . To turn off traction control, press
buttons in the vehicle. switch to vent or close the sunroof. and release t located on the
See Universal Remote System on Express-open/Express-close: instrument panel, and the
page 5‑48. From the closed position, press and appropriate DIC message
release the rear or front of the displays. See Ride Control
Sunroof switch to express-open or System Messages on page 5‑37.
The ignition must be in ON/RUN, express-close the sunroof. . Press and release t again to
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained For more information see Sunroof turn on the traction control
Accessory Power (RAP) must be on page 2‑20. system. The StabiliTrak system
active to operate the sunroof and remains on.
power sunshade. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on For more information, see
page 9‑18. StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑27.

1-24 In Brief
Tire Pressure Monitor tire pressures are getting low and 2. If the vehicle has Driver
the tires need to be inflated to the Information Center (DIC)
This vehicle may have a Tire proper pressure. buttons: Press the vehicle
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). information button until OIL LIFE
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain REMAINING displays.
the correct tire pressures. If the vehicle does not have
See Tire Pressure Monitor System Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 10‑44. buttons: The vehicle must be in
P (Park) to access this display.
Press the trip odometer reset
Engine Oil Life System stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING
The low tire pressure warning light The engine oil life system calculates displays.
alerts to a significant loss in engine oil life based on vehicle use
pressure of one of the vehicle's 3. If the vehicle has Driver
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE Information Center (DIC)
tires. If the warning light comes on, OIL SOON message when it is time
stop as soon as possible and inflate buttons: Press and hold the set/
to change the engine oil and filter. reset button until “100%” is
the tires to the recommended The oil life system should be reset
pressure shown on the Tire and displayed. Three chimes sound
to 100% only following an oil and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Loading Information label. See change.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9. SOON message goes off.
The warning light will remain on until Resetting the Oil Life System If the vehicle does not have
the tire pressure is corrected. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Driver Information Center (DIC)
The low tire pressure warning light with the engine off. buttons: Press and hold the trip
may come on in cool weather when odometer reset stem until OIL
the vehicle is first started, and then LIFE REMAINING shows
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This “100%.” Three chimes sound
may be an early indicator that the and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message goes off.

In Brief 1-25
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

. Combine several trips into a Roadside Assistance and OnStar
single trip. (U.S. and Canada)
See Engine Oil Life System on
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
page 10‑9. If the vehicle has an active OnStar
the same TPC Spec number subscription, contact OnStar and the
Driving for Better Fuel molded into the tire's sidewall vehicle’s current GPS location will
near the size. be sent to an OnStar advisor to
Economy assess the situation, contact
. Follow recommended scheduled
Driving habits can affect fuel maintenance. Roadside Assistance, and relay the
mileage. Here are some driving tips exact location to send help.
to get the best fuel economy Roadside Assistance
possible.
Program OnStar®
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate If equipped, this vehicle has a
smoothly. U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
. Brake gradually and avoid TTY Users (U.S. Only): that can connect to a live Advisor
abrupt stops. 1-888-889-2438 for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 Connection, and Diagnostic
. Avoid idling the engine for long Services. See OnStar Overview on
periods of time. Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 page 14‑1.
. When road and weather As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
conditions are appropriate, use you are automatically enrolled in the
cruise control. Roadside Assistance program.
. Always follow posted speed See Roadside Assistance Program
limits or drive more slowly when (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
conditions require. Assistance Program (U.S. and
. Keep vehicle tires properly Canada) on page 13‑11.
inflated.

1-26 In Brief
2 NOTES

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-15 Keys
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys and Locks Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 { WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Interior Mirrors the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Automatic Dimming Rearview seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Windows or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Roof closing window. Do not leave
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 children in a vehicle with the
Doors
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition key.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . 2-11
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
If locked out of the vehicle, call

. Check the location. Other
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside vehicles or objects may be
Assistance Program (Mexico) on blocking the signal.
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance . Check the transmitter's battery.
Program (U.S. and Canada) on See “Battery Replacement” later
page 13‑11. in this section.
With an active OnStar subscription, . If the transmitter is still not
an OnStar Advisor may remotely working correctly, see your
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar dealer or a qualified technician
Overview on page 14‑1. for service.
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

The key is used for the ignition and (RKE) System
all door locks.
(RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
The key has a bar-coded key tag page 13‑21 for information
that the dealer or qualified locksmith transmitter functions work up to
regarding Part 15 of the Federal 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
can use to make new keys. Store Communications Commission (FCC)
this information in a safe place, not rules and Industry Canada There are other conditions which
in the vehicle. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. can affect the performance of the
If it becomes difficult to turn the key, transmitter. See Remote Keyless
If there is a decrease in the RKE Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.
inspect the key blade for debris. operating range:
See your dealer if a replacement . Check the distance. The
key or additional key is needed. transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.

when Q is pressed again within 8 (Power Liftgate): Press and

five seconds. See Vehicle hold until the liftgate begins to move
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) to open or close the liftgate. The
on page 5‑41 for additional taillamps flash and a chime sounds
information. to indicate when the liftgate is
opening or closing.
Pressing Q may arm the content
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm System on page 2‑11. Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The parking
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock lamps flash and the horn sounds
only the driver door. If K is pressed three times.
again within five seconds, all
With Remote Start and Power remaining doors unlock. The interior Press and hold L for more than
Liftgate Shown, Without Similar lamps come on and stay on for two seconds to activate the panic
alarm. The parking lamps flash and
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For 20 seconds or until the ignition is
the horn sounds repeatedly for
vehicles with this feature, see turned on.
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑4 If enabled through the DIC, the when the ignition is moved to ON/
for additional information. parking lamps flash twice to indicate RUN or L is pressed again. The
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
doors. Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
the panic alarm to work.
on page 5‑41.
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
parking lamps flash once to indicate disarms the content theft-deterrent
locking has occurred. If enabled system. See Vehicle Alarm System
through the DIC, the horn sounds on page 2‑11.

Programming Transmitters to Notice: When replacing the

. Twist the tool until the
the Vehicle battery, do not touch any of the transmitter is separated.
circuitry on the transmitter. Static 2. Remove the old battery. Do not
Only RKE transmitters programmed from your body could damage the
to this vehicle will work. If a use a metal object.
transmitter.
transmitter is lost or stolen, a 3. Insert the new battery, positive
replacement can be purchased and side facing down. Replace with a
programmed through your dealer. CR2032 or equivalent battery.
When the replacement transmitter is 4. Snap the transmitter back
programmed to this vehicle, all together.
remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work Remote Vehicle Start
once the new transmitter is This vehicle may have a remote
programmed. Each vehicle can starting feature that starts the
have up to eight transmitters engine from outside of the vehicle.
programmed to it. See your dealer
/ (Remote Start): This button is
to program transmitters to this
located on the RKE transmitter if the
vehicle.
1. Separate the transmitter with a vehicle has remote start.
Battery Replacement flat, thin object, such as a flat Laws in some communities may
Replace the battery if the REPLACE head screwdriver. restrict the use of remote starters.
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY . Carefully insert the tool into For example, some laws may
message displays in the DIC. the notch located along the require a person using the remote
parting line of the start to have the vehicle in view
transmitter. Do not insert when doing so. Check local
the tool too far. Stop as regulations for any requirements on
soon as resistance is felt. remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature vehicle's lights cannot be seen, After entering the vehicle during a
if the vehicle is low on fuel. The press and hold / for at least remote start, insert and turn the key
vehicle could run out of fuel. four seconds. to the ON/RUN position to drive the
If the vehicle has the remote start vehicle.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
feature, the RKE transmitter range lamps will turn on and remain on as If the vehicle is left running it
may be less while the vehicle is long as the engine is running. The automatically shuts off after
running. doors will be locked and the climate 10 minutes unless a time extension
There are other conditions that can control system will operate has been done.
affect the performance of the automatically if the vehicle has the Extending Engine Run Time
transmitter. See Remote Keyless automatic system, or at the same
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for setting as when the vehicle was last To extend the engine run time by
additional information. turned off. 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 while
the engine is still running. The
Starting the Engine Using If the vehicle has an automatic engine run time can only be
Remote Start climate control system and heated extended if it is the first remote start
seats, the heated seats turn on since the vehicle has been driven.
To start the vehicle: during colder outside temperatures Remote start can be extended
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the and shut off when the key is turned one time.
vehicle. to ON/RUN. See Heated and
Ventilated Front Seats on page 3‑8 If the remote start procedure is used
2. Press and release Q on the for more information. again before the first 10-minute time
RKE transmitter. frame has ended, the first
The rear window defogger and 10 minutes will immediately expire
3. Immediately after completing heated mirrors, if the vehicle has and the second 10-minute time
Step 2, press and hold / until them, turn on during colder outside frame will start.
the parking lamps flash. If the temperatures and turn off when the
key is turned to ON/RUN.

For example, if Q and then / are Conditions in Which the

Remote Start Will Not Work WARNING (Continued)
pressed again after the vehicle has
been running for five minutes, The vehicle cannot be started using crash is increased if the
10 minutes are added, allowing the the remote start feature if the key is doors are not locked. So, all
engine to run for a total of in the ignition, the hood is open, or if passengers should wear
15 minutes. there is an emission control system safety belts properly and the
A maximum of two remote starts or malfunction. doors should be locked
remote start attempts are allowed whenever the vehicle is
The engine turns off during a remote
between ignition cycles. driven.
start if the coolant temperature gets
After the vehicle's engine has been too high or if the oil pressure . Young children who get into
started two times using the remote gets low. unlocked vehicles may be
start button, the ignition must be unable to get out. A child can
turned on and then back off before Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
the remote start procedure can be and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
used again.
{ WARNING heat stroke. Always lock the
Canceling a Remote Start vehicle whenever leaving it.
Unlocked doors can be
To manually shut off a remote start: dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the . Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
vehicle and press / until the children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
parking lamps turn off. can help prevent this from
vehicle. When a door is
. Turn on the hazard warning happening.
locked, the handle will not
flashers.
open it. The chance of being
. Turn the ignition switch on and thrown out of the vehicle in a
then off. (Continued)

To lock or unlock a door manually: Pressing the power lock switch

. From the inside use the door twice or the lock button on the RKE
lock knob on the window sill. transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and
. From the outside turn the key immediately lock all the doors.
toward the front or rear of the
vehicle, or press the or button on This feature will not operate if the
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key is in the ignition.
transmitter. This feature can be programmed by
using the Driver Information Center
Power Door Locks (DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”
under Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
Uplevel Model
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the Automatic Door Locks
doors.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. unlock feature enable you to
program the vehicle's power door
Delayed Locking locks. This feature can be
When locking the doors with the programmed through the Driver
power lock switch and a door or the Information Center (DIC). See
liftgate is open, the doors will lock Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
five seconds after the last door is Buttons) on page 5‑41 for more
Base Model closed. You will hear three chimes information.
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.

Lockout Protection Doors

This feature protects you from
locking the key in the vehicle when Liftgate
the key is in the ignition and a front
door is open. { WARNING
If the driver side power door lock
switch is pressed when the driver Exhaust gases can enter the
door is open and the key is in the vehicle if it is driven with the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and liftgate or trunk/hatch open,
then the driver door will unlock. or with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
If the passenger side power door
body and the trunk/hatch or
lock switch is pressed when the Open the rear doors to access the
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
front passenger door is open and security locks on the inside edge of
the key is in the ignition, all of the each door. carbon monoxide (CO) which
doors will lock and then the front cannot be seen or smelled. It can
To set the locks, insert a key into cause unconsciousness and even
passenger door will unlock. the slot and turn it to the horizontal death.
position. The door can only be
Safety Locks opened from the outside with the If the vehicle must be driven with
The vehicle has rear door security door unlocked. To return the door to the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
locks to prevent passengers from normal operation, turn the slot to the . Close all of the windows.
opening the rear doors from the vertical position.
. Fully open the air outlets on
inside.
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)

(RKE) transmitter twice. See The power liftgate can be power

WARNING (Continued) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) opened and closed in the
System Operation on page 2‑2. following ways:
. Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that To open the liftgate, press the touch . Press and hold 8 on the
brings in only outside air and pad under the liftgate handle and lift RKE transmitter. See Remote
set the fan speed to the up. The vehicle must be in P (Park) Keyless Entry (RKE) System
highest setting. See “Climate and the battery must be charged. Operation on page 2‑2.
Control Systems” in the Use the pull cup to lower and close
Index. the liftgate.
. If the vehicle is equipped with Always close the liftgate before
a power liftgate, disable the driving.
power liftgate function.
Power Liftgate
See Engine Exhaust on
On vehicles with a power liftgate,
page 9‑20. the vehicle must be in P (Park) to
operate. The taillamps flash and a
Notice: To avoid damage to the chime sounds when the power
liftgate or liftgate glass, make liftgate moves.
sure the area above and behind
the liftgate is clear before
opening it.
{ WARNING
You, or others, could be injured if
. Press O.
Manual Liftgate caught in the path of the power . Press the touch pad on the
To unlock the liftgate, press the liftgate. Make sure there is no one outside liftgate handle.
power door lock switch or press K in the way of the liftgate as it is Pressing the buttons or touch pad a
on the Remote Keyless Entry opening and closing. second time while the liftgate is
moving reverses the direction.

continue to completion. If the If more obstacles are encountered

vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and on the same power cycle, the power
accelerated before the power liftgate function deactivates, and the liftgate
latch closes, the liftgate may must be opened or closed manually.
reverse to the open position. Cargo A message displays on the Driver
could fall out of the vehicle. Always Information Center (DIC) to indicate
make sure the power liftgate is that the liftgate is open. See Door
closed and latched before Ajar Messages on page 5‑32. After
driving away. removing the obstacles, manually
If the power liftgate is used and the open the liftgate fully or close and
liftgate support struts have lost latch the liftgate. The liftgate will
pressure, the taillamps will flash and resume normal power operation.
Power Liftgate Touch Pad a chime will sound. The liftgate will The vehicle has pinch sensors
The liftgate can also be closed by stay open temporarily, and then located on the side edges of the
slowly close. See a dealer for liftgate. If an object is caught
pressing l next to the liftgate service before using the liftgate if between the liftgate and the body of
latch. Press l a second time this occurs. the vehicle and presses against a
during the liftgate operation to sensor, the liftgate will reverse
reverse the operation. Obstacle Detection Features direction and open fully. The liftgate
The power liftgate may be A warning chime will sound and the will remain open until it is activated
temporarily disabled under extreme liftgate will automatically reverse again or closed manually. Do not
temperatures or under low battery direction to the full closed or open force the liftgate open or closed
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate position if an obstacle is during a power cycle.
can be operated manually. encountered during a power open or
close cycle. After removing the
If the vehicle is shifted out of obstacle the liftgate will resume
P (Park) while the liftgate power normal operation.
function is in progress, it will

Manual Operation of Power To open the liftgate, press the touch Vehicle Security
Liftgate pad on the outside of the liftgate
handle and lift up. Use the pull This vehicle has theft-deterrent
handle to lower and close the features; however, they do not make
liftgate, the liftgate latch will power the vehicle impossible to steal.
close.
Always close the liftgate before Vehicle Alarm System
driving. On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm
system, to activate the system:
8 on the RKE transmitter or
If
l on the liftgate is pressed while . Press Q on the Remote Keyless
in manual operation mode, the Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
taillamps will flash three times, but power door lock switch when
the liftgate will not move. any door is open.
It is not recommended to drive with
To change the liftgate to manual the liftgate open. However, if the
operation, press OFF on the power vehicle must be driven with the
liftgate switch. A message displays liftgate open, the liftgate should be
on the DIC indicating manual set to manual operation.
operation mode. See Door Ajar
Messages on page 5‑32.
The security light flashes.
With the liftgate in manual mode
and all of the doors unlocked, the When the door is closed, the
liftgate can be manually opened and security light stops flashing and
closed. stays on solid for approximately

30 seconds. The content during the 10-second pre-alarm, the 2. Press Q.

theft-deterrent alarm is not alarm goes off. The headlamps flash
armed until the security light and the horn sounds for about 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the
goes off. 30 seconds, then turns off to save door, and wait for the security
the battery power. light to go out.
If the delayed locking feature is
active, the alarm is not activated The vehicle can be started with the 4. Reach in through the window,
until all doors are closed and the correct ignition key if the alarm has unlock the door with the manual
security light goes off. been set off. door lock, and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
. Press Q when the driver door is To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident: If the alarm does not sound when it
closed. The security light comes should, but the headlamps flash,
on solid for approximately . Lock the vehicle with the door check to see if the horn works. The
30 seconds and then goes off. key after the doors are closed. horn fuse may be blown. To replace
The content theft-deterrent alarm the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
is not armed until the security
. Unlock the door with the RKE
transmitter. Unlocking a door any Breakers on page 10‑29.
light goes off.
other way sets off the alarm if If the alarm does not sound or the
The theft-deterrent system will not the system has been armed. headlamps do not flash, see your
activate if the doors are locked with dealer for service.
the vehicle's key or the manual Press K or place the key in the
door lock. ignition and turn it to START to turn
off the alarm. Immobilizer
If a locked door is opened without
using the RKE transmitter, a Testing the Alarm See Radio Frequency Statement on
10-second pre-alarm occurs. The page 13‑21 for information
To test the alarm: regarding Part 15 of the Federal
horn chirps and the lights flash.
If the key is not placed in the 1. From inside the vehicle, lower Communications Commission (FCC)
ignition and turned to START or the the driver side window, and open rules and Industry Canada
the driver door. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
door is not unlocked by pressing Q

Immobilizer Operation vehicle will be discouraged because It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
of the high number of electrical key decoder to learn the transponder
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ codes. value of a new or replacement key.
(Personalized Automotive Security Up to 10 keys may be programmed
System) theft-deterrent system. If the engine does not start and the
security light on the instrument to the vehicle. The following
PASS-Key III+ is a passive procedure is for programming
theft-deterrent system. panel comes on when trying to start
the vehicle, there may be a problem additional keys only. If all currently
The system is automatically armed with the theft-deterrent system. Turn programmed keys are lost or do not
when the key is removed from the the ignition off and try again. operate, you must see your dealer
ignition. or a locksmith who can service
If the engine still does not start, and PASS-Key III+ to have keys made
The system is automatically the key appears to be undamaged, and programmed to the system.
disarmed when the key is turned to try another ignition key and check
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit See your dealer or a locksmith who
or START from the LOCK/OFF Breakers on page 10‑29 for can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
position. additional information. If the engine new key blank that is cut exactly as
still does not start with the other key, the ignition key that operates the
You do not have to manually arm or system.
disarm the system. the vehicle needs service. If the
vehicle does start, the first key may To program the new additional key:
The security light comes on if there be faulty. See your dealer who can
is a problem with arming or service the PASS-Key III+ to have a 1. Verify that the new key has a 1
disarming the theft-deterrent new key made. In an emergency, stamped on it.
system. contact Roadside Assistance. See 2. Insert the already programmed
When the PASS-Key III+ system Roadside Assistance Program key in the ignition and start the
senses an incorrect key, the vehicle (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside engine. If the engine does not
does not start. Anyone using a Assistance Program (U.S. and start, see your dealer for service.
trial-and-error method to start the Canada) on page 13‑11.

3. After the engine has started, turn Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors
the key to LOCK/OFF, and
remove the key.
Convex Mirrors
4. Insert the key to be programmed
and turn it to the ON/RUN
position within five seconds of { WARNING
the original key being turned to A convex mirror can make things,
the LOCK/OFF position. like other vehicles, look farther
The security light turns off once away than they really are. If you
the key has been programmed. cut too sharply into the right lane,
5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additional you could hit a vehicle on the
keys are to be programmed. right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or Base Model
changing lanes.
damaged, see your dealer or a
locksmith to have a new key made. To adjust the mirrors:
The passenger side mirror is convex 1. Press o or p to select a mirror.
The SERVICE THEFT
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
DETERRENT SYSTEM message
curved so more can be seen from 2. Press the control pad to adjust
displays on the Driver Information
the driver seat. the mirror.
Center (DIC) when there is a
problem with the theft-deterrent 3. Return the switch to the center
system. See Security Messages on to deselect the mirror.
page 5‑37 for additional information.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Folding Mirrors Resetting the Power Folding

Mirrors
For vehicles with manual folding
mirrors, push the mirror toward the Reset the power folding mirrors if:
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return . The mirrors are accidentally
to its original position. obstructed while folding.
For vehicles with power folding . They are accidentally manually
mirrors: folded/unfolded.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the mirrors, fold and unfold
Uplevel Model the mirrors one time using the
power folding mirror controls.
To adjust the mirrors:
A popping noise may be heard
1. Press (1) or (2) to select a during the resetting. This sound is
mirror. normal during the reset operation.
2. Press the control pad to adjust
the mirror.
3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect
the mirror. 1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) to the driving position.
If the vehicle has the SBZA system, 2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to
see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) the folded position.
on page 9‑32.

Heated Mirrors Driving with the Blind Spot 1. When the approaching vehicle is
Mirror a long distance away, the image
For vehicles with heated mirrors: in the main mirror is small and
1 (Rear Window Defogger): near the inboard edge of the
Press to heat the mirrors. mirror.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under 2. As the vehicle gets closer, the
Dual Automatic Climate Control image in the main mirror gets
System on page 8‑4. larger and moves outboard.
3. As the vehicle enters the blind
Blind Spot Mirrors zone, the image transitions from
The blind spot mirror is a small the main mirror to the blind spot
convex mirror built into the upper mirror.
and outer corner of both outside 4. When the vehicle is in the blind
mirrors. It can show objects that zone, the image only appears in
may be in the vehicle's blind zone. the blind spot mirror.
Using the Outside Mirror with
the Blind Spot Mirror
1. Set the main mirror so that the
side of the vehicle can just be
seen and the blind spot mirror
has an unobstructed view.
2. When checking for traffic or
before changing a lane, look at
the main driver/passenger side
Actual Mirror View mirror to observe traffic in the
adjacent lane, behind your

vehicle. Check the blind spot Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming

mirror for a vehicle in the blind
zone. Then, glance over your
Rearview Mirror
shoulder to double check before Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic
moving slowly into the Adjust the mirror to view the area dimming inside rearview mirror.
adjacent lane. behind the vehicle. The mirror automatically reduces
For vehicles with a manual rearview the glare from the headlamps from
Park Tilt Mirrors mirror, push the tab forward for behind. The dimming feature and
If the vehicle has the memory daytime use and pull it for nighttime the indicator light come on when the
package, the outside mirrors have a use to avoid glare from the vehicle is started. There may be an
park tilt feature. This feature tilts the headlamps from behind. on and off setting on the mirror.
outside mirrors to a preselected For vehicles with OnStar, center the O (On/Off): Press to turn the
position when the vehicle is in twist knob for daytime use and turn dimming feature on or off.
R (Reverse). This allows the driver it to the side for nighttime use.
to view the curb for parallel parking. Cleaning the Mirror
Vehicles with OnStar have three
The passenger and/or driver mirror control buttons at the bottom of the Do not spray glass cleaner directly
returns to its original position when mirror. See your dealer for more on the mirror. Use a soft towel
the vehicle is shifted out of information about OnStar and how dampened with water.
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned to subscribe to it. See OnStar
off or to OFF/LOCK. Overview on page 14‑1.
This feature can be turned on or off
through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑41 for more information.

Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
{ WARNING pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
Never leave a child, a helpless windows are up. To reduce the
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, sound, open either a front window
especially with the windows or the sunroof, if equipped.
closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the Power Windows
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. { WARNING
Uplevel Shown, Base Similar
Children could be seriously
The driver door also has switches
injured or killed if caught in the that control the passenger and rear
path of a closing window. Never windows. The power windows work
leave keys in a vehicle with with the ignition in ACC/
children. When there are children ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when
in the rear seat, use the window Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
lockout button to prevent active. See Retained Accessory
operation of the windows. See Power (RAP) on page 9‑18.
Keys on page 2‑1.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull up on the front edge of
the switch to raise the window.

Express-Up/Express-Down 2. Press and continue to hold the Rear Window Lockout

Windows window switch until the window
is fully open.
A window with the express-up/down
feature allows it to be raised or 3. Pull up and hold the window
lowered without holding the switch. switch to close the window.
Press or pull the window switch fully Continue to hold it briefly after
and release it to activate the the window is fully closed.
express feature. The express mode 4. Repeat for each window that has
can be canceled by pressing or the express-up feature.
pulling the switch.
Anti-Pinch Feature
Programming the Power
Windows The anti-pinch feature is on
windows with the express-up
If the battery on the vehicle has feature. If an object is in the way of
been recharged, disconnected, the window as it is express-closing, The rear window lockout feature
or replaced, windows with the or in certain weather conditions like prevents the rear passenger
express-up feature need to be severe icing, the window will stop windows from operating, except
reprogrammed for this feature to and open to a factory preset from the driver position.
work. To program the window: position. The window functions Press v to activate the rear
1. Close all doors with the ignition normally once the obstruction is
window lockout switch. The
in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/ removed.
indicator light comes on when
RUN position, or when Retained activated.
Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory Press v again to deactivate the
Power (RAP) on page 9‑18. lockout switch.

Sun Visors Roof

Sunroof
The ignition must be in ON/RUN,
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) must be
active to operate the sunroof and
power sunshade. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑18.
Pull the sun visor down to block The vehicle may have a sunroof
glare. Detach the sun visor from the over the front seats and a rear
center mount to pivot to the side sunroof over the second row seats. Vent: From the closed position,
window, or to extend along the rod, The rear sunroof does not open. press and hold the front of the
if available. switch to vent the sunroof. Press
and hold the rear of the switch to
close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:
From the closed position, press and
release the rear of the switch to
express-open the sunroof. Press
and release the front of the switch to
express-close the sunroof.
Manual Sunshade
The front sunshade must be opened
and closed manually. To open the Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunshade, press the button on the sunroof seal or in the track. This
sunshade handle to release it and could cause an issue with sunroof
guide it back. To close the operation or noise. It could also plug
sunshade, pull the sunshade the water drainage system.
forward until it latches. Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.

2 NOTES

Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Replacing Airbag System
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Child Restraints
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Front Seats Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-42
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 for Children (LATCH
Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Replacing LATCH System
How Does an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
What Will You See after an (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-53
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and Adjust the head restraint so that the To raise or lower the head restraint,
adjusted properly. top of the restraint is at the same press the button located on the side
height as the top of the occupant's of the head restraint, and pull up or
head. This position reduces the push the head restraint down, and
The vehicle's front seats have
chance of a neck injury in a crash. release the button. Pull and push on
adjustable head restraints in the
the head restraint after the button is
outboard seating positions.
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To adjust the head restraint forward,
grasp the head restraint and pull
forward until the desired locking
position is reached.

To adjust the head restraint Front Seats 2. Driver Seat Height Adjustment
rearward, press the button located Lever
on the side of the head restraint,
and push the head restraint Seat Adjustment 3. Seatback Lever
rearward until the desired locking To adjust a manual seat:
position is reached. Try to move the { WARNING 1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat
head restraint after the button is to unlock it.
released to make sure that it is You can lose control of the
locked in place. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver 2. Slide the seat to the desired
seat while the vehicle is moving. position, and then release the
The front seat outboard head handle (1).
Adjust the driver seat only when
restraints are not designed to be
removed. the vehicle is not moving. 3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
Rear Seats place.
The vehicle's second-row seats Move the lever (2) up or down to
have head restraints in the outboard raise or lower the seat.
seating positions that cannot be
Use the lever (3) to adjust the
adjusted.
seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks
The vehicle's third-row seats have on page 3‑5.
headrests in the outboard seating
positions that cannot be adjusted.
The second-row head restraints and
third-row headrests are not
designed to be removed.
1. Seat Adjustment Handle

Power Seat Adjustment To adjust a power seat, if equipped: Lumbar Adjustment

. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
Manual Lumbar
control (1) forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control (1) up
or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control (1)
up or down.
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or
1. Seat Adjustment Control rearward.
2. Seatback Control See Reclining Seatbacks on
If available, move the handle
3. Lumbar Control page 3‑5.
forward or rearward to increase or
. Increase or decrease lumbar decrease lumbar support.
support by pressing the front or
rear of the control (3).
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑4.

Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
If available, press and hold the front other injuries.
or rear of control to increase or
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
The lap belt could go up over
decrease lumbar support. Release your abdomen. The belt forces
the control when the seatback would be there, not at your pelvic { WARNING
reaches the desired level of lumbar bones. This could cause serious
support. If either seatback is not locked, it
internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause
vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to Memory Seats

make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
If available, the controls on the
2. Move the seatback to the
driver door are used to program and
desired position, and then
To adjust a power seatback, recall memory settings for the driver
release the lever to lock the
if equipped: seat and outside mirrors.
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to . Tilt the top of the control Storing Memory Positions
make sure it is locked. rearward to recline. To save into memory:
To return the seatback to the upright . Tilt the top of the control forward 1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
position: to raise. recliner, and both outside
1. Lift the lever fully without mirrors.
applying pressure to the Not all vehicles will have the
seatback, and the seatback will ability to save and recall the
return to the upright position. mirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” until This feature is turned on or off using If this feature is programmed on in
two beeps sound. the vehicle personalization menu. the vehicle personalization menu,
3. Repeat for a second driver See Vehicle Personalization (With automatic seat movement occurs
position using “2.” DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41. when the ignition key is removed.
To recall, press and release “1” or To stop recall movement, press one A single beep sounds. The driver
“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park). of the power seat controls, memory seat moves back approximately
A single beep will sound. The seat buttons, or the power mirror buttons. 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
and outside mirrors will move to the If something has blocked the driver farther, press S again until the seat
position previously stored for the seat while recalling a memory is all the way back.
identified driver. position, the recall may stop. If something has blocked the driver
Remove the obstruction; then press seat while recalling the exit position,
Memory Remote Recall and hold the appropriate manual the recall may stop. Remove the
The memory feature can recall the control for the memory item that is obstruction; then press and hold the
driver seat and outside mirrors to not recalling for two seconds. Try power seat control rearward for
stored positions when entering the recalling the memory position again two seconds. Try recalling the exit
vehicle. by pressing the appropriate memory position again. If the exit position is
To activate, unlock the driver door button. If the memory position is still still not recalling, see your dealer for
with the Remote Keyless not recalling, see your dealer for service.
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver service.
See Vehicle Personalization (With
seat and outside mirrors will move Easy Exit Driver Seat DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
to the memory position associated
with the transmitter used to unlock This feature can move the seat
the vehicle. rearward to allow extra room to exit
the vehicle.
S (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press
to activate the recall. The vehicle
must be in P (Park).

Heated and Ventilated the off setting. The lights indicate

three for the highest setting and one
Front Seats for the lowest.
The passenger heated seat may
{ WARNING take longer to heat up.
If you cannot feel temperature The heated and/or cooled seats are
change or pain to the skin, the canceled after the ignition is
seat heater may cause burns. To turned off.
reduce the risk of burns, people Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
Remote Start Heated Seats
with such a condition should use Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
care when using the seat heater, Similar When it is cold outside, the heated
especially for long periods of seats may turn on automatically
If available, the buttons are on the during a remote vehicle start. The
time. Do not place anything on
center console. To operate, the heated seats will be canceled when
the seat that insulates against engine must be running.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the ignition is turned on. Press the
cover, or similar item. This may I (Heated Seatback): If available, desired heated seat button to use
cause the seat heater to press to heat the seatback only. the heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
overheat. An overheated seat H (Cooled Seat): If available,
heater may cause a burn or may press to cool the entire seat. The heated seat button lights will
damage the seat. not turn on during a remote start.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and The temperature of an unoccupied
seatback. seat may be reduced.
Press the button once for the See Remote Vehicle Start on
highest setting. With each press of page 2‑4.
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to

Rear Seats Entering and Exiting the

Third Row
{ WARNING
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row:
place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in
1. Seat Adjustment Handle front of or on the second row
2. Reclining Seatback Strap Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on the
the safety belts still fastened may floor.
3. Sliding Seat Lever
cause damage to the seat or the 2. Move the front center console
safety belts. Always unbuckle the armrest completely forward. See
safety belts and return them to Center Console Storage on
their normal stowed position page 4‑2.
before folding a rear seat.
3. Place the folding armrests in the
upright position.
4. Make sure that the safety belt is
unfastened and in the stowed
position.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (3) 5. Push and pull on the seatback 3. Pull forward on the reclining
forward. The seatback will tilt and seat cushion to make sure seatback strap (2).
forward, and the seat will begin they are locked in place. The head restraint will fold down
sliding forward. Continue to push 6. Check that the safety belt is not automatically.
forward on the seatback until the under the seat cushion.
entire seat moves all the way To return the seatback to the
forward and the seat cushion is Reclining the Seatbacks seating position, lift the seatback
folded. and push it rearward until it locks
To recline the seatback: into place. Push and pull on the
Returning the Seat to the 1. Leaning rearward in the seat, seatback to make sure it is locked.
Seating Position pull the reclining seatback Pull up on the head restraint to
To return the second row seat to its strap (2). return it to the upright, locked
normal seating position: position.
2. Move the seatback to the
1. Remove objects on the floor desired position, and then Adjusting the Seats
behind the second row seat or in release the strap (2) to lock the
seatback in place. To adjust the second row seats, pull
the seat tracks on the floor. outward on the seat adjustment
2. Slide the seat rearward by 3. Push and pull on the seatback to handle (1). Slide the seat forward or
pushing on the seatback until make sure it is locked. rearward to the desired position.
the seat is locked into place. Release the handle (1), and push
Folding the Seatback
and pull on the seat to make sure it
3. Continue pushing the seatback To fold the second row seatbacks: is locked.
rearward until the seatback is
locked into place. 1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
4. Push down on the rear of the
seat cushion until it is locked in 2. Place the armrest in the upright
place. position, and unfasten the
safety belt.

Third Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:

1. Remove anything on or under
{ WARNING the seat.
Using the third row seating

position while the second row is
folded, or pushed forward in the
entry position, could cause injury
in a sudden stop or crash. Be
sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked into place. 3. Pull up on the release lever on
the back of the seat. The
headrest moves forward
Folding the Seatback automatically.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt 4. Push the seatback forward to
the safety belts still fastened may mini-latch, using a key in the slot lay flat.
cause damage to the seat or the on the mini-buckle, and let the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the belt retract into the headliner.
safety belts and return them to Stow the mini-latch in the holder
their normal stowed position in the headliner.
before folding a rear seat.

Returning the Seat to the 3. Push and pull on the seatback to Removing the Third Row Seats
Seating Position make sure it is locked in place.
To remove a third row seat:
To return the seatback to the
seating position: { WARNING 1. Remove the cargo management
system, if available and
1. From the rear of the vehicle, A safety belt that is improperly installed. See Cargo
raise the seatback to the upright routed, not properly attached, Management System on
position using the pullstrap on or twisted will not provide the page 4‑3.
the back of the third row seat, protection needed in a crash. The 2. Remove anything on or under
or lift the seatback and push it person wearing the belt could be the seat.
into place from inside the seriously injured. After raising the
vehicle. Notice: Folding a rear seat with
rear seatback, always check to be the safety belts still fastened may
2. The headrest must be locked sure that the safety belts are cause damage to the seat or the
into place before sitting in properly routed and attached, and safety belts. Always unbuckle the
the seat. are not twisted. safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
{ WARNING 4. Reconnect the center safety belt before folding a rear seat.
mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do 3. Fold the seatback down. See
If either seatback is not locked, it
not let it twist. “Folding the Seatback” earlier in
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure this section.
injury to the person sitting there. the mini-latch is secure. 4. Remove the rear bolts on the
Always push and pull on the floor on each side of the seat.
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.

5. Remove the seat by tilting it 2. Place the seat on the vehicle Safety Belts
slightly upward, and then pulling floor so that the front seat hooks
it out of the rear of the vehicle in are on the vehicle bars. This section of the manual
one motion. describes how to use safety belts
3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to
properly. It also describes some
6. Replace the bolts in the floor 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the
things not to do with safety belts.
holes for storage. seat to make sure it is locked in
place.
Installing the Third Row Seats
4. Raise the seatback to its upright
{ WARNING
To reinstall a third row seat: position. Push and pull on the Do not let anyone ride where a
1. Before installing the seat the seatback to make sure it is safety belt cannot be worn
seatback must be folded locked into place. properly. In a crash, if you or your
forward. See “Folding the 5. Push the headrest up into passenger(s) are not wearing
Seatback” earlier in this section. position. Push and pull on the safety belts, injuries can be much
The seats must be placed in the headrest to make sure it is worse than if you are wearing
proper locations to attach locked into place. safety belts. You can be seriously
correctly. The wider seat must 6. Reconnect the center safety belt injured or killed by hitting things
be installed on the driver side mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do inside the vehicle harder or by
and the narrower seat on the not let it twist. being ejected from the vehicle. In
passenger side. Remove the addition, anyone who is not
bolts from the holes in the floor buckled up can strike other
before installing the seats. passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)

Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

WARNING (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
It is extremely dangerous to ride Questions and Answers About
in a cargo area, inside or outside Safety Belts
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
are more likely to be seriously after a crash if I am wearing a
injured or killed. Do not allow safety belt?
passengers to ride in any area of A: You could be — whether you are
the vehicle that is not equipped wearing a safety belt or not.
with seats and safety belts. Your chance of being conscious
during and after a crash, so you
Always wear a safety belt, and can unbuckle and get out, is
check that all passenger(s) are much greater if you are belted.
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
restrained properly too. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
This vehicle has indicators as a going until something stops you. belts?
reminder to buckle the safety belts. It could be the windshield, the
See Safety Belt Reminders on instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
page 5‑14. systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the

Also, in nearly all states and in

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
all Canadian provinces, the law shoulder and across the chest.
requires wearing safety belts. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
How to Wear Safety Belts forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
Properly
This section is only for people of { WARNING
adult size.
You can be seriously injured,
There are special things to know
or even killed, by not wearing
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller your safety belt properly.
children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
Children on page 3‑36 or Infants of you. loose or twisted.
and Young Children on page 3‑38. . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position. under both arms or behind
protection. your back.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong armrest.
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating
position with a detachable safety
belt and the safety belt is not
attached, see “Returning the Seat to
the Seating Position” under Third
Row Seats on page 3‑11 for
instruction on reconnecting the
safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks.
properly. get twisted. 4. Pull up on the latch plate to
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt
adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety
straight. To see how, see “Seats” quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 3‑21.
in the Index. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on
Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt
more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if
If the shoulder portion of a necessary.
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.

5. If equipped with a shoulder belt Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

height adjuster, move it to the
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height that is right for you. See
height adjuster for the driver and
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
right front passenger seating
later in this section for
positions.
instructions on use and
important safety information. Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
but not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to but not
contacting the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3‑15.
the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull Before a door is closed, be sure the
up on the shoulder belt. safety belt is out of the way. If a
It may be necessary to pull the door is slammed against a safety
stitching on the safety belt belt, damage can occur to both the
through the latch plate to fully safety belt and the vehicle.
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.

Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort

This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for the front outboard This vehicle may have rear safety
occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are
pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer. The
are part of the safety belt assembly. guides may provide added safety
They can help tighten the safety belt comfort for older children who
belts during the early stages of a have outgrown booster seats and
moderate to severe frontal, near for some adults. When installed and
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold properly adjusted, the comfort guide
conditions for pretensioner positions the shoulder belt away
activation are met. And, for vehicles from the neck and head.
To move it down, push down on the with side impact airbags, safety belt
release button and move the height pretensioners can help tighten the
adjuster to the desired position. You safety belts in a side crash or a
can move the height adjuster up by rollover event.
pushing up on the shoulder belt Pretensioners work only once. If the
guide. pretensioners activate in a crash,
After the adjuster is set to the they will need to be replaced, and
desired position, try to move it down probably other new parts for the
without pushing the release button vehicle's safety belt system. See
to make sure it has locked into Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
position. after a Crash on page 3‑22.

Here is how to install a comfort 1. For the outboard positions,

guide to the safety belt: remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
For the third row center position,
locate the comfort guide which is
located in a storage pocket, at
the top of the seat, under the
headrest on the driver side of
the vehicle. To access the
comfort guide, you will first need
to move the headrest forward by
pulling on the handle behind the
seatback. The comfort guide will Third Row Center Position
now be accessible. Pull the comfort guide out of its
Outboard Positions storage location and then return
the headrest to its upright
position.

WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is not
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release the
protection needed in a crash. The safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.

To remove and store the comfort A pregnant woman should wear a use it for securing child seats. To
guide, squeeze the belt edges lap-shoulder belt, and the lap wear it, attach it to the regular safety
together so that the safety belt can portion should be worn as low as belt. See the instruction sheet that
be removed from the guide. Slide possible, below the rounding, comes with the extender.
the guide into its storage location or throughout the pregnancy.
on its storage clip. The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety Now and then, check that the safety
Safety Belt Use During belt is worn properly, it is more likely belt reminder light, safety belts,
Pregnancy that the fetus will not be hurt in a buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
crash. For pregnant women, as for anchorages are all working properly.
Safety belts work for everyone,
anyone, the key to making safety Look for any other loose or
including pregnant women. Like all
belts effective is wearing them damaged safety belt system parts
occupants, they are more likely to
properly. that might keep a safety belt system
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts. from doing its job. See your dealer
Safety Belt Extender to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
But if a safety belt is not long frayed, get a new one right away.
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑14.
long enough for you. To help avoid Keep safety belts clean and dry.
personal injury, do not let someone See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑22.
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never

Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑15.
possible.

Airbag System The vehicle may have the following are also designed to help reduce
airbag: the risk of injury from the force of an
The vehicle has the following inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
. A front center airbag for the
airbags: very quickly to do their job.
driver and front outboard
. A frontal airbag for the driver. passenger. Here are the most important things
. A frontal airbag for the front All vehicle airbags have the word to know about the airbag system:
outboard passenger. AIRBAG on the trim or on an
. A seat-mounted side impact attached label near the deployment { WARNING
airbag for the driver. opening.
You can be severely injured or
. A seat-mounted side impact For frontal airbags, the word killed in a crash if you are not
airbag for the front outboard AIRBAG is on the center of the wearing your safety belt, even
passenger. steering wheel for the driver and on with airbags. Airbags are
the instrument panel for the front designed to work with safety
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver outboard passenger.
and for the second and third row belts, not replace them. Also,
passengers seated directly For the front center airbag, the word airbags are not designed to inflate
behind the driver. AIRBAG is on the inboard side of in every crash. In some crashes
the driver seatback. safety belts are the only restraint.
. A roof-rail airbag for the front
For seat-mounted side impact See When Should an Airbag
outboard passenger and the
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the Inflate? on page 3‑27.
second and third row
passengers seated directly side of the seatback closest to Wearing your safety belt during a
behind the front outboard the door. crash helps reduce the chance of
passenger. For roof-rail airbags, the word hitting things inside the vehicle or
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. being ejected from it. Airbags are
Airbags are designed to supplement “supplemental restraints” to the
the protection provided by safety (Continued)
belts. Even though today's airbags

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

safety belts. Everyone in the should sit as far back as possible not for young children and infants.
vehicle should wear a safety belt while still maintaining control of Neither the vehicle's safety belt
properly, whether or not there is the vehicle. system nor its airbag system is
an airbag for that person. Occupants should not lean on or designed for them. Young
sleep against the front center children and infants need the
armrest or console with a front protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
{ WARNING center airbag.
secure children properly in the
Occupants should not lean on or vehicle. To read how, see Older
Because airbags inflate with great
sleep against the door or side Children on page 3‑36 or Infants
force and faster than the blink of
windows in seating positions with and Young Children on
an eye, anyone who is up
seat-mounted side impact airbags page 3‑38.
against, or very close to any
and/or roof-rail airbags.
airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not
sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting { WARNING
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep Children who are up against,
you in position before and during or very close to, any airbag when
a crash. Always wear a safety it inflates can be seriously injured
belt, even with airbags. The driver or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument cluster, which
(Continued) shows the airbag symbol.
for adults and older children, but
(Continued)

The system checks the airbag

electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for
more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The front outboard passenger If the vehicle has a front center

frontal airbag is in the passenger airbag, it is in the inboard side of the
side instrument panel. driver seatback.
The driver frontal airbag is in the

center of the steering wheel.

WARNING (Continued)
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger Do not use seat or console
Side Similar Side Similar accessories that block the
The driver and front outboard The roof-rail airbags for the driver, inflation path of a seat-mounted
passenger seat-mounted side front outboard passenger, and side impact airbag or the front
impact airbags are in the side of the second and third row outboard center airbag, if equipped.
seatbacks closest to the door. passengers are in the ceiling above Never secure anything to the roof
the side windows. of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie-down
{ WARNING through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
If something is between an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
occupant and an airbag, the blocked.
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)

When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the The front center airbag, if equipped,
direction of the impact, and how seat-mounted side impact airbags,
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down. and roof-rail airbags are intended to
The vehicle has frontal airbags, Frontal airbags may inflate at inflate in moderate to severe side
seat-mounted side impact airbags, different crash speeds depending on crashes depending on the location
and roof-rail airbags. The vehicle whether the vehicle hits an object of the impact. A seat-mounted side
may have a front center airbag. See straight on or at an angle, and impact airbag is intended to inflate
Airbag System on page 3‑23. These whether the object is fixed or on the side of the vehicle that is
airbags are designed to inflate if the moving, rigid or deformable, narrow struck. The front center airbag,
impact exceeds the specific airbag or wide. if equipped, and both roof-rail
system’s deployment threshold. airbags are intended to inflate when
Deployment thresholds are used to Frontal airbags are not intended to either side of the vehicle is struck.
predict how severe a crash is likely inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear In addition, the roof-rail airbags and
to be in time for the airbag to inflate impacts, or many side impacts. the front center airbag, if equipped,
and help restrain the occupants. In addition, the vehicle has are intended to inflate when the
Deployment thresholds can vary dual-stage frontal airbags. sensing system predicts that the
with specific vehicle design. Dual-stage airbags adjust the vehicle is about to roll over on its
restraint according to crash severity. side. The roof-rail airbags are also
Frontal airbags are designed to
The vehicle has electronic frontal intended to inflate in a severe frontal
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
sensors, which help the sensing impact.
or near frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe system distinguish between a The front center airbag, if equipped,
injuries, mainly to the driver's or moderate frontal impact and a more is not intended to inflate in frontal
front outboard passenger's head severe frontal impact. For moderate impacts, near frontal impacts,
and chest. frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags or rear impacts. Seat-mounted side
inflate at a level less than full impact airbags are not intended to
Whether the frontal airbags will or deployment. For more severe frontal inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal
should inflate is not based primarily impacts, full deployment occurs. impacts, rollovers, rear impacts,
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.

or on the non-struck side of a How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many
vehicle in a side impact. Roof-rail types of collisions, primarily
airbags are not intended to inflate in
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is
rear impacts. In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When
In any particular crash, no one can near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on
say whether an airbag should have occupants can contact the steering page 3‑27 for more information.
inflated simply because of the wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded
vehicle damage or the repair costs. moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement
even belted occupants can contact to safety belts.
the inside of the vehicle.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after
provided by safety belts by an Airbag Inflates?
In a deployment event, the sensing distributing the force of the impact
system sends an electrical signal more evenly over the After the frontal airbags and
triggering a release of gas from the occupant's body. seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
airbag causing the bag to break out quickly that some people may not
are also designed to help contain
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, even realize an airbag inflated. The
the head and chest of occupants in
and related hardware are all part of front center airbag, if equipped, and
the outboard seating positions in the
the airbag module. the roof-rail airbags may still be at
first, second, and third rows. The
For airbag location, see Where Are least partially inflated for some time
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are
the Airbags? on page 3‑25. after they inflate. Some components
designed to help reduce the risk of
of the airbag module may be hot for
full or partial ejection in rollover
several minutes. For location of the
events, although no system can
airbags, see Where Are the
prevent all such ejections.
Airbags? on page 3‑25.

The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming problems following an airbag moderate crash, there may be
from the vents in the deflated deployment, you should seek concealed damage that could
airbags. Airbag inflation does not medical attention. make it difficult to safely operate
prevent the driver from seeing out of the vehicle.
the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle has a feature that may Use caution if you should attempt
the vehicle, nor does it prevent automatically unlock the doors, turn to restart the engine after a crash
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps and hazard has occurred.
warning flashers, and shut off the
{ WARNING fuel system after the airbags inflate.
In many crashes severe enough to
You can lock the doors, and turn off
When an airbag inflates, there the interior lamps and hazard inflate the airbag, windshields are
may be dust in the air. This dust warning flashers by using the broken by vehicle deformation.
could cause breathing problems controls for those features. Additional windshield breakage may
for people with a history of also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
asthma or other breathing trouble. { WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag
it is safe to do so. If you have the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some new
breathing problems but cannot damaged important functions in parts for the airbag system.
get out of the vehicle after an the vehicle, such as the fuel If you do not get them, the
airbag inflates, then get fresh air system, brake and steering airbag system will not be there
by opening a window or a door. systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to help protect you in another
If you experience breathing appears to be drivable after a crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
(Continued) (Continued)

other parts. The service manual certain conditions. No other airbag

for the vehicle covers the need is affected by the passenger
to replace other parts. sensing system.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing The passenger sensing system
and diagnostic module which works with sensors that are part of
records information after a the front outboard passenger seat.
crash. See Vehicle Data United States The sensors are designed to detect
Recording and Privacy on the presence of a properly-seated
page 13‑19 and Event Data occupant and determine if the front
Recorders on page 13‑19. outboard passenger frontal airbag
. Let only qualified technicians should be allowed to inflate or not.
work on the airbag systems. According to accident statistics,
Improper service can mean that children are safer when properly
an airbag system will not work Canada and Mexico secured in a rear seat in the correct
properly. See your dealer for child restraint for their weight
service. The words ON and OFF, or the and size.
symbol for on and off, are visible
during the system check. If you use We recommend that children be
Passenger Sensing remote start, if equipped, to start the secured in a rear seat, including: an
System vehicle, you may not see the system infant or a child riding in a
check. When the system check is rear-facing child restraint; a child
The vehicle has a passenger
complete, either the word ON or riding in a forward-facing child seat;
sensing system for the front
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will an older child riding in a booster
outboard passenger position. The
be visible. See Passenger Airbag seat; and children, who are large
passenger airbag status indicator
Status Indicator on page 5‑16. enough, using safety belts.
will light on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under

Never put a rear-facing child seat in

. A front outboard passenger
the front. This is because the risk to WARNING (Continued) takes his/her weight off of the
the rear-facing child is so great, seat for a period of time.
if the airbag inflates. inflate under some unusual . There is a critical problem with
circumstance, even though the
the airbag system or the
airbag is off.
{ WARNING passenger sensing system.
Secure rear-facing child restraints When the passenger sensing
A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag system has turned off the front
restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a outboard passenger frontal airbag,
or killed if the passenger frontal forward-facing child restraint in the off indicator will light and stay lit
airbag inflates. This is because the front outboard passenger as a reminder that the airbag is off.
the back of the rear-facing child seat, always move the seat as far See Passenger Airbag Status
restraint would be very close to back as it will go. It is better to Indicator on page 5‑16.
the inflating airbag. A child in a secure the child restraint in a
forward-facing child restraint can The passenger sensing system is
rear seat.
designed to turn on the front
be seriously injured or killed if the
outboard passenger frontal airbag
passenger frontal airbag inflates
The passenger sensing system is anytime the system senses that a
and the passenger seat is in a person of adult size is sitting
designed to turn off the front
forward position. outboard passenger frontal airbag if: properly in the front outboard
Even if the passenger sensing . passenger seat.
The front outboard passenger
system has turned off the seat is unoccupied. When the passenger sensing
passenger frontal airbag, no system has allowed the airbag to be
system is fail-safe. No one can
. The system determines that an
enabled, the on indicator will light
guarantee that an airbag will not infant is present in a child
and stay lit as a reminder that the
restraint.
(Continued) airbag is active.

For some children, including If the On Indicator Is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child
children in child restraints, and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the
very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
off the front outboard passenger and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback and
frontal airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off. adjust the seat cushion,
person’s seating posture and body if adjustable, to make sure that
2. Remove the child restraint from
build. Everyone in the vehicle who the vehicle seatback is not
the vehicle.
has outgrown child restraints should pushing the child restraint into
wear a safety belt properly — 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion.
whether or not there is an airbag for from the seat such as blankets,
Also make sure the child
that person. cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint is not trapped under the
heaters, or seat massagers.
vehicle head restraint. If this
{ WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head
following the directions provided restraint. See Head Restraints
If the airbag readiness light ever by the child restraint on page 3‑2.
comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to
that something may be wrong 6. Restart the vehicle.
Securing Child Restraints (Front
with the airbag system. To help Passenger Seat) on page 3‑53 The passenger sensing system
avoid injury to yourself or others, or Securing Child Restraints may or may not turn off the
have the vehicle serviced right (Rear Seat) on page 3‑51. airbag for a child in a child
away. See Airbag Readiness restraint depending upon the
Light on page 5‑15 for more child’s seating posture and body
information, including important build. It is better to secure the
safety information. child restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material in the Index for additional
Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets, information about the importance of
cushions, seat covers, seat proper restraint use.
heaters, seat massagers, A thick layer of additional material,
laptops, or other electronic such as a blanket or cushion,
devices. or aftermarket equipment such as
3. Place the seatback in the fully seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
upright position. massagers can affect how well the
4. Have the person sit upright in passenger sensing system
the seat, centered on the seat operates. We recommend that you
cushion, with legs comfortably not use seat covers or other
extended. aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
5. Restart the vehicle and have the vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
person remain in this position for the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
two to three minutes after the on page 3‑34 for more information
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
indicator is lit. about modifications that can affect
the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be how the system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting
because that person is not sitting System Operation A wet seat can affect the
properly in the seat. Use the performance of the passenger
following steps to allow the system Safety belts help keep the sensing system. Here is how:
to detect that person and enable the passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and . The passenger sensing system
front outboard passenger frontal
braking, which helps the passenger may turn off the passenger
airbag:
sensing system maintain the airbag when liquid is soaked into
1. Turn the vehicle off. passenger airbag status. See the seat. If this happens, the off
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”

indicator will be lit, and the

airbag readiness light on the { WARNING { WARNING
instrument panel will also be lit.
Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the
. Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the vehicle is turned off and the
has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag
more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper
sensing system will turn on the proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you
passenger airbag while a child sensing system. are close to an airbag when it
restraint or child occupant is on
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
the seat. If the passenger airbag
They are probably part of the
is turned on, the on indicator will Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow
be lit.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry make sure the person performing
the seat immediately. If the airbag Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts work for you is qualified to do so.
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
occupy the seat. See Airbag
dealer and the service manual have
Adding Equipment to the
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
important safety information. information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To Adding accessories that change the
The on indicator may be lit if an purchase a service manual, see vehicle's frame, bumper system,
object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering height, front end, or side sheet
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Information on page 13‑17. metal may keep the airbag system
other electronic device, is put on an from working properly.
unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from The operation of the airbag system
the seat. can also be affected by changing
any parts of the front seats, safety

belts, airbag sensing and diagnostic passenger sensing system. This Airbag System Check
module, steering wheel, instrument could either prevent proper
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, deployment of the passenger The airbag system does not need
ceiling or pillar garnish trim, airbag(s) or prevent the passenger regularly scheduled maintenance or
overhead console, front sensors, sensing system from properly replacement. Make sure the airbag
side impact sensors, airbag wiring, turning off the passenger airbag(s). readiness light is working. See
or the front center console if the See Passenger Sensing System on Airbag Readiness Light on
vehicle has a front center airbag. page 3‑30. page 5‑15.
Your dealer and the service manual If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail Notice: If an airbag covering is
have information about the location airbags, see Different Size Tires damaged, opened, or broken, the
of the airbag sensors, sensing and and Wheels on page 10‑52 for airbag may not work properly. Do
diagnostic module, and airbag additional information. not open or break the airbag
wiring. coverings. If there are any
If your vehicle needs to be modified opened or broken airbag covers,
In addition, the vehicle has a because you have a disability and have the airbag covering and/or
passenger sensing system that you have questions about whether airbag module replaced. For the
includes sensors as part of the front the modifications will affect the location of the airbags, see
outboard passenger seat. The vehicle's airbag system, or if you Where Are the Airbags? on
passenger sensing system may not have questions about whether the page 3‑25. See your dealer for
operate properly if the original seat airbag system will be affected if the service.
trim is replaced with non-GM vehicle is modified for any other
covers, upholstery, or trim, or; with reason, call Customer Assistance.
GM covers, upholstery, or trim See Customer Assistance Offices
designed for a different vehicle. Any (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
object, such as an aftermarket seat Customer Assistance Offices
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
or device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the

Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
not work properly and may not Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑15.
protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics,
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the children and infants are safer when
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, properly restrained in a child
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. restraint system or infant restraint
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to system secured in a rear seating
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts? position.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a In a crash, children who are not
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the buckled up can strike other people
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder who are buckled up, or can be
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or children need to use safety belts
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit properly.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs. { WARNING
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash. Never allow more than one child
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the to wear the same safety belt. The
page 3‑16. If the shoulder belt abdomen, which could cause safety belt cannot properly spread
still does not rest on the severe or even fatal internal the impact forces. In a crash, they
shoulder, then return to the injuries in a crash. can be crushed together and
booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort seriously injured. A safety belt
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on must be used by only one person
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑16. at a time.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

WARNING (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
The child could move too far Everyone in a vehicle needs
forward increasing the chance of protection! This includes infants and
head and neck injury. The child all other children. Neither the
might also slide under the lap distance traveled nor the age and
belt. The belt force would then be size of the traveler changes the
applied right on the abdomen. need, for everyone, to use safety
That could cause serious or fatal restraints. In fact, the law in every
injuries. The shoulder belt should state in the United States and in
go over the shoulder and across every Canadian province says
the chest. children up to some age must be
{ WARNING restrained while in a vehicle.
Never allow a child to wear the

safety belt with the shoulder belt
{ WARNING
behind their back. A child can be Children can be seriously injured
seriously injured by not wearing or strangled if a shoulder belt is
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a wrapped around their neck and
crash, the child would not be the safety belt continues to
restrained by the shoulder belt. tighten. Never leave children
(Continued) unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer

protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only Children who are up against,
safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) or very close to, any airbag when
system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a it inflates can be seriously injured
time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's or killed. Never put a rear-facing
in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be child restraint in the right front
protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate seat. Secure a rear-facing child
child restraints. restraint. restraint in a rear seat.
Children who are not restrained It is also better to secure a
properly can strike other people, forward-facing child restraint in a
or can be thrown out of the vehicle. rear seat. If a forward-facing child
restraint must be secured in the
{ WARNING right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back
Never hold an infant or a child as it will go.
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
If a child restraint is installed in
crash forces, an infant or a child
the second row center seat, move
will become so heavy it is not
the second row seat to the
possible to hold it during a crash.
rearward position, whenever
(Continued) possible, to minimize contact with
the front center airbag,
if equipped.

sure it is designed to be used in

a motor vehicle. If it is, the { WARNING
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor A young child's hip bones are still
vehicle safety standards. so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
The restraint manufacturer
the hip bones, as it should.
instructions that come with the
Instead, it may settle up around
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular the child's abdomen. In a crash,
child restraint. In addition, there the belt would apply force on a
are many kinds of restraints body area that is unprotected by
available for children with any bony structure. This alone
Q: What are the different types of special needs. could cause serious or fatal
add-on child restraints? injuries. To reduce the risk of
A: Add-on child restraints, which { WARNING serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
are purchased by the vehicle
To reduce the risk of neck and always be secured in appropriate
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants child restraints.
restraint should take into need complete support. In a
consideration not only the child's crash, if an infant is in a
weight, height, and age but also rear-facing child restraint, the
whether or not the restraint will crash forces can be distributed
be compatible with the motor across the strongest part of an
vehicle in which it will be used. infant's body, the back and
For most basic types of child shoulders. Infants should always
restraints, there are many be secured in rear-facing child
different models available. When restraints.
purchasing a child restraint, be

Child Restraint Systems
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child
against the back of the infant. to see out the window.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.

Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a locate the nearest child safety seat
Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not inspection station. For CPST
properly secured in the vehicle. availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
Ministry of Transportation office.
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which Securing the Child within the
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a Child Restraint
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not { WARNING
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement A child can be seriously injured or
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
killed in a crash if the child is not
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured properly secured in the child
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a restraint. Secure the child
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure properly following the instructions
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that child restraint.
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it. Where to Put the
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas, Certified Child Restraint
seats by lap belts or the lap belt Passenger Safety Technicians According to accident statistics,
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by (CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when
the LATCH system. See Lower and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child
Anchors and Tethers for Children use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint
(LATCH System) on page 3‑44. the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety position.
Administration (NHTSA) website to

We recommend that children and

child restraints be secured in a rear WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; rear-facing child restraint would restraint must be secured in the
a child riding in a forward-facing be very close to the inflating right front seat, always move the
child seat; an older child riding in a airbag. A child in a forward-facing front passenger seat as far back
booster seat; and children, who are child restraint can be seriously as it will go.
large enough, using safety belts. injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑30 for additional
The vehicle may be equipped with a
passenger seat is in a forward information.
front center airbag in the inboard
position.
side of the driver seat. Even with a If a child restraint is installed in a
front center airbag, a child restraint Even if the passenger sensing second row center seat, move the
can be installed in any second row system has turned off the right second row seat to the rearward
seating position. front passenger frontal airbag, no position, whenever possible, to
Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can minimize contact with the front
the front. This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not center airbag, if equipped.
the rear-facing child is so great if the deploy under some unusual
airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is
turned off. Secure rear-facing When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
{ WARNING child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the front passenger frontal instructions that came with the child
A child in a rear-facing child airbag is off. restraint to make sure it is
restraint can be seriously injured compatible with this vehicle.
It is also better to secure a
or killed if the right front Child restraints and booster seats
forward-facing child restraint in a
passenger airbag inflates. This is vary considerably in size, and some
rear seat. If a forward-facing child
because the back of the may fit in certain seating positions
(Continued)
(Continued)

better than others. Always make Lower Anchors and In order to use the LATCH system in
sure the child restraint is properly your vehicle, you need a child
secured.
Tethers for Children restraint that has LATCH
Depending on where you place the
(LATCH System) attachments. The child restraint
child restraint and the size of the The LATCH system secures a child manufacturer will provide you with
child restraint, you may not be able restraint during driving or in a crash. instructions on how to use the child
to access adjacent safety belt LATCH attachments on the child restraint and its attachments. The
assemblies or LATCH anchors for restraint are used to attach the child following explains how to attach a
additional passengers or child restraint to the anchors in the child restraint with these
restraints. Adjacent seating vehicle. This system is designed to attachments in your vehicle.
positions should not be used if the make installation of a child restraint Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraint prevents access to or easier. child restraints have lower anchors
interferes with the routing of the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible and attachments or top tether
safety belt. child restraint is properly installed anchors and attachments.
Wherever a child restraint is using the anchors, or use the
installed, be sure to secure the child vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint properly. restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
Keep in mind that an unsecured
also the instructions in this manual.
child restraint can move around in a
When installing a child restraint with
collision or sudden stop and injure
a top tether, you must also use
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
either the lower anchors or the
properly secure any child restraint in
safety belts to properly secure the
the vehicle — even when no child is
child restraint. A child restraint must
in it.
never be attached using only the top
tether and anchor.

Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for your child
built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into the
seating position that will vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
Second Row — 60/40 Bench Third Row

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
Second Row — Bucket positions with top tether anchors. positions with top tether anchors.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors. positions with two lower anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each second row anchor
position has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.

Be sure to use an anchor on the that the top tether be attached, or if

same side of the vehicle as the the instructions that come with the
seating position where the child child restraint say that the top tether
restraint will be placed. must be attached.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
To assist in locating the top tether properly restrained in a child
anchors, the top tether anchor restraint system or infant restraint
symbol is near the anchor. system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑42 for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
Third Row
The third row has one top tether
{ WARNING
anchor at the bottom rear of the If a LATCH-type child restraint is
center seatback. This anchor should not attached to anchors, the child
be used for the center seating restraint will not be able to protect
Second Row — Bucket Shown, position only. Never install two top the child correctly. In a crash, the
Bench Similar tethers using the same top tether child could be seriously injured or
The top tether anchors are at the anchor.
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
bottom rear of the seatback for each Do not secure a child restraint in a restraint properly using the
seating position in the second row. position without a top tether anchor (Continued)
if a national or local law requires

The vehicle may be equipped with a

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING front center airbag in the inboard
side of the driver seat. Even with a
anchors, or use the vehicle safety Children can be seriously injured front center airbag, a child restraint
belts to secure the restraint, or strangled if a shoulder belt is can be installed in any second row
following the instructions that wrapped around their neck and seating position. If a child restraint is
came with the child restraint and the safety belt continues to installed in a second row center
the instructions in this manual. tighten. Buckle any unused safety seat, move the second row seat to
belts behind the child restraint so the rearward position, whenever
children cannot reach them. Pull possible, to minimize contact with
the shoulder belt all the way out the front center airbag.
{ WARNING of the retractor to set the lock, If you need to secure more than one
Do not attach more than one child if the vehicle has one, after the child restraint in the rear seat, see
restraint to a single anchor. child restraint has been installed. Where to Put the Restraint on
Attaching more than one child page 3‑42.
restraint to a single anchor could Notice: Do not let the LATCH This system is designed to make
cause the anchor or attachment attachments rub against the installation of child restraints easier.
to come loose or even break vehicle’s safety belts. This may When using lower anchors, do not
during a crash. A child or others damage these parts. If necessary, use the vehicle's safety belts.
could be injured. To reduce the move buckled safety belts to Instead, use the vehicle's anchors
risk of serious or fatal injuries avoid rubbing the LATCH and child restraint attachments to
during a crash, attach only one attachments. secure the restraints. Some
child restraint per anchor. Do not fold the empty rear seat restraints also use another vehicle
with a safety belt buckled. This anchor to secure a top tether.
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower attachments on the child
anchors. If the child restraint restraint to the lower
does not have lower anchors.
attachments or the desired If necessary, adjust the
seating position does not have angle of the second row
lower anchors, secure the child seatback to achieve a tight
restraint with the top tether and installation. Make sure the
the safety belts. Refer to your second row bench
child restraint manufacturer seatbacks are aligned at If the position you are using
instructions and the instructions the same angle. does not have a headrest
in this manual. or head restraint and you
2. If the child restraint manufacturer are using a single tether,
1.1. Find the lower anchors for recommends that the top tether
the desired seating route the tether over the
be attached, attach and tighten seatback.
position. the top tether to the top tether
1.2. To access the lower anchor, if the vehicle has one.
anchors in the second row, Refer to the child restraint
it may help to recline the instructions and the following
seatback. steps:
Third row seatbacks must 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
be upright before placing 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the child restraint on the top tether according to
the seat. your child restraint
1.3. Put the child restraint on instructions and the
the seat. following instructions:

If the position you are using Replacing LATCH System

does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
Parts After a Crash
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the { WARNING
seatback.
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
If the position you are using secure the child restraint,
has a fixed headrest or resulting in serious injury or even
head restraint and you are death in a crash. To help make
using a single tether, route sure the LATCH system is
the tether over the headrest working properly after a crash,
or head restraint. see your dealer to have the
3. Before placing a child in the system inspected and any
If the position you are using child restraint, make sure it is necessary replacements made as
has a fixed headrest or securely held in place. To check, soon as possible.
head restraint and you are grasp the child restraint at the
using a dual tether, route LATCH path and attempt to
the tether around the If the vehicle has the LATCH system
move it side to side and back and it was being used during a
headrest or head restraint. and forth. There should be no crash, new LATCH system parts
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of may be needed.
movement, for proper
installation. New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
page 3‑44 for top tether anchor the seat.
(Rear Seat) locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
The vehicle may be equipped with a Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
front center airbag in the inboard position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
side of the driver seat. Even with a if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
front center airbag, a child restraint that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
can be installed in any second row the instructions that come with the you how.
seating position. If you install a child child restraint say that the top strap
restraint in a second row center must be anchored.
seat, move the second row seat to
the rearward position, whenever In Canada, the law requires that
possible, to minimize contact with forward-facing child restraints have
the front center airbag. a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
If the child restraint has the LATCH came with the child restraint. Secure
system, see Lower Anchors and the child in the child restraint when
Tethers for Children (LATCH and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the
System) on page 3‑44 for how and buckle until it clicks.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear Position the release button on
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put the buckle so that the safety belt
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑42. could be quickly unbuckled if
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for necessary.

6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑44 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the shoulder belt can be tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
tightened but not pulled out of and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
the retractor. into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.

Securing Child Restraints

(Front Passenger Seat)
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
is a safer place to secure a restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
forward-facing child restraint. See or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
Where to Put the Restraint on passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
page 3‑42. because the back of the the right front seat, always move
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
In addition, the vehicle has a be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
passenger sensing system which is
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
designed to turn off the right front
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
Sensing System on page 3‑30 and passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑30 for additional
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator passenger seat is in a forward information.
on page 5‑16 for more information, position.
including important safety Even if the passenger sensing
information. If the child restraint has the LATCH
system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and
Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can System) on page 3‑44 for how and
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not where to install the child restraint
if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is
circumstance, even though it is secured using a safety belt and it
turned off. uses a top tether, see Lower
(Continued) Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑44 for
top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a 2. Put the child restraint on

position without a top tether anchor the seat.
if a national or local law requires 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
that the top tether be anchored, or if the lap and shoulder portions of
the instructions that come with the the vehicle's safety belt through
child restraint say that the top strap or around the restraint. The child
must be anchored. restraint instructions will show
In Canada, the law requires that you how.
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
this position. Follow the instructions out of the retractor to set the
that came with the child restraint. lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
1. Move the seat as far back as it not pulled out of the retractor.
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, 4. Push the latch plate into the
the off indicator on the buckle until it clicks.
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit Position the release button on
when the vehicle is started. See the buckle so that the safety belt
Passenger Airbag Status could be quickly unbuckled if
Indicator on page 5‑16. necessary.

7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3‑30 for more
may be helpful to use your knee information.
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked repeat
Steps 5 and 6.

2 NOTES

Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Glove Box

Compartments Lift the glove box handle to open it.
Use the key to lock and unlock the
Storage Compartments glove box.
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Cupholders
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 There are two cupholders, with
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 removable liners, in front of the
center console. There may be
Additional Storage Features cupholders in the second row seat
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 armrest. To access, pull the armrest
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 down. There are additional
Cargo Management cupholders on each side of the third
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 row seat and in each door.
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
This vehicle has an instrument
panel storage area. To open the
cover, press the button.
This vehicle has an auxiliary input
jack on the faceplate. For vehicles
with a USB port, it is in the
instrument panel storage. See
Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑34.

4-2 Storage
Armrest Storage Center Console Storage
There is additional storage under

the armrest. Move the armrest all
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest Pull up on the lever, on the front of the way to the rear position, then
have two cupholders. Pull the the center console armrest, to slide slide the storage cover back to
armrest down to access the it forward and backward. To open access.
cupholders. the armrest storage area, press the
button on the front of the armrest.

Storage 4-3
Additional Storage Cargo Management

System
{ WARNING
Features An improperly latched and closed
This vehicle has a cargo
cargo cover, or cargo cover left in
Cargo Cover management system located in
the open position, could be
the rear.
For vehicles with a cargo cover, it thrown about the vehicle during a
can be used to cover items in the crash or sudden maneuver.
rear of the vehicle. To install the Someone could be injured. Be
cover, place the loops on each sure to return the cover to the
corner of the cover on the four closed position and latch before
hooks in the rear of the vehicle. The driving. If the cover is removed,
cover should be stored securely always store it outside of the
when not in use. vehicle. When it is replaced,
always be sure that it is securely
Cargo Tie-Downs reattached.
Four cargo tie‐downs are located in
the rear compartment of the vehicle. 3. Remove the cover from the
The tie-downs can be used to vehicle and store outside of the
secure small loads. To remove the cargo management vehicle.
cover:
1. Open the cover. It remains open
when lifted.
2. Pull the cover up making sure to
unhook the hinges at the rear of
the cover.

4-4 Storage
Convenience Net For vehicles with a convenience Roof Rack System

net (4), attach it to the vehicle using
only the cargo tie-downs (3) on
each side. The net is used to store { WARNING
small loads and should not be used
heavy loads. If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
The cargo cover hooks (2) are used than the roof rack — like paneling,
to attach the cargo cover (1) to the plywood, or a mattress — the
vehicle only. Do not use the hooks wind can catch it while the vehicle
to secure loads or other items to the is being driven. The item being
vehicle or the hooks could be
carried could be violently torn off,
damaged.
and this could cause a collision
and damage the vehicle. Never
Power Liftgate Shown, Manual carry something longer or wider
Liftgate Similar than the roof rack on top of the
1. Cargo Cover vehicle unless using a GM
certified accessory carrier.
2. Cargo Cover Hooks
3. Cargo Tie-Downs
4. Convenience Net

Storage 4-5
For vehicles with a roof rack, the To prevent damage or loss of cargo
rack can be used to load items. For when driving, check to make sure
roof racks that do not have crossrails and cargo are securely
crossrails included, GM Certified fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
crossrails can be purchased as an rack will make the vehicle’s center
accessory. See your dealer for of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
additional information. sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
Notice: Loading cargo on the braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
roof rack that weighs more than otherwise it may result in loss of
91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the control. If driving for a long distance,
rear or sides of the vehicle may on rough roads, or at high speeds,
damage the vehicle. Load cargo occasionally stop the vehicle to
so that it rests evenly between make sure the cargo remains in its
the crossrails, making sure to place. Do not exceed the maximum
fasten cargo securely. vehicle capacity when loading the
vehicle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑9.

4-6 Storage
2 NOTES

Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Information Displays
Controls Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Engine Coolant Temperature
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-23
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 (DIC) (Without DIC
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15 Vehicle Messages
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Battery Voltage and Charging
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16
Malfunction Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32
Rear Window Wiper/ Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Brake System Warning Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Engine Cooling System
Clock (Radio without Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34
Clock (Radio with Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-34
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-21
Engine Coolant Temperature Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-35
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Indicators Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Object Detection System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Ride Control System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-37

5-2 Instruments and Controls
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-38 while driving.
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicle Reminder Adjustment
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-40
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-48
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Vehicles with audio steering wheel
To adjust the steering wheel: controls could differ depending on
1. Pull the lever down. the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
2. Move the steering wheel up steering wheel.
or down.
w or x (Next/Previous): Press to
3. Pull or push the steering wheel select preset or favorite radio
closer or away from you. stations, select tracks on a CD/
4. Push the lever up to lock the DVD, or select tracks and navigate
steering wheel in place. folders on an iPod® or USB device.

To select tracks on an iPod or USB SRCE (Source/Voice For vehicles with an uplevel radio:
device: Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio, CD, and for 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is
. Press and hold w or x while equipped vehicles, DVD, front heard to place the radio into
listening to a song listed in the auxiliary, rear auxiliary, Pandora, SCAN mode. A station will play
main audio page, to quickly Stitcher, and iPod/USB. for five seconds before moving
move forward or in reverse to the next station.
through the tracks. For vehicles with an uplevel radio,
press and hold this button for longer 2. To stop the SCAN function,
. Track information is displayed on than one second to initiate voice press ¨ again.
the screen. Release w or x recognition. See “Voice Recognition”
3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB,
when the desired track is in the separate infotainment manual.
press and hold to quickly move
reached. ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next forward through the tracks.
g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to radio station while in AM, FM, Release to stop on the desired
silence the vehicle speakers only. or SiriusXM®. track.
Press again to turn the sound on.
Press ¨ to go to the next track or + e or − e (Volume): Press to
For vehicles with Bluetooth through chapter while sourced to the CD or increase or to decrease the volume.
the OnStar® system; press to DVD slot.
interact, then say “OnStar.” See
Bluetooth on page 7‑45 and OnStar Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
Overview on page 14‑1. when navigating folders on an iPod
x (End): Press to reject an or USB device.
incoming call, or end a current call.

Heated Steering Wheel Windshield Wiper/Washer Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
The windshield wiper/washer lever to the windshield, carefully loosen or
is located on the left side of the thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
steering column. should be replaced. See Wiper
Turn the band with the wiper symbol Blade Replacement on page 10‑24.
to control the windshield wipers. Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
Windshield Washer
J FRONT (Washer Fluid): Press
the button at the end of the lever, to
spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers clear the
( (Heated Steering Wheel): For 8 (Mist): Use for a single wiping windshield and either stop or return
vehicles with a heated steering cycle. to the preset speed. The ignition key
wheel, press to turn it on or off. must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
A light on the button displays when ON/RUN for this to work. See
the feature is turned on. 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Washer Fluid on page 10‑19.
Delays wiping cycle. Turn the band
The steering wheel takes about up for more frequent wipes or down
three minutes to start heating. for less frequent wipes.
Horn LO: Slow wipes.

HI: Fast wipes.
Press a on the steering wheel pad
to sound the horn.

Y (Wash): Press to spray washer Compass Zone

{ WARNING fluid on the rear window. The The zone is set to zone eight upon
In freezing weather, do not use window wiper will also come on. leaving the factory. Your dealer will
the washer until the windshield is Release the button when enough set the correct zone for your
fluid has been sprayed on the location.
warmed. Otherwise the washer
window. The rear wiper will run a
fluid can form ice on the Under certain circumstances, such
few more cycles after it is released.
windshield, blocking your vision. If the rear wiper function was as during a long distance
already on prior to pressing the cross-country trip or moving to a
wash button, it stays on until the new state or province, it will be
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
is displayed on the Driver wiper button is pressed again. necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the
Information Center (DIC) when the The rear window washer uses the zone through the DIC if the zone is
washer fluid is low. See Washer same fluid that is in the windshield not set correctly.
Fluid Messages on page 5‑40. washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10‑19. Compass variance is the difference
Rear Window Wiper/ between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
Washer Compass compass is not set to the zone
The rear wiper and rear wash button Your vehicle may have a compass where you live, the compass may
is located on the instrument panel in the Driver Information Center give false readings. The compass
below the climate control system. (DIC). See Driver Information must be set to the variance zone in
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) which the vehicle is traveling.
rear wiper on and off. The wiper on page 5‑28 or Driver Information
speed cannot be changed. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
page 5‑23 for more information
about the DIC.

To adjust for compass variance, use 2. Find the vehicle's current It is suggested to calibrate away
the following procedure: location and variance zone from tall buildings, utility wires,
number on the map. manhole covers, or other industrial
Compass Variance (Zone) structures, if possible.
Procedure Zones 1 through 15 are
available. If CAL should ever appear in the
1. Do not set the compass zone DIC display, the compass should be
when the vehicle is moving. Only 3. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through and select the calibrated.
set it when the vehicle is in
P (Park). appropriate variance zone. If the DIC display does not show a
4. Press the trip/fuel button until heading, for example, N for North,
Press the vehicle information or the heading does not change
button until PRESS V TO the vehicle heading, for
example, N for North, is after making turns, there may be a
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE strong magnetic field interfering with
displays. displayed in the DIC.
the compass. Such interference
5. If calibration is necessary, may be caused by a magnetic CB or
calibrate the compass. See cell phone antenna mount, a
“Compass Calibration magnetic emergency light, magnetic
Procedure” following. note pad holder, or any other
Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
move the magnetic item, then turn
The compass can be manually on the vehicle and calibrate the
calibrated. Only calibrate the compass.
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.

To calibrate the compass, use the CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a . Press \ FWD.
following procedure: few seconds when the
calibration is complete. The DIC
. Turn f clockwise.
Compass Calibration Procedure display will then return to the 5. To decrease the time or date, do
1. Before calibrating the compass, previous menu. one of the following:
make sure the compass zone is
set to the variance zone in which Clock (Radio without . Press © SEEK.
the vehicle is located. See
“Compass Variance (Zone)
Touchscreen) . Press s REV.
Procedure” earlier in this To adjust the time and date: . Turn f counterclockwise.
section. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ To change the time default setting
Do not operate any switches ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
such as window, sunroof, press O to turn the radio on. change the date default setting from
climate controls, seats, etc. month/day/year to day/month/year:
during the calibration procedure. 2. Press G to display HR, MIN,
2. Press the vehicle information MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, 1. Press G and then the
month, day, and year). pushbutton located under the
button until PRESS V TO
3. Press the pushbutton located forward arrow that displays on
CALIBRATE COMPASS the radio screen until the time
displays. under any one of the labels to be
changed. 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and
3. Press the set/reset button to the date MM/DD (month and
start the compass calibration. 4. To increase the time or date, do day) and DD/MM (day and
one of the following: month) display.
4. The DIC will display
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
. Press the pushbutton below 2. Press the pushbutton located
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in the selected label. under the desired option.
tight circles at less than 8 km/h . Press ¨ SEEK.
(5 mph) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display

3. Press G again to apply the Set Time: The power outlets are on the center
selected default, or let the . Press the up or down arrows to stack below the climate controls,
screen time out. increase or decrease the Hours, inside the center floor console, at
Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on the rear of the center console, and
Clock (Radio with the clock. in the rear cargo area. Lift the cover
to access the outlet and replace
Touchscreen) . Press and hold to quickly when not in use.
increase or decrease the time
settings.
{ WARNING
. Press OK or the Back screen
button to save the adjustments. Power is always supplied to the
outlets. Do not leave electrical
Set Date:
equipment plugged in when the
. Press the up or down arrows to vehicle is not in use because the
increase or decrease the Month, vehicle could catch fire and cause
Day, and Year settings. injury or death.
. Press and hold to quickly
increase or decrease the date Notice: Leaving electrical
settings. equipment plugged in for an
. Press OK or the Back screen extended period of time while the
Press Settings on the Home Page, vehicle is off will drain the
button to save the adjustments.
then press the Set Time or Set Date battery. Always unplug electrical
settings screen button to display the equipment when not in use and
different options for setting the time Power Outlets
do not plug in equipment that
and date. The vehicle has 12-volt outlets that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
can be used to plug in electrical rating.
equipment, such as a cell phone or
MP3 player.

Certain accessory plugs may not be circuit, unplug the item and plug it
compatible with the accessory back in or turn the Retained
power outlet and could overload Accessory Power (RAP) off and
vehicle and adapter fuses. If a then back on. See Retained
problem is experienced, see your Accessory Power (RAP) on
dealer. page 9‑18. The power restarts when
When adding electrical equipment, equipment using 150 watts or less is
be sure to follow the proper plugged into the outlet and a system
installation instructions included with fault is not detected.
the equipment. See Add-On The power outlet is on the rear of The power outlet is not designed for
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑49. the center console. and may not work properly, if the
Notice: Hanging heavy An indicator light on the outlet turns following are plugged in:
equipment from the power outlet on to show it is in use. The light . Equipment with high initial peak
can cause damage not covered comes on when the ignition is in wattage such as:
by the vehicle warranty. The ON/RUN and equipment requiring compressor-driven refrigerators
power outlets are designed for less than 150 watts is plugged into and electric power tools.
accessory power plugs only, such the outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
. Other equipment requiring an
as cell phone charge cords. extremely stable power supply
The indicator light does not come on such as:
Power Outlet 120 Volt
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or microcomputer-controlled
Alternating Current if the equipment is not fully seated electric blankets, touch sensor
The vehicle may have a power into the outlet. lamps, etc.
outlet that can be used to plug in If equipment is connected using
electrical equipment that uses a See High Voltage Devices and
more than 150 watts or a system Wiring on page 10‑28.
maximum limit of 150 watts. fault is detected, a protection circuit
shuts off the power supply and the
indicator light turns off. To reset the

Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.

Instrument Cluster
English Uplevel Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel

gauge shows how much fuel is left
The speedometer shows the in the tank.
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per An arrow on the fuel gauge
hour (mph). indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
Odometer The gauge will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but
The odometer shows how far the
the vehicle's fuel tank should be
vehicle has been driven, in either
filled soon.
kilometers or miles.
When the fuel tank is low on fuel,
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
appear on the Driver Information
new odometer installed, the new Metric Center (DIC). For more information
one is set to the mileage of the old
see Fuel System Messages on
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
page 5‑35.
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver door to show the old mileage Here are some situations that may
reading. occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
Tachometer fuel gauge.
The tachometer displays the engine
. At the gas station, the gas pump
speed in revolutions per shuts off before the gauge
minute (rpm). reads full.
English


. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
Engine Coolant
indicated. For example, the Temperature Gauge
gauge might have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge does not go back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off. English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the gauge
Metric
pointer moves into the red area, it
means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operated under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑16 for more information.

Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone

can occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a SERVICE When the vehicle is started, this
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM light flashes and a chime may come
message will appear in the Driver on to remind the driver to fasten
Information Center (DIC) and/or the their safety belt. Then the light stays
charging system light comes on. on solid until the belt is buckled.
See Battery Voltage and Charging This cycle may continue several
Messages on page 5‑31 for more times if the driver remains or
information. becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
When the engine is not running, but However, readings in either warning
the ignition is on, this gauge zone may indicate a possible If the driver safety belt is buckled,
displays the battery voltage in problem in the electrical system. neither the chime nor the light
DC volts. Have the vehicle serviced as soon comes on.
as possible.
When the engine is running, this Passenger Safety Belt
gauge shows the condition of the Reminder Light
charging system. The vehicle's Safety Belt Reminders
charging system regulates voltage There is a passenger safety belt
Driver Safety Belt Reminder reminder light near the passenger
based on the state of charge of the
Light airbag status indicator. See
battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.
This is normal. Readings between There is a driver safety belt Passenger Sensing System on
the low and high warning zones reminder light on the instrument page 3‑30.
indicate the normal operating range. cluster.

Airbag Readiness Light

{ WARNING
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag system might not be
When the vehicle is started, this the airbag modules, the wiring, and working properly. The airbags in
light flashes and a chime may come the crash sensing and diagnostic the vehicle might not inflate in a
on to remind passengers to fasten module. For more information on the
their safety belt. Then the light stays crash, or they could even inflate
airbag system, see Airbag System without a crash. To help avoid
on solid until the belt is buckled. on page 3‑23.
This cycle continues several times if injury, have the vehicle serviced
the passenger remains or becomes right away.
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving. If there is a problem with the airbag
If the passenger safety belt is system, a Driver Information Center
buckled, neither the chime nor the (DIC) message may also come on.
light comes on. See Airbag System Messages on
page 5‑37.
The front passenger safety belt The airbag readiness light comes on
warning light and chime may turn on for several seconds when the
if an object is put on the seat such vehicle is started. If the light does
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery not come on then, have it fixed
bag, laptop, or other electronic immediately.
device. To turn off the warning light
and/or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.

Passenger Airbag Status as a system check. If you use

Indicator remote start, if equipped, to start the { WARNING
vehicle, you may not see the system
The vehicle has a passenger check. Then, after several more If the airbag readiness light ever
sensing system. See Passenger seconds, the status indicator will comes on and stays on, it means
Sensing System on page 3‑30 for light either ON or OFF, or either the that something may be wrong
important safety information. The on or off symbol to let you know the with the airbag system. To help
instrument panel has a passenger status of the front outboard avoid injury to yourself or others,
airbag status indicator. passenger frontal airbag. have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
If the word ON or the on symbol is
Light on page 5‑15 for more
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the front information, including important
outboard passenger frontal airbag is safety information.
allowed to inflate.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is Charging System Light
United States lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
Canada and Mexico are no lights at all, there may be a The charging system light comes on
problem with the lights or the briefly when the ignition is turned
When the vehicle is started, the passenger sensing system. See on, but the engine is not running, as
passenger airbag status indicator your dealer for service.
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds

a check to show the light is working. Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by
It should go out when the engine is the system before any problem is
started.
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light
If the light stays on, or comes on A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage
while driving, there may be a (On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system also
problem with the electrical charging Generation) monitors the operation assists the service technician in
system. Have it checked by your of the vehicle to ensure emissions correctly diagnosing any
dealer. Driving while this light is on are at acceptable levels, helping to malfunction.
could drain the battery. maintain a clean environment. The Notice: If the vehicle is
malfunction indicator lamp comes continually driven with this light
When this light comes on, the Driver on when the vehicle is placed in
Information Center (DIC) also on, the emission controls might
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is not work as well, the vehicle fuel
displays the SERVICE BATTERY working. If it does not, have the
CHARGING SYSTEM message. economy might not be as good,
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See and the engine might not run as
See Vehicle Messages on Ignition Positions on page 9‑14. smoothly. This could lead to
page 5‑31 for more information. costly repairs that might not be
If a short distance must be driven covered by the vehicle warranty.
with the light on, be sure to turn off Notice: Modifications made to the
all accessories, such as the radio engine, transmission, exhaust,
and air conditioner. intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
If the malfunction indicator lamp those of the same Tire
comes on while the engine is Performance Criteria (TPC) can
running, this indicates that the OBD affect the vehicle's emission
II system has detected a problem controls and can cause this light
and diagnosis and service might be to come on. Modifications to
required. these systems could lead to

costly repairs not covered by the If the light continues to flash, find a
. Check that good quality fuel is
vehicle warranty. This could also safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes
result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may
Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up,
Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is
page 10‑2. your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring,
possible. hesitation on acceleration,
This light comes on during a or stumbling on acceleration.
malfunction in one of two ways: Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away
Light Flashing: A misfire condition control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up.
has been detected. A misfire been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
increases vehicle emissions and occurs, change the fuel brand used.
could damage the emission control required.
It may require at least one full tank
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
and service might be required. emission control system
malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
To prevent more serious damage to page 9‑38.
the vehicle: . Check that the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the
. Reduce vehicle speed. light turn off, your dealer can check
page 9‑40. The diagnostic
. Avoid hard accelerations. system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the
cap has been left off or proper test equipment and
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any
. If towing a trailer, reduce the missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems
amount of cargo being hauled as evaporate into the atmosphere. that might have developed.
soon as it is possible. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.

Emissions Inspection and the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
Light
Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the The vehicle brake system consists
vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp. of two hydraulic circuits. If one
participate in an emission control circuit is not working, the remaining
system inspection and maintenance . The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines circuit can still work to stop the
program. For the inspection, the vehicle. For normal braking
emission system test equipment will that critical emission control
systems have not been performance, both circuits need to
likely connect to the vehicle's Data be working
Link Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not If the warning light comes on, there
ready for inspection. This can is a brake problem. Have the brake
happen if the 12-volt battery has system inspected right away.
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the Metric English
wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
is needed. inspection for lack of OBD II This light should come on briefly
The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer when the ignition key is turned to
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for ON/RUN. If it does not come on
inspection. then, have it fixed so it will be ready
. The malfunction indicator lamp is to warn if there is a problem.
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when

This light may also come on due to The ABS warning light comes on
low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on WARNING (Continued) briefly when the ignition key is
page 10‑20. turned to ON/RUN. This is normal.
Driving with the brake system If the light does not come on then,
When the ignition is on, the brake warning light on can lead to a
system warning light also comes on have it fixed so it will be ready to
crash. If the light is still on after warn you if there is a problem.
when the parking brake is set. The the vehicle has been pulled off
light will stay on if the parking brake the road and carefully stopped, If the light stays on, turn the ignition
does not release fully. If it stays on have the vehicle towed for to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on
after the parking brake is fully while driving, stop as soon as
service.
released, it means there is a brake possible and turn the ignition off.
problem. Then start the engine again to reset
If the light comes on while driving, The brake message remains on until the system. If the light still stays on,
pull off the road and stop carefully. any DIC button is pressed. The or comes on again while driving, the
Make sure the parking brake is fully brake light remains on until the vehicle needs service. If the regular
released. The pedal may be harder problem is fixed. See Brake System brake system warning light is not
to push or, the pedal may go closer Messages on page 5‑32. on, there are still brakes, but no
to the floor. It may take longer to antilock brakes. If the regular brake
stop. If the light is still on, have the Antilock Brake System system warning light is also on,
vehicle towed for service. See (ABS) Warning Light there are no antilock brakes and
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑69. there is a problem with the regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑19.
{ WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
(Continued)

Tow/Haul Mode Light If it stays on, or comes on while If it does not, have the vehicle
driving, there could be a problem serviced by your dealer. If the
with the StabiliTrak system and the system is working normally, the
vehicle might need service. When indicator light then goes off.
this warning light is on, the system If the light comes on and stays on
is off and will not limit wheel spin. while driving, the vehicle may have
This light flashes when the a problem with the cooling system.
StabiliTrak system is active. Stop and turn off the vehicle to
This light comes on when the Tow/ See StabiliTrak® System on avoid damage to the engine.
Haul mode has been activated. page 9‑27 for more information. A warning chime sounds when this
light is on.
For more information, see Tow/Haul
Mode on page 9‑24. Engine Coolant See Engine Overheating on
Temperature Warning
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Light Tire Pressure Light
The engine coolant temperature For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
This light comes on briefly while warning light comes on briefly when Monitor System (TPMS), this light
starting the engine. If it does not, the vehicle is started. comes on briefly when the engine is
have the vehicle serviced by your started. It provides information
dealer. If the system is working about tire pressures and the TPMS.
normally, the indicator light goes off.

When the Light Is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it
This indicates that one or more of means that oil is not flowing through
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil the engine properly. The vehicle
the tires are significantly maintenance can damage the
underinflated. could be low on oil and might have
engine. Driving with the engine some other system problem. See
A Driver Information Center (DIC) oil low can also damage the your dealer.
tire pressure message may also engine. The repairs would not be
display. See Tire Messages on covered by the vehicle warranty. Security Light
page 5‑38. Stop as soon as Check the oil level as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the possible. Add oil if required, but
pressure value shown on the Tire if the oil level is within the
and Loading Information label. See operating range and the oil
Tire Pressure on page 10‑42. pressure is still low, have the
vehicle serviced. Always follow
When the Light Flashes First and the maintenance schedule for
Then Is On Steady changing engine oil.
If the light flashes for about a minute The security light should come on
and then stays on, there may be a briefly as the engine is started. If the
problem with the TPMS. If the system is working normally, the
problem is not corrected, the light indicator light turns off. If it does not
will come on at every ignition cycle. come on, have the vehicle serviced
See Tire Pressure Monitor by your dealer.
Operation on page 10‑45. If the light stays on and the engine
The oil pressure light should come does not start, there could be a
on briefly as the engine is started. problem with the theft-deterrent
If it does not come on, have the system.
vehicle serviced by your dealer.

This light is also used to indicate the See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Information Displays
status of the anti-theft alarm system Changer on page 6‑2 for more
when the ignition is turned off. The information.
light will flash rapidly if the alarm Driver Information Center
system is arming and one or more Cruise Control Light (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)
of the monitored entry points is not
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the
closed. The light will stay on if the
information below explains the
alarm is arming and all entry points
operation of this system.
are closed.
The DIC displays information about
For information regarding this light
your vehicle. It also displays
and the vehicle's security system,
warning messages if a system
see Vehicle Alarm System on
problem is detected.
page 2‑11. This light comes on whenever the
cruise control is set. All messages will appear in the DIC
High-Beam On Light display located at the top of the
The light goes out when the cruise instrument panel cluster.
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑29 for more The DIC comes on when the ignition
information. is on. After a short delay, the DIC
will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC also displays a shift lever
The high-beam on light comes on position indicator on the bottom line
when the high-beam headlamps are of the display. See Automatic
in use. Transmission on page 9‑21 for more
information.

The outside air temperature and DIC Buttons T (Vehicle Information): Press
compass, if equipped, also display The DIC has different displays this button to display the oil life,
on the DIC when viewing the trip which can be accessed by pressing park assist on vehicles with this
and fuel information. The outside air the DIC buttons located in the feature, units, tire pressure readings
temperature automatically appears center of the instrument panel. on vehicles with this feature, and
in the top right corner of the DIC compass calibration and zone
display. If there is a problem with setting on vehicles with this feature.
the system that controls the
temperature display, the numbers 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
will be replaced with dashes. If this to display the odometer, trip
occurs, have the vehicle serviced. odometers, fuel range, average
The compass will be shown in the economy, timer, fuel used, and
bottom right corner of the DIC average speed.
display. See Compass on page 5‑5 The buttons are the set/reset,
customization, vehicle information,
Vehicle Information Menu
for more information. Items
and trip/fuel buttons. The button
The DIC also allows some features functions are detailed in the T (Vehicle Information): Press
to be customized. See Vehicle following pages. this button to scroll through the
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) following menu items:
on page 5‑41 for more information. V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
set or reset certain functions and to OIL LIFE
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you turn off or acknowledge messages
can also use the trip odometer reset on the DIC. Press the vehicle information button
stem to view the odometer and trip until OIL LIFE REMAINING
odometers. U (Customization): Press this displays. This display shows an
button to customize the feature estimate of the oil's remaining useful
settings on your vehicle. See life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC REMAINING on the display, that
Buttons) on page 5‑41 for more means 99% of the current oil life
information. remains. The engine oil life system

will alert you to change the oil on a SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT select between ON or OFF. If you
schedule consistent with your If the vehicle has the Side Blind choose ON, the system will be
driving conditions. Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this turned on. If you choose OFF, the
When the remaining oil life is low, display allows the system to be system will be turned off. The URPA
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON turned on or off. Once in this system automatically turns back on
message will appear on the display. display, press the set/reset button to after each vehicle start. When the
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” select between ON or OFF. If you URPA system is turned off and the
under Engine Oil Messages on choose ON, the system will be vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
page 5‑34. You should change the turned on. If you choose OFF, the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
oil as soon as you can. See Engine system will be turned off. When the OFF message as a reminder that
Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the SBZA system is turned off, the DIC the system has been turned off. See
engine oil life system monitoring the will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE Object Detection System Messages
oil life, additional maintenance is ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as on page 5‑36 and Ultrasonic
recommended in the Maintenance a reminder that the system has Parking Assist on page 9‑31 for
Schedule in this manual. See been turned off. See Object more information.
Maintenance Schedule on Detection System Messages on REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
page 11‑3 for more information. page 5‑36 and Side Blind Zone Alert
(SBZA) on page 9‑32 for more If the vehicle has the Rear Cross
Remember, you must reset the OIL Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this
LIFE display yourself after each oil information.
display allows the system to be
change. It will not reset itself. Also, PARK ASSIST turned on or off. Once in this
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display, press the set/reset button to
display accidentally at any time If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, select between ON or OFF. If you
other than when the oil has just choose ON, the system will be
been changed. It cannot be reset press the vehicle information button
until PARK ASSIST displays. This turned on. If you choose OFF, the
accurately until the next oil change. system will be turned off. When the
To reset the engine oil life system, display allows the system to be
turned on or off. Once in this RCTA system is turned off, the DIC
see Engine Oil Life System on will display the REAR CROSS
page 10‑9. display, press the set/reset button to
TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM OFF

message as a reminder that the information button again until the Blank Display
system has been turned off. See DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa This display shows no information.
Object Detection System Messages (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
on page 5‑36 and Rear Vision If a low tire pressure condition is Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Camera (RVC) on page 9‑35. detected by the system while 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
UNITS driving, a message advising you to to scroll through the following menu
add air to a specific tire will appear items:
Press the vehicle information button in the display. See Tire Pressure on
until UNITS displays. This display page 10‑42 and Tire Messages on ODOMETER
allows you to select between metric page 5‑38 for more information. Press the trip/fuel button until
or English units of measurement.
If the tire pressure display shows ODOMETER displays. This display
Once in this display, press the set/
dashes instead of a value, there shows the distance the vehicle has
reset button to select between
may be a problem with your vehicle. been driven in either kilometers (km)
METRIC or ENGLISH units. All of
If this consistently occurs, see your or miles (mi). Pressing the trip
the vehicle information will then be
dealer for service. odometer reset stem will also
displayed in the unit of
display the odometer.
measurement selected. COMPASS ZONE SETTING
To switch between English and
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES This display will be available if the metric measurements, see “UNITS”
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure vehicle has a compass. See earlier in this section.
Monitor System (TPMS), the Compass on page 5‑5 for more
information. TRIP A and TRIP B
pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be Press the trip/fuel button until
COMPASS RECALIBRATION
shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This
pounds per square inch (psi). Press This display will be available if the display shows the current distance
the vehicle information button until vehicle has a compass. See traveled in either kilometers (km) or
the DIC displays FRONT Compass on page 5‑5 for more miles (mi) since the last reset for
TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## information. each trip odometer. Both trip
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle odometers can be used at the same

time. Pressing the trip odometer again, and then the retroactive reset For example, if driving in traffic and
reset stem will also display the trip feature is activated, the display will making frequent stops, this display
odometers. show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle may read one number, but if the
Each trip odometer can be reset to begins moving, the display will then vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
zero separately by pressing the set/ increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km number may change even though
reset button or the trip odometer (5.2 mi), etc. the same amount of fuel is in the
reset stem while the desired trip If the retroactive reset feature is fuel tank. This is because different
odometer is displayed. activated after the vehicle is started, driving conditions produce different
but before it begins moving, the fuel economies. Generally, freeway
The trip odometer has a feature driving produces better fuel
called retroactive reset. This can be display will show the number of
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven economy than city driving. Fuel
used to set the trip odometer to the range cannot be reset.
number of kilometers (miles) driven during the last ignition cycle.
since the ignition was last turned on. RANGE AVG (Average) ECONOMY
This can be used if the trip Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
odometer is not reset at the Press the trip/fuel button until
RANGE displays. This display ECONOMY displays. This display
beginning of the trip. shows the approximate average
shows the approximate number of
To use the retroactive reset feature, remaining kilometers (km) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
press and hold the set/reset button miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven or miles per gallon (mpg). This
for at least four seconds. The trip without refueling. The display will number is calculated based on the
odometer will display the number of show LOW if the fuel level is low. number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven since the last time this menu item
since the ignition was last turned on The fuel range estimate is based on was reset. To reset AVG
and the vehicle was moving. Once an average of the vehicle's fuel ECONOMY, press and hold the set/
the vehicle begins moving, the trip economy over recent driving history reset button.
odometer will accumulate mileage. and the amount of fuel remaining in
For example, if the vehicle was the fuel tank. This estimate will
driven 8 km (5 mi) before it is started change if driving conditions change.

Fuel Economy another display is being shown on average is calculated based on the
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL the DIC. The timer will record up to various vehicle speeds recorded
ECONOMY displays. The FUEL 99 hours, 59 minutes and since the last reset of this value. To
ECONOMY display shows an 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which reset the value to zero, press and
estimate of the vehicle fuel the display will return to zero. hold the set/reset button.
economy under a given driving To stop the timer, press the set/reset Blank Display
condition at a specific moment. For button briefly while TIMER is
example, if the vehicle is displayed. This display shows no information.
accelerating and achieving low fuel To reset the timer to zero, press and
efficiency this display will show Driver Information Center
hold the set/reset button while
fewer bars, but if the vehicle is TIMER is displayed. (DIC) (Without DIC
cruising on a flat freeway and Buttons)
getting high fuel efficiency, the FUEL USED
display will show more bars. Fuel If your vehicle does not have DIC
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL buttons, the information below
economy cannot be reset. USED displays. This display shows explains the operation of this
TIMER the number of liters (L) or system.
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the
Press the trip/fuel button until last reset of this menu item. To reset The DIC has different displays
TIMER displays. This display can be the fuel used information, press and which can be accessed by pressing
used as a timer. hold the set/reset button while FUEL the trip odometer reset stem located
To start the timer, press the set/ USED is displayed. on the instrument panel cluster.
reset button while TIMER is Pressing the trip odometer reset
displayed. The display will show the AVG (Average) SPEED stem will also turn off,
amount of time that has passed Press the trip/fuel button until AVG or acknowledge, DIC messages.
since the timer was last reset, not SPEED displays. This display
including time the ignition is off. shows the average speed of the
Time will continue to be counted as vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)
long as the ignition is on, even if or miles per hour (mph). This

The DIC displays trip and vehicle To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature,
system information, and warning metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the trip odometer
messages if a system problem is later in this section. reset stem for at least four seconds.
detected. The trip odometer will display the
TRIP A or TRIP B number of kilometers (km) or
If your vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, you can use the trip Press the trip odometer reset stem miles (mi) driven since the ignition
odometer reset stem to view the until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This was last turned on and the vehicle
following displays: odometer, trip display shows the current distance was moving. Once the vehicle
odometers, oil life, park assist menu traveled in either kilometers (km) or begins moving, the trip odometer
for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear miles (mi) since the last reset for will accumulate mileage. For
Parking Assist (URPA) system, each trip odometer. Both trip example, if the vehicle was driven
units, and display language. odometers can be used at the 8 km (5 mi) before it is started again,
same time. and then the retroactive reset
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you feature is activated, the display will
can use the trip odometer reset Each trip odometer can be reset to
zero separately by pressing and show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle
stem to view the following displays: begins moving, the display will then
odometer and trip odometers. holding the trip odometer reset stem
while the desired trip odometer is increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km
displayed. (5.2 mi), etc.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem
Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature If the retroactive reset feature is
called the retroactive reset. This can activated after the vehicle is started,
ODOMETER but before it begins moving, the
be used to set the trip odometer to
Press the trip odometer reset stem the number of kilometers (miles) display will show the number of
until ODOMETER displays. This driven since the ignition was last kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
display shows the distance the turned on. This can be used if the during the last ignition cycle.
vehicle has been driven in either trip odometer is not reset at the
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). beginning of the trip.

OIL LIFE Remember, you must reset the OIL system automatically turns back on
To access this display, the vehicle LIFE display yourself after each oil after each vehicle start. When the
must be in P (Park). Press the trip change. It will not reset itself. Also, URPA system is turned off and the
odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
REMAINING displays. This display display accidentally at any time DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
shows an estimate of the oil's other than when the oil has just OFF message as a reminder that
remaining useful life. If you see been changed. It cannot be reset the system has been turned off. See
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the accurately until the next oil change. Object Detection System Messages
display, that means 99% of the To reset the engine oil life system, on page 5‑36 and Ultrasonic
current oil life remains. The engine see Engine Oil Life System on Parking Assist on page 9‑31 for
oil life system will alert you to page 10‑9. more information.
change the oil on a schedule PARK ASSIST UNITS
consistent with your driving
conditions. To access this display, the vehicle To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). If your vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the trip
When the remaining oil life is low, has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking odometer reset stem until UNITS
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Assist (URPA) system, press the trip displays. This display allows you to
message will appear on the display. odometer reset stem until PARK select between metric or English
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” ASSIST displays. This display units of measurement. Once in this
under Engine Oil Messages on allows the system to be turned on or display, press and hold the trip
page 5‑34. You should change the off. Once in this display, press and odometer reset stem to select
oil as soon as you can. See Engine hold the trip odometer reset stem to between METRIC or ENGLISH
Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the select between ON or OFF. If you units. All of the vehicle information
engine oil life system monitoring the choose ON, the system will be will then be displayed in the unit of
oil life, additional maintenance is turned on. If you choose OFF, the measurement selected.
recommended in the Maintenance system will be turned off. The URPA
Schedule in this manual. See
Maintenance Schedule on

DISPLAY LANGUAGE Vehicle Messages The following are the possible

To access this display, the vehicle messages that can be displayed
Messages are displayed on the DIC and some information about them.
must be in P (Park). This display
to notify the driver that the status of
allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will
the vehicle has changed and that Battery Voltage and
some action may be needed by the
appear. To select a language:
driver to correct the condition.
Charging Messages
1. Press the trip odometer reset Multiple messages may appear one BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE after another.
displays. This message displays when the
Some messages may not require system detects that the battery
2. Continue to press and hold the immediate action, but you can press voltage is dropping below expected
trip odometer reset stem to scroll any of the DIC buttons on the levels. The battery saver system
through all of the available instrument panel or the trip starts reducing certain features of
languages. odometer reset stem on the the vehicle that you may be able to
The available languages are instrument panel cluster to notice. At the point that the features
ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS acknowledge that you received the are disabled, this message is
(French), ESPANOL (Spanish), messages and to clear them from displayed. It means that the vehicle
and NO CHANGE. the display. is trying to save the charge in the
Some messages cannot be cleared battery.
3. Once the desired language is
displayed, release the trip from the DIC display because they Turn off all unnecessary
odometer reset stem to set your are more urgent. These messages accessories to allow the battery to
choice. require action before they can be recharge.
cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the The normal battery voltage range is
display seriously and remember that 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem.

SERVICE BATTERY on the DIC display. If the message HOOD OPEN

CHARGING SYSTEM is still displayed or appears again
On some models, this message
when you begin driving, the brake
On some vehicles, this message displays and a chime sounds if the
system needs service as soon as
displays if there is a problem with hood is not fully closed. Stop and
possible. See your dealer.
the battery charging system. Under turn off the vehicle, check the hood
certain conditions, the charging for obstructions, and close the hood
system light may also turn on in the
Cruise Control Messages again. Check to see if the message
instrument panel cluster. See CRUISE SET TO XXX still appears on the DIC.
Charging System Light on
page 5‑16. Driving with this problem This message displays whenever LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
could drain the battery. Turn off all the cruise control is set. See Cruise This message displays and a chime
unnecessary accessories. Have the Control on page 9‑29 for more sounds if the driver side rear door is
electrical system checked as soon information. not fully closed and the vehicle is
as possible. See your dealer. shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
Door Ajar Messages off the vehicle, check the door for
Brake System Messages DRIVER DOOR OPEN
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays and a chime still appears on the DIC.
This message displays along with sounds if the driver door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is shifted out LIFTGATE OPEN
the brake system warning light if
there is a problem with the brake of P (Park). Stop and turn off the This message displays and a chime
system. See Brake System Warning vehicle, check the door for sounds if the liftgate is open while
Light on page 5‑19. If this message obstructions, and close the door the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
appears, stop as soon as possible again. Check to see if the message the vehicle and check the liftgate.
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the still appears on the DIC. Restart the vehicle and check for
vehicle and check for the message the message on the DIC display.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN Engine Cooling System occur. If an overheat warning

appears on the instrument cluster
This message displays and a chime Messages and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as
sounds if the passenger door is not
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air soon as possible. Do not increase
fully closed and the vehicle is
Conditioning) OFF the engine speed above normal
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
idling speed. See Engine
off the vehicle, check the door for This message displays when the Overheating on page 10‑16 for
obstructions, and close the door engine coolant becomes hotter than more information.
again. Check to see if the message the normal operating temperature.
still appears on the DIC. See Engine Coolant Temperature This message displays when the
Gauge on page 5‑13. To avoid engine coolant temperature is too
POWER LIFTGATE OFF hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
added strain on a hot engine, the air
This message displays when the conditioning compressor idle until it cools down. See Engine
power liftgate has been turned off automatically turns off. When the Coolant Temperature Gauge on
by pressing the power liftgate button coolant temperature returns to page 5‑13.
on the center console. normal, the air conditioning See Overheated Engine Protection
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN compressor turns back on. You can Operating Mode on page 10‑18 for
continue to drive your vehicle. information on driving to a safe
This message displays and a chime place in an emergency.
If this message continues to appear,
sounds if the passenger side rear
have the system repaired by your ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
door is not fully closed and the
dealer as soon as possible to avoid ENGINE
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
damage to the engine.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check Notice: If you drive the vehicle
the door for obstructions, and close ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE while the engine is overheating,
the door again. Check to see if the ENGINE severe engine damage may
message still appears on the DIC. occur. If an overheat warning
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating, appears on the instrument cluster
severe engine damage may and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Do not increase

the engine speed above normal See “Oil Life” under Driver cause of the low oil pressure is
idling speed. See Engine Information Center (DIC) (Without corrected. See Engine Oil on
Overheating on page 10‑16 for DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 or Driver page 10‑7 for more information.
more information. Information Center (DIC) (With DIC This message displays when the
This message displays and a Buttons) on page 5‑23 and Engine vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
continuous chime sounds if the Oil Life System on page 10‑9. The oil pressure light also appears
engine cooling system reaches ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL on the instrument panel cluster. See
unsafe temperatures for operation. Engine Oil Pressure Light on
Stop and turn off the vehicle as On some vehicles, this message page 5‑22.
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid displays when the engine oil level
may be too low. Check the oil level Stop the vehicle immediately, as
severe damage. This message engine damage can result from
clears when the engine has cooled before filling to the recommended
level. If the oil is not low and this driving a vehicle with low oil
to a safe operating temperature. pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
message remains on, take the
vehicle to your dealer for service. by your dealer as soon as possible
Engine Oil Messages See Engine Oil on page 10‑7. when this message is displayed.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP Engine Power Messages
This message displays when ENGINE
service is required for the vehicle. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
See your dealer. See Engine Oil on Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine oil pressure is This message displays and a chime
page 10‑7 and Maintenance sounds when the cooling system
Schedule on page 11‑3 for more low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure temperature gets too hot and the
information. engine further enters the engine
warning appears on the Driver
Acknowledging the CHANGE Information Center (DIC), stop the coolant protection mode. See
ENGINE OIL SOON message will vehicle as soon as possible. Do Engine Overheating on page 10‑16
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING. not drive the vehicle until the for further information.

This message also displays when TIGHTEN GAS CAP Lamp Messages
the vehicle's engine power is
This message may display along AUTOMATIC LIGHT
reduced. Reduced engine power
with the check engine light on the
can affect the vehicle's ability to
instrument panel cluster if the
CONTROL OFF
accelerate. If this message is on,
vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened This message displays when the
but there is no reduction in
properly. See Malfunction Indicator automatic headlamps are turned off.
performance, proceed to your
Lamp on page 5‑17. Reinstall the This message clears itself after
destination. The performance may
fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank 10 seconds.
be reduced the next time the vehicle
on page 9‑40. The diagnostic
is driven. The vehicle may be driven AUTOMATIC LIGHT
system can determine if the fuel cap
at a reduced speed while this CONTROL ON
has been left off or improperly
message is on, but acceleration and
installed. A loose or missing fuel This message displays when the
speed may be reduced. Anytime
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the automatic headlamps are turned on.
this message stays on, the vehicle
atmosphere. A few driving trips with This message clears itself after
should be taken to your dealer for
the cap properly installed should 10 seconds.
service as soon as possible.
turn this light and message off.
TURN SIGNAL ON
Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages This message displays and a chime
FUEL LEVEL LOW sounds if a turn signal is left on for
REPLACE BATTERY IN 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn
This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY signal lever to the off position.
sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel
as soon as possible. See Fuel This message displays if a Remote
Gauge on page 5‑12 and Fuel on Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
page 9‑38 for more information. battery is low. The battery needs to
be replaced in the transmitter. See
“Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑2.

Object Detection System REAR CROSS TRAFFIC there is a problem with the SBZA
ALERT SYSTEM OFF system. If these displays remain on
Messages after continued driving, the system
If the vehicle has the Rear Cross needs service. See your dealer. See
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this
OWNERS MANUAL Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
message displays when the RCTA page 9‑32 for more information.
This message displays if there is system has been turned off. See
something interfering with the park Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
assist system. See Ultrasonic page 9‑35 and Driver Information SYSTEM OFF
Parking Assist on page 9‑31 for Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑28 or Driver Information If your vehicle has the Side Blind
more information. Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
PARK ASSIST OFF page 5‑23. message displays when the SBZA
system has been turned off. See
After the vehicle has been started, SERVICE PARK ASSIST Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
this message displays to remind the page 9‑32 and Driver Information
driver that the URPA system has This message displays if there is a
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
been turned off. Press the set/reset problem with the Ultrasonic Rear
on page 5‑28 or Driver Information
button or the trip odometer reset Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
stem to acknowledge this message not use this system to help you
and clear it from the DIC display. To park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
turn the URPA system back on, see on page 9‑31 for more information. SIDE DETECTION SYS
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on See your dealer for service. TEMPORARILY OFF
page 9‑31. SERVICE SIDE DETECTION If your vehicle has the Side Blind
SYSTEM Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
message displays when the SBZA
If your vehicle has the Side Blind
system is disabled because the
Zone Alert (SBZA) system and this
sensor cannot detect vehicles in
message displays, both SBZA
your blind zone. The sensor may be
displays will remain on indicating

blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, drive, however, you do not have the on page 9‑27 for more information.
or slush. This message may also benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce This message clears itself after
display during heavy rain or due to your speed and drive accordingly. 10 seconds.
road spray. It may also come on
when driving in isolated areas with SERVICE TRACTION Airbag System Messages
no guardrails, trees, or road signs CONTROL
and light traffic. Your vehicle does This message displays when there SERVICE AIR BAG
not need service. For cleaning is a problem with the Traction This message displays if there is a
instructions, see “Washing Your Control System (TCS). When this problem with the airbag system.
Vehicle” in Exterior Care on message is displayed, the system Have your dealer inspect the
page 10‑73. See Side Blind Zone will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your system for problems. See Airbag
Alert (SBZA) on page 9‑32 for more driving accordingly. See your dealer Readiness Light on page 5‑15 and
information. for service. See StabiliTrak® System Airbag System on page 3‑23 for
on page 9‑27 for more information. more information.
Ride Control System
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
Messages Security Messages
This message displays when the
SERVICE STABILITRAK Traction Control System (TCS) is SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
This message displays if there is a turned off. Adjust your driving SYSTEM
problem with the StabiliTrak® accordingly. See StabiliTrak® This message displays when there
system. If this message appears, try System on page 9‑27 for more is a problem with the theft-deterrent
to reset the system. Stop; turn off information. This message clears system. The vehicle may or may not
the engine for at least 15 seconds; itself after 10 seconds. restart so you may want to take the
then start the engine again. If this TRACTION CONTROL ON vehicle to your dealer before turning
message still comes on, it means off the engine. See Immobilizer
there is a problem. See your dealer This message displays when the Operation on page 2‑13 for more
for service. The vehicle is safe to Traction Control System (TCS) is information.
turned on. See StabiliTrak® System

THEFT ATTEMPTED SERVICE POWER STEERING Tire Messages

This message displays if the content This message displays when a TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
theft-deterrent system has detected problem is detected with the power
a break-in attempt while you were steering system. When this On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
away from your vehicle. See Vehicle message is displayed, you may Monitor System (TPMS), this
Alarm System on page 2‑11 for notice that the effort required to message displays when the
more information. steer the vehicle increases or feels pressure in one or more of the
heavier, but you will still be able to vehicle's tires is low.
Service Vehicle Messages steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle This message also displays LEFT
serviced by your dealer immediately. FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right
SERVICE A/C (Air front), LEFT RR (left rear),
Conditioning) SYSTEM SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate
This message displays when the This message displays when a the location of the low tire.
electronic sensors that control the non-emissions related malfunction
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced The low tire pressure warning light
air conditioning and heating will also come on. See Tire
systems are no longer working. by your dealer as soon as possible.
Pressure Light on page 5‑21.
Have the climate control system STARTING DISABLED
serviced by your dealer if you notice If a tire pressure message appears
SERVICE THROTTLE on the DIC, stop as soon as you
a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency. This message displays when your can. Inflate the tires by adding air
vehicle's throttle system is not until the tire pressure is equal to the
functioning properly. Have your values shown on the Tire and
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 10‑35, Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑9, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑42.

You can receive more than one tire comes on and stays on, there may
. AWD system overheat
pressure message at a time. To be a problem with the TPMS. See . Loss of wheel or vehicle speed
read the other messages that may your dealer. .
have been sent at the same time, Certain other vehicle electrical
press the set/reset button or the trip TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE conditions
odometer reset stem. The DIC also This message displays when the This message turns off when the
shows the tire pressure values. See Tire Pressure Monitor System compact spare tire is replaced by a
Driver Information Center (DIC) (TPMS) is relearning the tire full-size tire, the differential fluid
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 positions on your vehicle. The tire cools or the above conditions are no
or Driver Information Center (DIC) positions must be relearned after longer present and the warning
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑23. rotating the tires or after replacing a message is reset. To reset the
tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on warning message manually, turn the
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR page 10‑48, Tire Pressure Monitor ignition off and then back on again
SYSTEM System on page 10‑44, and Tire after 30 seconds. If the message
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Pressure on page 10‑42 for more stays on, see your dealer. See
Monitor System (TPMS), this information. All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑24.
message displays if a part on the
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
TPMS is not working properly. The Transmission Messages
tire pressure light also flashes and This message displays if a problem
then remains on during the same ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF occurs with the All-Wheel Drive
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure If your vehicle has the All-Wheel (AWD) system. The vehicle will run
Light on page 5‑21. Several Drive (AWD) system, this message in 2WD. This could be caused by:
conditions may cause this message displays when there is a temporary . An electronics problem
to appear. See Tire Pressure condition making the AWD system
Monitor Operation on page 10‑45 for unavailable. The vehicle will run in
. Worn out or overheated clutch
more information. If the warning 2WD. This could be caused by: plates
. A compact spare tire on the
. Various electrical issues
vehicle

If this message appears, stop as This message displays and a chime Vehicle Speed Messages
soon as possible and turn off the sounds if the transmission fluid in
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH
vehicle and check for the message transmission fluid temperature high (KM/H)
on the DIC display. If the message can cause damage to the vehicle.
This message displays when your
still displays or appears again when Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
vehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h
you begin driving, the system needs allow the transmission to cool. This
(80 mph) because the vehicle
service. See your dealer right away. message clears when the fluid
detects a problem in the speed
temperature reaches a safe level.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION variable assist steering system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your
This message displays when there Vehicle Reminder dealer.
is a problem with the transmission. Messages
See your dealer for service.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
Washer Fluid Messages
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
WITH CARE WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
ENGINE
This message displays when the FLUID
Notice: Do not drive the vehicle outside air temperature is cold
while the transmission fluid is This message displays when the
enough to create icy road windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
overheating and the transmission conditions. Adjust your driving
temperature warning is displayed the windshield washer fluid reservoir
accordingly. as soon as possible. See Engine
on the instrument cluster and/or
DIC, or the transmission can be Compartment Overview on
damaged. This could lead to page 10‑5 for the location of the
costly repairs that would not be windshield washer fluid reservoir.
covered by the warranty. Also, see Washer Fluid on

Vehicle The customization preferences are Feature Settings Menu Items

automatically recalled.
Personalization The following are customization
To change customization features that allow you to program
preferences, use the following settings to the vehicle:
Vehicle Personalization procedure.
(With DIC Buttons) DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
Entering the Feature This feature will only display if a
Your vehicle may have Settings Menu language other than English has
customization capabilities that allow
1. Turn the ignition on and place been set. This feature allows you to
you to program certain features to
the vehicle in P (Park). change the language in which the
one preferred setting. Customization
DIC messages appear to English.
features can only be programmed to To avoid excessive drain on the
one setting on the vehicle and battery, it is recommended that Press the customization button until
cannot be programmed to a the headlamps are turned off. the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
preferred setting for two different ENGLISH screen appears on the
2. Press the customization button
drivers. DIC display. Press the set/reset
to enter the feature
All of the customization options may settings menu. button once to display all DIC
not be available on your vehicle. messages in English.
If the menu is not available,
Only the options available will be DISPLAY LANGUAGE
FEATURE SETTINGS
displayed on the DIC.
AVAILABLE IN PARK will This feature allows you to select the
The default settings for the display. Before entering the language in which the DIC
customization features were set menu, make sure the vehicle is messages will appear.
when your vehicle left the factory, in P (Park).
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen This feature allows you to select This feature allows you to select
appears on the DIC display. Press when the doors will automatically whether or not to turn off the
the set/reset button once to access lock. See Automatic Door Locks on automatic door unlocking feature.
the settings for this feature. Then page 2‑7 for more information. It also allows you to select which
press the customization button to doors and when the doors will
scroll through the following settings: Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the automatically unlock. See Automatic
ENGLISH (default): All messages DIC display. Press the set/reset Door Locks on page 2‑7 for more
will appear in English. button once to access the settings information.
FRANCAIS: All messages will for this feature. Then press the Press the customization button until
appear in French. customization button to scroll AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
ESPANOL: All messages will through the following settings: the DIC display. Press the set/reset
appear in Spanish. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): button once to access the settings
The doors will automatically lock for this feature. Then press the
NO CHANGE: No change will be customization button to scroll
made to this feature. The current when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park). through the following settings:
setting will remain.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors OFF: None of the doors will
To select a setting, press the set/ automatically unlock.
reset button while the desired will automatically lock when the
setting is displayed on the DIC. vehicle speed is above 13 km/h DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
(8 mph) for three seconds. driver door will unlock when the key
You can also change the language is taken out of the ignition.
by pressing the trip odometer reset NO CHANGE: No change will be
stem. See “DISPLAY LANGUAGE” made to this feature. The current DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver
under Driver Information Center setting will remain. door will unlock when the vehicle is
(DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) earlier To select a setting, press the set/ shifted into P (Park).
in this section for more information. reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/
will unlock when the key is taken REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on reset button while the desired
out of the ignition. the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park). customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the
through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive
NO CHANGE: No change will be when unlocking the vehicle with the
made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
setting will remain. transmitter. You will not receive
the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/ feedback when unlocking the
reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock the doors are open. See Remote
button on the RKE transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound Operation on page 2‑2 for more
This feature allows you to select the on the second press of the lock information.
type of feedback you will receive button on the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button until
when locking the vehicle with the HORN & LIGHTS (default): The REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you on the DIC display. Press the set/
transmitter. You will not receive press the lock button on the RKE reset button once to access the
feedback when locking the vehicle transmitter, and the horn will sound settings for this feature. Then press
with the RKE transmitter if the doors when the lock button is pressed the customization button to scroll
are open. See Remote Keyless again within five seconds of the through the following settings:
Entry (RKE) System Operation on previous command.
page 2‑2 for more information. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press the
made to this feature. The current unlock button on the RKE
setting will remain. transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lock button on the RKE transmitter is dark enough outside. This
lamps will flash when you press the twice. See Delayed Locking on happens after the key is turned from
unlock button on the RKE page 2‑7 for more information. ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
transmitter. Press the customization button until Press the customization button until
NO CHANGE: No change will be DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC
made to this feature. The current the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button
setting will remain. button once to access the settings once to access the settings for this
To select a setting, press the set/ for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the
reset button while the desired customization button to scroll customization button to scroll
setting is displayed on the DIC. through the following settings: through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not
DELAY DOOR LOCK locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on.
This feature allows you to select ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The
whether or not the locking of the lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for
vehicle's doors and liftgate will be door or the liftgate is closed. 30 seconds.
delayed. When locking the doors
and liftgate with the power door lock NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
switch and a door or the liftgate is made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute.
open, this feature will delay locking setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
the doors and liftgate until To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes.
five seconds after the last door is reset button while the desired
closed. You will hear three chimes NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be EXIT LIGHTING setting will remain.
out of the ignition for this feature to This feature allows you to select the To select a setting, press the set/
work. You can temporarily override amount of time you want the reset button while the desired
delayed locking by pressing the exterior lamps to remain on when it setting is displayed on the DIC.
power door lock switch twice or the

APPROACH LIGHTING The lights will remain on for LOUD: The chime volume will be
This feature allows you to select 20 seconds or until the lock button set to a loud level.
whether or not to have the exterior on the RKE transmitter is pressed, NO CHANGE: No change will be
lights turn on briefly during low light or the vehicle is no longer off. See made to this feature. The current
periods after unlocking the vehicle Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) setting will remain.
using the Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2‑2 for
more information. There is no default for chime
(RKE) transmitter. volume. The volume will stay at the
Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be last known setting.
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on made to this feature. The current
setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/
the DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button while the desired
button once to access the settings To select a setting, press the set/ setting is displayed on the DIC.
for this feature. Then press the reset button while the desired
customization button to scroll setting is displayed on the DIC. PARK TILT MIRRORS
through the following settings: If your vehicle has this feature, it
CHIME VOLUME
OFF: The exterior lights will not allows you to select whether or not
turn on when you unlock the vehicle This feature allows you to select the the outside mirror(s) will
with the RKE transmitter. volume level of the chime. automatically tilt down when the
ON (default): If it is dark enough Press the customization button until vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
outside, the exterior lights will turn CHIME VOLUME appears on the See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17
on briefly when you unlock the DIC display. Press the set/reset for more information.
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.

Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ The automatic easy exit seat
PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on reset button while the desired movement will only occur one time
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. after the key is removed from the
button once to access the settings ignition. If the automatic movement
for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT SEAT has already occurred, and you put
customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it the key back in the ignition and
through the following settings: allows you to select your preference remove it again, the seat and
OFF (default): Neither outside for the automatic easy exit seat steering column will stay in the
mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Memory Seats on original exit position, unless a
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). page 3‑6 for more information. memory recall took place prior to
Press the customization button until removing the key again.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's
outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the NO CHANGE: No change will be
when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset made to this feature. The current
R (Reverse). button once to access the settings setting will remain.
for this feature. Then press the To select a setting, press the set/
PASSENGER MIRROR: The customization button to scroll
passenger's outside mirror will be reset button while the desired
through the following settings: setting is displayed on the DIC.
tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat
exit recall will occur. MEMORY SEAT RECALL
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and If your vehicle has this feature, it
passenger's outside mirrors will be ON: The driver seat will move back
when the key is removed from the allows you to select your preference
tilted down when the vehicle is for the remote memory seat recall
shifted into R (Reverse). ignition.
feature. See Memory Seats on
NO CHANGE: No change will be page 3‑6 for more information.
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.

Press the customization button until outside of the vehicle using the FACTORY SETTINGS
MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) This feature allows you to set all of
on the DIC display. Press the set/ transmitter. See Remote Vehicle the customization features back to
reset button once to access the Start on page 2‑4 for more their factory default settings.
settings for this feature. Then press information.
the customization button to scroll Press the customization button until
Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
through the following settings: REMOTE START appears on the the DIC display. Press the set/reset
OFF (default): No remote memory DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings
seat recall will occur. button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the
ON: The driver seat and outside for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
mirrors will automatically move to customization button to scroll through the following settings:
the stored driving position when the through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The
unlock button on the Remote OFF: The remote start feature will customization features will be set to
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is be disabled. their factory default settings.
pressed. ON (default): The remote start DO NOT RESTORE: The
NO CHANGE: No change will be feature will be enabled. customization features will not be
made to this feature. The current NO CHANGE: No change will be set to their factory default settings.
setting will remain. made to this feature. The current To select a setting, press the set/
To select a setting, press the set/ setting will remain. reset button while the desired
reset button while the desired To select a setting, press the set/ setting is displayed on the DIC.
setting is displayed on the DIC. reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
REMOTE START
This feature allows you to exit the
If your vehicle has this feature, it feature settings menu.
allows you to turn the remote start
off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from

Press the customization button until Universal Remote devices such as garage door
FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V openers, security systems, and
TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. System home automation devices.
Press the set/reset button once to See Radio Frequency Statement on Do not use the Universal Remote
exit the menu. page 13‑21 for information system with any garage door opener
If you do not exit, pressing the regarding Part 15 of the Federal that does not have the stop and
customization button again will Communications Commission (FCC) reverse feature. This includes any
return you to the beginning of the rules and Industry Canada garage door opener model
feature settings menu. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. manufactured before April 1,1982.
Read the instructions completely
Exiting the Feature Universal Remote System before attempting to program the
Settings Menu Programming Universal Remote system. Because
The feature settings menu will be of the steps involved, it may be
exited when any of the following helpful to have another person
occurs: available to assist with programming
the Universal Remote system.
. The vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park). Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
. The vehicle is no longer in
as well as for future Universal
ON/RUN.
If the vehicle has this feature, you Remote system programming. It is
. The trip/fuel or vehicle
will see these buttons with one also recommended that upon the
information DIC buttons are sale of the vehicle, the programmed
indicator light next to them in the
pressed. Universal Remote system buttons
overhead console.
. The end of the feature settings be erased for security purposes.
This system provides a way to See “Erasing Universal Remote
menu is reached and exited.
replace up to three remote control System Buttons” later in this
. A 40-second time period has transmitters used to activate section.
elapsed with no selection made.

When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: Some entry gates and garage
park outside of the garage. Park 1. Hold the end of the hand-held door openers may require
directly in line with and facing the transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to substitution of Step 2 with the
garage door opener motor-head or 3 in) away from the Universal procedure noted in “Gate
gate motor-head. Be sure that Remote system buttons while Operator and Canadian
people and objects are clear of the keeping the indicator light in Programming” later in this
garage door or gate being view. The hand-held transmitter section.
programmed. was supplied by the 3. Press and hold for five seconds
It is recommended that a new manufacturer of the garage door the newly trained Universal
battery be installed in the hand-held opener receiver Remote system button (the
transmitter for quicker and more (motor-head unit). button selected in Step 2) while
accurate transmission of the 2. At the same time, press and observing the indicator light and
radio-frequency signal. hold both the hand-held garage door activation.
Programming the Universal transmitter button and one of the . If the indicator light stays on
Remote System three Universal Remote system continuously or the garage
buttons to be used to operate door starts to move when
For questions or help programming the garage door. Do not release the Universal Remote
the Universal Remote system, call the Universal Remote system system button is pressed
1-800-355-3515 or go to button or the hand-held and released, then the
www.homelink.com. transmitter button until the programming is complete.
Programming a garage door opener indicator light changes from a There is no need to
involves time-sensitive actions, so slowly to a rapidly flashing light. continue programming
read the entire procedure before You now may release both Steps 4–6.
starting. Otherwise, the device will buttons.
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.


. If the Universal Remote 5. Firmly press and release the To program the remaining two
system indicator light blinks “Learn” or “Smart” button. After Universal Remote system buttons,
rapidly for two seconds, pressing this button, you will begin with Step 1 of “Programming
then turns to a constant have 30 seconds to complete the Universal Remote System.”
light and the garage door Step 6.
does not move, continue Gate Operator and Canadian
with programming 6. Immediately return to the Programming
Steps 4–6. vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal If you have questions or need help
It may be helpful to have Remote system button, selected programming the Universal Remote
another person assist with in Step 2 to control the garage system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
the remaining Steps 4–6. door, and then release it. If the to www.homelink.com.
garage door does not move or Canadian radio-frequency laws
the lamp on the garage door require transmitter signals to time
opener receiver (motor-head out or quit after several seconds of
unit) does not flash, press and transmission. This may not be long
hold the same button a second enough for the Universal Remote
time for two seconds, then system to pick up the signal during
release it. Again, if the door programming. Similarly, some U.S.
does not move or the garage gate operators are manufactured to
door lamp does not flash, press time out in the same manner.
“Learn” or “Smart” Button and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, then
4. After Steps 1–3 have been
release.
completed, locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button inside the garage The Universal Remote system
on the garage door opener should now activate the
receiver (motor-head unit). The garage door.
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.

If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System 1. Press and hold down the two
having difficulty programming a gate outside buttons until the
operator or garage door opener by
Operation indicator light begins to flash,
using the “Programming the Using Universal Remote after 20 seconds.
Universal Remote System” 2. Release both buttons.
procedures, regardless of where Press and hold the appropriate
you live, replace Step 2 under Universal Remote button for at least Reprogramming a Single
“Programming the Universal Remote half of a second. The indicator light Universal Remote Button
System” with the following: will come on while the signal is
being transmitted. To reprogram any of the three
Continue to press and hold the Universal Remote buttons, repeat
Universal Remote system button Erasing Universal Remote the programming instructions earlier
while you press and release every Buttons in this section, beginning with
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held Step 2.
All programmed buttons should be
transmitter button until the
erased when the vehicle is sold or For help or information on the
frequency signal has been
the lease ends. Universal Home Remote System,
successfully accepted by the
Universal Remote system. The To erase all programmed buttons on call the customer assistance phone
Universal Remote system indicator the Universal Remote device: number under Customer Assistance
light will flash slowly at first and then Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
“Programming the Universal Remote Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
System” to complete.

2 NOTES

Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running Lamps Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-7
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the left of the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
steering wheel.
There are four positions:
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the
following:
. Parking Lamps

6-2 Lighting
. Taillamps
Headlamp High/ If the headlamps are off or in the
. License Plate Lamps low-beam position, pull the turn
Low-Beam Changer signal lever toward you to
. Instrument Panel Lights 2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam momentarily switch to high beams.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the Changer): Push the turn signal Release the lever to turn the
parking lamps on together with the lever away from you to turn the high high-beam headlamps off.
following: beams on.
. Taillamps Pull the lever toward you to return to Daytime Running Lamps
. License Plate Lamps low beams. (DRL)/Automatic
. Instrument Panel Lights Headlamp System
5 (Headlamps): Turns the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
headlamps on together with the make it easier for others to see the
following lamps. A warning chime front of your vehicle during the day.
sounds if the driver door is opened Fully functional daytime running
when the ignition switch is off and lamps are required on all vehicles
the headlamps are on. This indicator light turns on in the first sold in Canada.
. Parking Lamps instrument cluster when the The DRL system makes the
high-beam headlamps are on. low-beam headlamps come on at a
. Taillamps
reduced brightness when the
. License Plate Lamps Flash-to-Pass following conditions are met:
. Instrument Panel Lights This feature is used to signal to the . The ignition is in the ON/RUN
vehicle ahead that you want position.
to pass. . The exterior lamp control is
in AUTO.
. The engine is running.

Lighting 6-3
When the DRL are on, the regular Lights On with Wipers If the ignition is turned off with the
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, exterior lamp control in the ;
If the windshield wipers are
and other lamps will not be on. The
activated in daylight with the engine or 5 position, the delayed
instrument cluster will also not be lit.
on, and the exterior lamp control is headlamps cycle will not occur.
The headlamps automatically in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
change from DRL to the regular To disable the delayed headlamps
lamps, and other exterior lamps
headlamps depending on the feature or change the time of delay,
come on. The transition time for the
darkness of the surroundings. The see Vehicle Personalization (With
lamps coming on varies based on
other lamps that come on with the DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
wiper speed. When the wipers are
headlamps will also come on. not operating, these lamps turn off.
Move the exterior lamp control to P
Hazard Warning Flashers
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will go off and the or ; to disable this feature.
DRL will come on.
When the DRLs are active and a Delayed Headlamps
turn signal is operated, the DRL on
Delayed headlamps provide a
the side the turn signal is activated,
period of exterior lighting as you
will turn off until the turn signal is
leave the area around the vehicle.
turned off.
This feature is activated when the
The regular headlamp system headlamps are on due to the
should be turned on when needed. automatic headlamps control
Do not cover the light sensor on top feature, and when the ignition is
of the instrument panel because it turned off. The headlamps remain
works with the DRL. on until the exterior lamp control is
moved to the parking lamps position
or until the pre-selected delayed | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
headlamp lighting period has ended. Press this button to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on

6-4 Lighting
and off. This warns others that you Raise or lower the lever until the Fog Lamps
are having trouble. Press again to arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
turn the flashers off. change. Hold it there until the lane
The turn signals do not work while change is completed. If the lever is
the hazard warning flashers are on. briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out. For vehicles with front fog lamps,
the fog lamp button is on the
Have any burned out bulbs exterior lamp control to the left of
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, the steering column.
check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑29. Use the fog lamps for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions.
Turn Signal On Chime # (Fog Lamps): Press the fog
Move the turn signal lever all the If either one of the turn signals is left lamp button to turn the fog lamps on
way up or down to signal a turn. on and the vehicle has been driven or off. A light comes on in the
An arrow on the instrument cluster more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime instrument cluster when the fog
flashes in the direction of the turn or will sound. lamps are in use. The ignition must
lane change. be on for the fog lamps to work.

Lighting 6-5
When the headlamps are changed Interior Lighting counterclockwise to brighten or dim
to high beam, the fog lamps turn off. the lights. Push the knob back in
The fog lamps come back on again when finished.
when the high-beam headlamps are Instrument Panel
turned off. Illumination Control Courtesy Lamps
Some localities have laws that The courtesy lamps automatically
require the headlamps to be on come on when a door is opened.
along with the fog lamps. The lamps can also be turned on
manually by fully turning the
instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.
The reading lamps, located on the
headliner above the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off
independently of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are
closed.
The instrument panel brightness
knob is located on the instrument
Dome Lamps
panel to the left of the steering The dome lamps are in the
column. overhead console and above the
D (Instrument Panel rear seat passengers.
Brightness): Push the knob in all The dome lamps come on when a
the way until it extends out and then door is opened, unless the dome
turn the knob clockwise or lamp override button is pressed in.

6-6 Lighting
The lamps can also be turned on the dome lamps are off. Press the Lighting Features
and off by turning the instrument button again so the dome lamps
panel brightness control clockwise come on when a door is opened.
to the farthest position. Entry Lighting
Dome Lamp Override For vehicles with courtesy lamps,
they come on and stay on for a set
time whenever K is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay
on while it is open and then turn off
automatically about 20 seconds
after the door is closed. If K is
pressed and no door is opened, the
lamps turn off after about
20 seconds.
AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped): Entry lighting includes a feature
Press the button to turn the ambient called theater dimming. With theater
The dome lamp override button is lights off. Press the button again to dimming, the lamps do not turn off
next to the exterior lamps control. turn ambient lights on. at the end of the delay time.
E DOME OFF (Dome Lamp Instead, they slowly dim and then
Override): Press the button and Reading Lamps go out. The delay time is canceled if
the dome lamps remain off when a Press the button near each lamp to the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
door is opened. An indicator light on turn them on or off. or the power door lock switch is
the button comes on to show that pressed. The lamps will dim
right away.

Lighting 6-7
When the ignition is on, illuminated Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming
entry is inactive, which means the
courtesy lamps will not come on Delayed exit lighting illuminates the This feature automatically prohibits
unless a door is opened. interior for a period of time after the the dimming of the instrument panel
key is removed from the ignition. displays in daylight while the
Delayed Entry Lighting The ignition must be off for delayed headlamps are on so that the
exit lighting to work. When the key displays are still able to be seen.
Delayed entry lighting illuminates
is removed, interior illumination
the interior for a period of time after
activates and remains on until one Battery Load
all the doors have been closed.
of the following occurs: Management
The ignition must be off for delayed . The ignition is in ON/RUN. The vehicle has Electric Power
entry lighting to work. Immediately
after all the doors have been closed, . The power door locks are Management (EPM) that estimates
the delayed entry lighting feature activated. the battery's temperature and state
continues to work until one of the of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
. An illumination period of for best performance and extended
following occurs: 20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery.
. The ignition is in ON/RUN. If during the illumination period a When the battery's state of charge
. The doors are locked. door is opened, the timed is low, the voltage is raised slightly
illumination period will be canceled to quickly bring the charge back up.
. An illumination period of about
and the interior lamps will remain on When the state of charge is high,
25 seconds has elapsed.
because a door is open. the voltage is lowered slightly to
If during the illumination period a prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
door is opened, the timed has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
illumination period is canceled and display on the Driver Information
the interior lamps remain on. Center (DIC), you may see the

6-8 Lighting
voltage move up or down. This is needed. It can temporarily reduce Battery Power Protection
normal. If there is a problem, an the power demands of some
alert will be displayed. accessories. This feature helps prevent the
battery from being drained, if the
The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in interior courtesy lamps or reading
idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being lamps are accidentally left on. If any
high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the of these lamps are left on, they
This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action, automatically turn off after
(alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The
enough at idle to produce all of the driver. If so, a DIC message might lamps will not come back on again
power needed for very high be displayed, such as BATTERY until one of the following occurs:
electrical loads. SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
. The ignition is turned on.
A high electrical load occurs when VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
several of the following are on, such If one of these messages displays, it . The exterior lamps control is
as: headlamps, high beams, fog is recommended that the driver turned off, then on again.
lamps, rear window defogger, reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information The headlamps will time out after
climate control fan at high speed, 10 minutes, if they are manually
heated seats, engine cooling fans, Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑28 or Driver Information turned on while the ignition is on
trailer loads, and loads plugged into or off.
accessory power outlets. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
page 5‑23.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power whenever

Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player (Radio without
Introduction
System Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD Player (Radio with
7-21
Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Read the following pages to
Introduction MP3 (Radio with become familiar with the
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 infotainment system featured in this
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 MP3 (Radio without owner manual.
Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview (Radio with
7-3 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
{ WARNING
Rear Seat Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Taking your eyes off the road
Operation (Radio without System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 for too long or too often while
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Rear Audio using any infotainment features
Operation (Radio with Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 can cause a crash resulting in
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 injury or death. Do not give
Phone extended attention to
Radio Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
AM-FM Radio (Radio without infotainment tasks while
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Settings driving. Focus your attention
AM-FM Radio (Radio with Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52 on driving and limit glances to
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 the instrument cluster or center
Satellite Radio (Radio without Trademarks and License stack screens. Use voice
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Agreements guidance whenever possible.
Satellite Radio (Radio with Trademarks and License
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

7-2 Infotainment System
The infotainment system has built-in The vehicle has Retained Theft-Deterrent Feature
features intended to help with this Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
by disabling some functions when the audio system can be played TheftLock® is designed to
driving. A grayed-out function is not even after the ignition is turned off. discourage theft of the vehicle's
available when the vehicle is See Retained Accessory Power radio by learning a portion of the
moving. (RAP) on page 9‑18. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
All functions are available when the The vehicle has a base radio stolen or moved to a different
vehicle is parked. Before driving: included in this manual. See the vehicle.
. Become familiar with the separate infotainment manual for
infotainment system operation information on the uplevel radios,
and buttons on the faceplate. audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
. Set up the audio by presetting recognition. There is also
favorite stations, setting the information on settings and
tone, and adjusting the downloadable applications (if
speakers. equipped).
. Set up phone numbers in
advance so they can be called
easily by pressing a single
button or a single voice
command for vehicles equipped
with phone capability.
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2.

Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) 3. MENU
For information on using the radio, see Operation (Radio without

. Press to open the tone
Touchscreen) on page 7‑5 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on menu to adjust the bass,
page 7‑8. midrange, treble, fade, and
balance.
4. Buttons 1 - 6
. Saves and selects favorite
stations.
5. EQ (Equalizer)
. Press to adjust the
equalizer.
6. f (Tone/Tune)
. Press to set the bass or
treble.
. Turn to manually select
radio stations.
7. CAT (Category)
. Press to display a list of
SiriusXM® categories.
1. 4 (Information) 2. FAV (Favorites Pages) 8. H (Clock)
. Press to show information
. Press to scroll through the . Press to set the clock.
on the current station or favorite pages.
track.

9. BAND 14. \ FWD (Forward)

. Press to scroll through the . Press and hold to fast
available bands AM, FM, forward through a track.
or SiriusXM if equipped.
15. CD/AUX
10. © SEEK . Press to scroll through
. Seeks the previous selecting the CD or an
station. auxiliary device.
11. ¨ SEEK 16. Auxiliary Input Jack
. Seeks the next station.
. Use to connect external
audio devices.
12. P (Power/Volume)
17. Z EJECT
. Press to turn the
infotainment system on
. Press to eject the
or off. loaded CD.
. Turn to adjust the volume.
13. s REV (Reverse)
. Press and hold to go
backward fast through a
track.

Overview (Radio with Touchscreen) 6. D (Home Page)

The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons, touch screen, 7. SRCE (Source)
steering wheel controls, and voice recognition. See Operation (Radio 8. FAV (Favorites Menu)
without Touchscreen) on page 7‑5 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on
page 7‑8. 9. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse)
10. SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward)
11. / BACK
Operation (Radio without

Touchscreen)
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
A lock symbol displays next to the
clock display while the parental
control feature is being used. The
feature remains on until O is
pressed and held for more than
two seconds, or the driver turns the
3. CD Slot ignition off and exits the vehicle.
1. PUSH / O (Volume/Power)
4. AUX Port
2. Z (Eject)
5. PUSH/SEL (Select)

4 (Information): Press to switch To activate Auto Text: To activate SCV:

the display between the radio 1. Press MENU to display the radio 1. Set the radio volume.
station frequency and the time. setup menu.
When the ignition is in the OFF 2. Press the MENU button to
2. Press the softkey under the display the radio setup menu.
position, press 4 to display the time. AUTO TXT tab on the radio
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, 3. Press the softkey under the
display. AUTO VOLUM (automatic
or RDS features, press 4 to display
3. Press the softkey under the ON volume) tab on the radio display.
additional text information related to
tab on the radio display. 4. Press the softkey under the
the current FM-RDS or XM station;
or CD, MP3, or WMA song. If 4 is pressed and the song title or Speed Compensated Volume
If information is available during XM, artist information is longer than what setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High)
CD, MP3, or WMA playback, the can be displayed, the extra to select the level of radio
song title information displays on information will page every volume compensation. Press the
the top line of the display and artist five seconds when Auto Text is softkey located below the BACK
information displays on the bottom activated. tab on the MENU SETUP
line. When information is not display or let the display time out
available, “NO INFO” displays. Speed Compensated Volume after approximately 10 seconds.
(SCV): The Speed Compensated Each higher setting allows for
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, Volume (SCV) feature automatically more radio volume
CD, MP3, and WMA features): If adjusts the radio volume to compensation at faster vehicle
additional information is available compensate for road and wind noise speeds.
for the current song being played, as the vehicle speeds up or slows
Auto Text will automatically page/ down, so that the volume level is
scroll the information every consistent.
five seconds above the FAV presets
on the radio display.

Setting the Tone (Bass/ two seconds. A beep sounds and Adjusting the Speakers
Midrange/Treble) the level adjusts to the middle (Balance/Fade)
position.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
or Treble): To adjust bass, To quickly adjust all tone and adjust the balance or fade:
midrange, or treble: speaker controls to the middle
position, press f for more than 1. Press f until the speaker control
1. Press f until the tone control two seconds until a beep sounds. tabs display.
tabs display.
EQ (Equalization): Press to 2. Continue pressing f to highlight
2. Continue pressing f to highlight choose bass and treble equalization the tab, or press the softkey
the tab, or press the softkey settings designed for different types under the tab.
under the tab. of music. The choices are pop, rock, 3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, country, talk, jazz, and classical. do one of the following until the
do one of the following until the Selecting MANUAL or changing levels are obtained:
levels are obtained: bass or treble, returns the EQ to the
manual bass and treble settings. . Turn f clockwise or
. Turn f clockwise or Unique EQ settings can be saved counterclockwise.
counterclockwise. for each source. . Press \ FWD, or s REV.
. Press \ FWD, or s REV. If the radio has a Bose® audio To quickly adjust balance or fade to
If a station's frequency is weak or if system, the EQ settings are either the middle position, press the
there is static, decrease the treble. MANUAL or TALK. softkey under the BAL or FADE tab
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, for more than two seconds. A beep
or treble to the middle position, sounds and the level adjusts to the
press the softkey under the BASS, middle position.
MID, or TREB tab for more than

To quickly adjust all speaker and Operation (Radio with SRCE (Source): Press to change
tone controls to the middle position, the audio source to AM, FM,
Touchscreen) SiriusXM® (if equipped), CD, USB,
press f for more than two seconds
until a beep sounds. Infotainment Controls iPod®, or AUX.
FAV (Favorites Menu): In AM, FM,
Radio Messages PUSH/O (Volume/Power):
or SiriusXM, press to display or
Calibration Error: The audio . Press to turn the system on change the current favorite page
system has been calibrated for the and off. number above the preset buttons.
vehicle from the factory. Keep pressing to scroll through the
. Turn to adjust the volume.
If Calibration Error displays, it favorites pages. The stored stations
means that the radio has not been Z (Eject): Press to eject a disc for each list display on the bottom of
configured properly for the vehicle from the CD player. See CD Player the screen. The number of preset
and it must be returned to your (Radio without Touchscreen) on Favorite Pages can be changed by
dealer for service. page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio with pressing the Settings button on a
Touchscreen) on page 7‑23. Home Page, then pressing
Locked: This message displays
when the TheftLock® system has AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Favorites Pages, and then selecting
locked up the radio. Take the connection for external audio the number of Favorite Pages.
vehicle to your dealer for service. devices. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse):
If any error occurs repeatedly or if PUSH/SEL (Select): 1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped):
an error cannot be corrected, . Turn to manually find a station or Press to seek to the previous
contact your dealer. highlight a menu selection. strong station. Press and hold
for Scan. Press © again to stop
. Press to select a highlighted
selection. the scan.
D (Home Page): Press to go to 2. CD, USB: Press to seek to the

the Home Page. See “Home Page” beginning of the current or
in this section. previous track.

3. CD, USB: Press and hold to / BACK: Press to return to the Back: Press to go back to the
quickly reverse through a track. previous screen in a menu. previous page or menu.
Release the button to return to Home: From any page, press to
playing speed. See CD Player Touchscreen Buttons
cycle through the Home Pages to
(Radio without Touchscreen) on Touchscreen buttons show visibly start a different application. The
page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio on the screen when available. When Home Page can have up to three
with Touchscreen) on page 7‑23 a function is unavailable, the button pages with eight icons per page .
and Auxiliary Devices on may gray-out. When a function is Each of these three pages can be
page 7‑34. selected, the button may highlight, customized to contain your choice
SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward): or animate. of up to eight per screen. They may
also be re-ordered on each screen
1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped): Home Page to taste.
Press to seek to the next strong
station. Press and hold for Scan. FAV (Favorites): Press to display
the favorite list or add a favorite.
Press ¨ again to stop the scan.
2. CD, USB: Press to seek or skip
g (Voice Recognition): Press to
begin voice recognition. See
the next track or program. Bluetooth on page 7‑45.
3. CD, USB: Press and hold to fast Menu: Press to enter the Home
forward through a track. Release Page menu.
the button to return to playing
speed. See CD Player (Radio More r : Press to go to the next
without Touchscreen) on The infotainment system displays a Home Page.
page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio Home Page to access all of the
with Touchscreen) on page 7‑23 applications. The current selected
and Auxiliary Devices on source is framed with a red box
page 7‑34. outline.

Home Page Features Tone : Press to display the Tone

. Fade: Press F for more sound
Settings menu. The following may from the front speakers or R for
Some features are disabled when more sound from the rear
display:
the vehicle is moving and some speakers. The middle position
icons may not be active. Tone Settings: Press to adjust the balances the sound between the
tone settings. The following may front and rear speakers.
Now Playing: Press to display the
display:
active source page. The sources
DSP Mode: Press o or p to adjust
available are AM, FM, XM (if . EQ: Press o or p to adjust the the DSP mode (if equipped).
equipped), CD, USB, Bluetooth, equalizer.
or AUX Input. Language
. Bass: Press + or − to adjust
} (Navigation):
®
Press to display the bass. To change the language of the
the OnStar Turn-by-Turn screens. See Vehicle
Navigation. See OnStar Overview
. Middle: Press + or − to adjust
the middle. Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 14‑1. on page 5‑41.
5 (Phone): Press to display the
. Treble: Press + or − to adjust the
treble. English or Metric Units
Phone main page. See Bluetooth on
page 7‑45. . Balance: Press L to hear more To change the screens from English
sound from the left speakers or or metric. See Driver Information
Settings: Press to display the Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
Settings menu. See Settings on R for more sound from the right
speakers. The middle position on page 5‑28 or Driver Information
page 7‑52. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
balances the sound between the
left and right speakers. page 5‑23.

Radio © SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go tabs and by using the radio favorites
to the previous or next station and page button (FAV button). Press to
stay there. go through up to six pages of
AM-FM Radio (Radio favorites, each having six favorite
without Touchscreen) To scan stations, press and hold © stations available per page. Each
or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio page of favorites can contain any
Radio Data System (RDS) combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
goes to a station, plays for a few
The Radio Data System (RDS) seconds, then goes to the next stations.
feature is available for use only on station. Press either arrow again to The balance/fade and tone settings
FM stations that broadcast RDS stop scanning. that were previously adjusted are
information. This system relies upon stored with the favorite stations.
The radio only seeks and scans
receiving specific information from
stations with a strong signal that are To store a station as a favorite:
these stations and only works when
in the selected band.
the information is available. While 1. Tune to the desired radio station.
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS Storing a Radio Station as a
station, the station name or call 2. Press FAV to display the page to
Favorite store the station.
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect Drivers are encouraged to set up 3. Press and hold one of the
information that causes the radio their radio station favorites while the six softkeys until a beep sounds.
features to work improperly. If this vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to When that softkey is pressed
happens, contact the radio station. favorite stations using the presets, and released, the station that
favorites button, and steering wheel was set returns.
Finding a Station controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5‑2. 4. Repeat the steps for each radio
BAND: Press to switch between station to be stored as a favorite.
AM, FM, or SiriusXM®. The FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
selection displays. 36 stations can be programmed as
f (Tune): Turn to select radio favorites using the six softkeys
stations. below the radio station frequency

To set up the number of favorites

. Turn to increase or decrease the To adjust the settings:
pages: volume of the active source. . Bass: Press + or − to change
1. Press MENU to display the radio The steering wheel controls can the level.
setup menu. also be used to adjust the volume.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
. Middle: Press + or − to change
2. Press the softkey below the page 5‑2. the level.
FAV 1-6 tab. . Treble: Press + or − to change
Audio Source
3. Select the desired number of the level.
favorites pages by pressing the To access AM, FM, or SiriusXM® if
softkey below the displayed equipped, do one of the following:
. EQ: Press o or p to scroll
page numbers. through the preset EQ options.
. Press the AM, FM, or XM (if
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time equipped) screen button. . DSP Mode: Press o or p to
out, to return to the original main . Press the SRCE radio button to scroll through the preset DSP
radio screen showing the radio scroll through the options. modes.
station frequency tabs and to A source ribbon will appear at . Fade: Press the F or R button
begin the process of the bottom of the screen for more sound from the front or
programming favorites for the allowing you to select the one rear speakers. The middle
chosen number of favorites you want. position balances the sound
pages.
between the front and rear
Infotainment System Settings speakers.
AM-FM Radio (Radio with Tone Settings . Balance: Press the L or R button
Touchscreen) To access the tone settings, press for more sound from the left or
Playing the Radio the Tone Settings button on the right speakers. The middle
Home Page. position balances the sound
PUSH/O (Power/Volume): between the left and right
speakers.
. Press to turn the radio on or off.

Finding a Station To access the AM menu press the HD On/Off: Press to turn the HD
Menu screen button and the Radio receiver on or off. This
Press SRCE to select AM, FM,
following may display: feature is not available in SiriusXM if
SiriusXM (if equipped).
equipped.
Turn the PUSH/SEL knob to find a
radio station. To select a preset FM
station, press FAV to scroll through
the favorite pages and then press a
preset button on the radio or the
screen button.
Seeking a Station
Press © SEEK or SEEK ¨ to search
for a station. You may also use the
¨ on the steering wheel Favorites List: Press to display the
control (SWC). AM favorites list.
To access the FM Menu press the
AM Station List: Press to display a Menu screen button and the
AM
list of AM stations. following may display:
Update Station List: Press to
display the list of AM stations. Press
refresh to update the list.
Tag Song: Press to tag a song to
download to an iPod when it is
connected to be purchased at a
later time.

Favorites List: Press to display the To access the XM Menu press the
. Song: Press to set an audio alert
FM favorites list. Menu screen button and the when the current song is playing
following may display: on a SiriusXM channel.
FM Station List: Press to display a
list of FM stations.
. Tune Select Manager: Press
Disable/Enable All Alerts to
FM Category List: Press to display enable or disable all alerts.
a list of FM categories. A checkmark next to the alert
Update Station List: Press to means it is turned on. Press an
display the list of FM stations. Press alert to turn it off. Press Delete
refresh to update the list. to delete an alert.
Tag Song: Press to tag a song to . Audible Alert: This feature will
download to an iPod when it is give an audio alert when certain
connected to be purchased at a artists or songs are available on
later time. Favorites List: Press to display the a specific station. Press to turn
SiriusXM favorites list. on or off.
HD On/Off: Press to turn the HD
Radio receiver on or off. XM Channel List: Press to display Storing Radio Station Presets
SiriusXM (If Equipped) a list of SiriusXM channels. Up to 30 preset stations can be
XM Category List: Press to display stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if
a list of SiriusXM categories. equipped) can be mixed.
Tune Select: If equipped with 1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM
SiriusXM, press and the following main page, press and hold any
may display: 1−5 buttons or one of the preset
screen buttons at the bottom of
. Artist: Press to set an audio alert
the screen. After a few seconds,
when the current artist is playing
on a SiriusXM channel.

a beep is heard and the new Recalling a Preset Station A service fee is required to receive
preset information displays on To recall a preset station from a the SiriusXM service. If SiriusXM
that screen button. favorites page, do one the following: Service needs to be reactivated, the
2. Repeat for each preset. radio will display “No Subscription
. Press the FAV screen button at Please Renew” on channel XM1.
Mixed-Band Presets the top bar to display the preset For more information, contact
pop-up. Press one of the preset SiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or
Each favorite page can store screen buttons to go to the 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
five preset stations. The presets selected preset station. www.xmradio.ca or call
within a page can be from different
. In the AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
radio bands.
equipped) main page, press one Finding a Station
To scroll through the pages, press of the preset screen buttons to
FAV or the FAV screen button on the go to the selected preset station. BAND: Press to switch between
top bar. The current page number AM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selection
displays above the preset buttons. displays.
The stored stations for each favorite
Satellite Radio (Radio
page display on the preset buttons. without Touchscreen) f (Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.
To change the number of favorite SiriusXM® Satellite Radio © SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go
pages displayed: Service to the previous or next station and
1. Press Settings on the SiriusXM is a satellite radio service stay there.
Home Page. based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces. To scan stations, press and hold ©
2. Press Favorite Pages.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio
3. Select the number of pages to variety of programming and goes to a station, plays for a few
display. commercial-free music, coast to seconds, then goes to the next
coast, and in digital-quality sound. station. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans 5. To go to the next or previous 4. Press the softkey under the
stations with a strong signal that are SiriusXM station within the Remove tab until the category
in the selected band. selected category, do one of the name along with the word
following: Removed displays.
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station . Turn f. 5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is . Press the buttons below the
used to find SiriusXM stations when right or left arrows on the Removed categories can be
the radio is in the XM mode. To find display. restored by pressing the softkey
SiriusXM channels within a desired under the Add tab when a removed
. Press either SEEK arrow. category is displayed or by pressing
category:
6. To exit the category search the softkey under the Restore
1. Press BAND until the SiriusXM mode, press the FAV button or All tab.
frequency displays. BAND button to display the Categories cannot be removed or
2. Press CAT to display the favorites again. added while the vehicle is moving
category tabs. Undesired SiriusXM categories can faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
3. Continue pressing CAT until the be removed through the setup
Storing a Radio Station as a
desired category name displays. menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following: Favorite
. Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the 1. Press MENU to display the radio Drivers are encouraged to set up
setup menu. their radio station favorites while the
category list by pressing s vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
REV or \ FWD. 2. Press the softkey below the XM favorite stations using the presets,
CAT tab. favorites button, and steering wheel
4. Press either of the two buttons
controls. See Steering Wheel
below the desired category tab 3. Turn f to display the category to
to immediately tune to the first Controls on page 5‑2.
be removed.
SiriusXM station associated with
that category.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To set up the number of favorites XM Updating: The encryption code
36 stations can be programmed as pages: in the receiver is being updated, and
favorites using the six softkeys 1. Press MENU to display the radio no action is required. This process
below the radio station frequency setup menu. should take no longer than
tabs and by using the radio favorites 30 seconds.
page button (FAV button). Press to 2. Press the softkey below the
FAV 1-6 tab. No XM Signal: The system is
go through up to six pages of functioning correctly, but the vehicle
favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of is in a location that is blocking the
stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is
page of favorites can contain any softkey below the displayed moved into an open area, the signal
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM page numbers. should return.
stations.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time Loading XM: The audio system is
The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main acquiring and processing audio and
that were previously adjusted are radio screen showing the radio text data. No action is needed. This
stored with the favorite stations. station frequency tabs and to message should disappear shortly.
To store a station as a favorite: begin the process of
programming favorites for the Channel Off Air: This channel is
1. Tune to the desired radio station. chosen number of favorites not currently in service. Tune in to
2. Press FAV to display the page to pages. another channel.
store the station. Channel Unauth: This channel is
SiriusXM Radio Messages blocked or cannot be received with
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds. XL (Explicit Language your SiriusXM subscription package.
When that softkey is pressed Channels): These channels, or any Channel Unavail: This previously
and released, the station that others, can be blocked at a assigned channel is no longer
was set returns. customer's request, by calling assigned. Tune to another station.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
4. Repeat the steps for each radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
station to be stored as a favorite.

If this station was one of the 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and Check XM Receivr: If this
presets, choose another station for www.xmradio.ca or call message does not clear within a
that preset button. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). short period of time, the receiver
No Artist Info: No artist CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with your
information is available at this time channels available for the selected dealer.
on this channel. The system is category. The system is working XM Not Available: If this message
working properly. properly. does not clear within a short period
No Title Info: No song title XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver of time, the receiver could have a
information is available at this time in the vehicle could have previously fault. Consult with your dealer.
on this channel. The system is been in another vehicle. For security
working properly. purposes, XM receivers cannot be Satellite Radio (Radio
No CAT Info: No category swapped between vehicles. If this with Touchscreen)
information is available at this time message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with Satellite Radio
on this channel. The system is
working properly. your dealer. Vehicles with a valid SiriusXM®
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, satellite radio subscription can
No Information: No text or receive SiriusXM programming.
informational messages are this message alternates with the XM
available at this time on this Radio eight-digit radio ID label. This SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
channel. The system is working label is needed to activate the variety of programming and
properly. service. commercial-free music, coast to
Unknown: If this message is coast, and in digital-quality sound.
No Subscription Please Renew: For more information, see
SiriusXM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault. www.siriusxm.com or call
reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) and
www.siriusxm.com or Consult with your dealer.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

When SiriusXM is active, the station 3. Select or deselect a category. No Title Info: No song title
name, number, category name, A checkmark will indicate that information is available at this time
song title, and artist display on the the category is selected. on this station.
screen. SiriusXM may update the No CAT Info: No category
background picture at any time. SiriusXM Messages
information is available at this time
XL (Explicit Language on this station.
SiriusXM Categories Channels): These stations, or any
SiriusXM stations are organized in others, can be blocked by request, No Information: No text or
categories. by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), informational messages are
and 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). available at this time on this station.
Adding or Removing SiriusXM
XM Updating: The encryption code No XM Signal: The vehicle may be
Categories in a location where the SiriusXM
in the receiver is being updated. No
Using the home page: action is required. signal is being blocked. When the
1. Press the Settings screen button vehicle is moved into an open area,
Loading XM: The audio system is the signal should return.
on the Home Page. acquiring and processing audio and
2. Select XM Categories. text data. No action is needed. CAT Not Found: There are no
stations available for the selected
3. Select or deselect a category. Channel Off Air: This station is not category.
A checkmark will indicate that currently in service.
the category is selected. XM Radio ID: If tuned to station 0,
Channel Unauth: This station is this message alternates with the
Press “Show All XM Categories” to blocked or cannot be received. SiriusXM radio eight-digit radio ID
restore all SiriusXM categories. Channel Unavailable: This label. This label is needed to
Using the XM playing screen: previously assigned station is no activate the service.
longer assigned. Unknown: If this message is
1. Press the Menu screen button.
No Artist Info: No artist received when tuned to station 0,
2. Select XM Categories. information is available at this time there could be a receiver fault.
on this station. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this message AM Cell Phone Usage

does not clear within a short period
The range for most AM stations is Cell phone usage, such as making
of time, the receiver could have a
greater than for FM, especially at or receiving phone calls, charging,
fault. Consult with your dealer.
night. The longer range can cause or just having the phone on may
station frequencies to interfere with cause static interference in the
Radio Reception each other. Static can also occur radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
Frequency interference and static when things like storms and power if this happens.
can occur during normal radio lines interfere with radio reception.
reception if items such as phone When this happens, try reducing the Multi-Band Antenna
chargers, vehicle convenience treble on the radio.
The multi-band antenna is located
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio on the roof of the vehicle. This type
Service of antenna is used with the AM/FM
accessory power outlet. If there is
radio, as well as OnStar and the
interference or static, unplug the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
item from the accessory power provides digital radio reception. Tall System, if the vehicle has these
outlet. buildings or hills can interfere with features. Keep this antenna clear of
satellite radio signals, causing the snow and ice build up for clear radio
FM sound to fade in and out. In reception. If the vehicle has a
FM signals only reach about 16 to addition, traveling or standing under sunroof, the performance of the
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the heavy foliage, bridges, garages, radio system may be affected if the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit or tunnels may cause loss of the sunroof is open. Loading items onto
that automatically works to reduce SiriusXM signal for a period of time. the roof of the vehicle can interfere
interference, some static can occur, with the performance of the radio
especially around tall buildings or system and, if the vehicle has this
hills, causing the sound to fade in feature, OnStar. Make sure the
and out. multi-band antenna is not
obstructed.

Audio Players 10 seconds on the CD have played. BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD
Press ¨ SEEK to go to the next
track. remains inside the radio for future
CD Player (Radio without listening.
Touchscreen) If either arrow is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
Playing a CD moving backward or forward select between CD, or Auxiliary.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, through the tracks on the CD. . When a CD is in the player, the
label side up. The player pulls it in s REV (Fast Reverse): Press CD icon and a message
and the CD should begin playing. and hold to reverse playback quickly showing the disc and/or track
within a track. Sound will be heard number display.
Z EJECT: Press and release to
at a reduced volume. Release to
eject the disc that is currently
. If an auxiliary input device is not
playing. A beep sounds and resume playing the track. The connected, “No Input Device
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the elapsed time of the track displays. Found” displays.
disc is ejected, Remove Disc \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Care of CDs
displays. The disc can be removed. and hold to advance playback
If the disc is not removed, after quickly within a track. Sound will be If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
several seconds, the disc heard at a reduced volume. Release can be reduced due to CD-R or
automatically pulls back into the to resume playing the track. The CD-RW quality, the method of
player. elapsed time of the track displays. recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): CD tracks can be way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
the CD that is currently playing. listened to in random, rather than handled. Handle them carefully.
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press © sequential order with the random Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
SEEK to go to the start of the setting. To use random, press the original cases or other protective
current track, if more than softkey under the RDM label until cases and away from direct sunlight
Random Current Disc displays. and dust. The CD player scans the
Press the softkey again to turn off bottom surface of the disc. If the
random play.

surface of a CD is damaged, such Notice: If a label is added to a CD Messages

as cracked, broken, or scratched, CD, more than one CD is inserted
Check Disc: Radios with a single
the CD does not play properly or not into the slot at a time, or an
CD player display Check Disc and/
at all. Do not touch the bottom side attempt is made to play scratched
or eject the CD if an error occurs.
of a CD while handling it; this could or damaged CDs, the CD player
damage the surface. Pick up CDs could be damaged. While using Optical Error: The disc was
by grasping the outer edges or the the CD player, use only CDs in inserted upside down.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. good condition without any label, Disk Read Error: A disc was
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take load one CD at a time, and keep inserted with an invalid or unknown
a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen a the CD player and the loading slot format.
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris. Player Error: There are disc LOAD
detergent solution mixed with water, or disc EJECT problems.
and clean it. Make sure the wiping If an error displays, see “CD
process starts from the center to Messages” later in this section. . It is very hot. When the
the edge. temperature returns to normal,
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or the CD should play.
Care of the CD Player CD-RW Disc . The road is very rough. When
Do not add any label to a CD; it The radio has the capability of the road becomes smoother, the
could get caught in the CD player. playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD should play.
If a CD is recorded on a personal CD-RW disc. For more information .
computer and a description label is The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
needed, try labeling the top of the or upside down.
or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio
recorded CD with a marking pen. with Touchscreen) on page 7‑24 or . The air is very humid. If so, wait
The use of CD lens cleaners for MP3 (Radio without Touchscreen) about an hour and try again.
CDs is not advised. on page 7‑28. . There was a problem while
burning the CD.


. The label is caught in the CD . MP3 or unprotected WMA . Use a marking pen to label the
player. formats top of the disc.
If the CD is not playing correctly for When playing any compatible Loading and Ejecting Discs
any other reason, try a known recordable disc, the sound quality
good CD. can be reduced due to disc quality, To load a disc:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if the method of recording, the quality 1. Turn the vehicle on.
an error cannot be corrected, of the music that has been
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label
contact your dealer. If the radio recorded, or the way the disc has
side up. The player pulls it in the
displays an error message, write it been handled.
rest of the way. If the disc is
down and provide it to your dealer There can be increased skipping, damaged or improperly loaded,
when reporting the problem. difficulty in recording tracks, there is an error and the disc
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or ejects.
CD Player (Radio with difficulty in loading and ejecting.
The disc automatically plays once
If these problems occur, check the
Touchscreen) disc for damage or try a known
loaded.
The player can be used for CD, good disc. Press Z to eject a disc from the
MP3 audio, and Video. CD player. If the disc is not removed
To avoid damage to the CD player:
With the vehicle on, insert a disc .
within a short period of time, it is
Do not use scratched or automatically pulled back into the
into the slot, label side up. The
damaged discs. player.
player pulls it in and begins playing.
. Do not apply labels to discs. The
The system is capable of playing: Playing an Audio CD
labels could get caught in the
. Most audio CDs player. 1. Press the Disc screen button on
. CD-R . Insert only one disc at a time. the Home Page or select
the disc.
. CD-RW . Keep the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.


. The air is very humid. Try the
2. From the Discscreen, press the SEEK ¨:
Menu screen button to display disc again later.
the menu options.
. Press to seek to the next track. . There was a problem while
3. Press to select the desired
. Press and hold to fast forward burning the disc.
option. through a track. Release the . The label is caught in the player.
button to return to playing
On the Disc main page a track speed. Elapsed time displays. If the CD is not playing correctly, for
number displays at the beginning of any other reason, try a known
each track. Song, Artist, elapsed PUSH/SEL (Select): Turn to the
good CD.
time, and Album information right or left to select the next or
displays when available. previous track. If any error continues, contact your
dealer.
Use the following controls to play Error Messages
the disc: If Disc Error displays and/or the disc MP3 (Radio with
© SEEK: comes out, it could be for one of the Touchscreen)
following reasons:
. Press to seek to the beginning of
the current or previous track. . The disc has an invalid or Playing an MP3 CD
If the track has been playing for unknown format. To play an MP3 CD, follow the same
less than eight seconds, it seeks . The disc is very hot. Try the disc instructions as “Playing an
to the previous track. If longer again when the temperature Audio CD.”
than eight seconds, the current returns to normal. The following guidelines must be
track starts from the beginning. met when creating an MP3 disc,
. The road is very rough. Try the
. Press and hold to fast reverse disc again when the road is otherwise the CD might not play:
through a track. Release the smoother. . Sampling rate: 16 kHz,
button to return to playing 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
speed. Elapsed time displays. . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.


. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24, MP3 Audio Press any of the following buttons
32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, on the CD Audio Menu:
128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
and 320 kbps. Folders: Press to view the folders
stored on the disc. Select a folder to
. Maximum number of folders: view the list of all songs in that
eight folders with 255 files per folder. There might be a delay
folder. before the list displays. Select a
. Maximum of 1,000 files on song from the list to begin playback.
a disc. Playlists: Press to view the
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW playlists stored on the disc. Select a
with a maximum capacity of Press the Menu screen button while playlist to view the list of all songs in
700 MB. that source is active to access the that playlist. There might be a delay
CD Audio Menu. before the list displays. Select a
. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/ song from the list to begin playback.
Genre information requires a CD
to be fully scanned before the Artists: Press to view the list of
music navigator works with artists stored on the disc. Select an
these menus. artist name to view a list of all songs
by the artist. There might be a delay
before the list displays. Select a
song from the list to begin playback.
Genres: Press to view the genres.
Select a genre to view a list of all
songs of that genre. Select a song
from the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albums Empty Folders Preprogrammed Playlists

on the disc. Select the album to If a root directory or folder is empty The radio recognizes
view a list of all songs on the album. or contains only folders, the player preprogrammed playlists; however,
There might be a delay before the advances to the next folder in the there is no editing capability. These
list displays. Select a song from the file structure that contains a playlists are treated as special
list to begin playback. compressed audio file. The empty folders containing compressed
Composers: Press to view the folder(s) are not displayed or audio song files.
Composers stored on the disc. numbered.
There might be a delay before the Music Navigator
list displays. The Composers menu No Folder
Folders
displays. Select a composer to When the CD only contains
display a list of albums from the compressed audio files without any
composer. folders or playlists, all files are
Tracks (Song Titles): Press to under the root folder.
display a list of all songs on the File System and Naming
disc. Songs are displayed as stored
The song titles, artists, albums, and
on the disc. There might be a delay
genres are taken from the file's ID3
before the list displays. To begin
tag and are only displayed if present
playback, select a song from the list.
in the tag. If a song title is not
Root Directory present in the ID3 tag, the radio The folder structure can support up
The root directory is treated as a displays the file name as the to five levels of depth. The folders
folder. All files contained directly track name. and then songs will display in
under the root directory are alphabetical order.
accessed prior to any root directory
folders.

Press the Playlist screen button Press the Artist screen button
displayed on the Root Folder menu. displayed on the Root Folder menu.
The Playlist menu displays. The Artist menu displays.
Press one of the options from the

Root Folder to display other folders
of that option type. Keep pressing to
display each screen until all levels
have been reached. The last level Select one of the options listed on Select an artist from the Artist menu
usually contains the desired song the Playlist menu. A list displaying to display a list of albums.
to play. the song titles, then Artists
associated with the titles appear. Albums
Playlists
Artists

Select an album from the Albums Composers Select the Album to display a list of
menu to display a list of songs. songs. Select the desired song for
Select a song for playback. playback.
Genres
MP3 (Radio without
Press the Genre screen button
displayed on the Root Folder menu.
Touchscreen)
The Genre menu displays. Format
Follow the same instructions as Radios that have the capability of
given for Artist. Each menu playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma
selection will eventually lead to the files that were recorded onto a
Press the Composers screen button
song for playback. CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
Tracks The Composers menu displays. be recorded with the following fixed
Select a composer to display a list bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
of Albums from the composer. 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Radios that have a USB port can
play .mp3 and .wma files stored on a
USB storage device as well as AAC
files that are stored on an iPod.
Press the Song Titles screen button

The Song Titles menu displays.
Select the desired song for
playback.

Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode USB Supported File and Folder If a disc contains both
Discs Structure uncompressed CD audio and MP3/
The radio can play discs that The radio supports: WMA files, a folder under the root
contain both uncompressed CD directory called CD accesses all of
. Up to 700 folders.
audio and MP3/WMA files. If both the CD audio tracks on the disc.
formats are on the disc, the radio . Up to eight folders in depth. Empty Folder
plays both file formats in the order in . Up to 65,535 files.
which they were recorded to Folders that do not contain files are
the disc.
. Folder and file names up to skipped, and the player advances to
64 bytes. the next folder that contains files.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
and Folder Structure
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file Order of Play
extension. Compressed audio files are
The radio supports: . AAC files stored on an iPod. accessed in the following order:
. Up to 50 folders. . FAT16 . Playlists (Px).
. Up to eight folders in depth. .
. FAT32 Files stored in the root directory.
. Up to 15 playlists.
Root Directory . Files stored in folders in the root
. Up to 512 files and folders. directory.
The root directory of the disc is
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl treated as a folder. If the root Tracks are played in the following
extension. directory has compressed audio order:
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda files, the directory displays on the . Play begins from the first track in
file extension. radio as the CD label. the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last

track of the last playlist has Track names longer than 32 ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
played, play continues from the characters or four pages are track. Press and hold or press
first track of the first playlist. shortened. Parts of words on the multiple times to continue moving
. Play begins from the first track in last page of text and the extension forward through tracks.
of the filename do not display.
the first folder and continues s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed Playlists to reverse playback quickly. Sound
each folder. When the last track is heard at a reduced volume and
of the last folder has played, Preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, the elapsed time of the file displays.
play continues from the first
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ Release s REV to resume playing.
track of the first folder.
software can be accessed; however, \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
When play enters a new folder, the they cannot be edited using the and hold to advance playback
display does not automatically show radio. These playlists are treated as quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
the new folder name unless the special folders containing volume and the elapsed time of the
folder mode has been chosen as compressed audio song files.
the default display. The new track file displays. Release \ FWD to
name displays. Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls resume playing. The elapsed time of
file extension and are stored on a the file displays.
File System and Naming USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port. S c (Previous Folder): Press
The song name that displays is the
the softkey below S c to go to the
song name contained in the ID3 tag. Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
If the song name is not present in first track in the previous folder.
the ID3 tag, the radio displays the f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA c T (Next Folder): Press the
files.
file name without the extension softkey below c T to go to the first
(such as .mp3) as the track name. © SEEK: Press to go to the start of track in the next folder.
the track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press and hold or RDM (Random): Files on the disc
press multiple times to continue can be listened to in random, rather
moving backward through tracks. than sequential order. To use

random, press the softkey under the Continue pressing either softkey Connecting a USB Storage
RDM tab until Random Current Disc below the arrow tab until the artist Device or iPod®
displays to play songs in random displays.
order. Press the same softkey again To change from playback by artist to
to turn off random play. playback by album:
h (Music Navigator): Press the 1. Press the softkey below the Sort
softkey below h to play files in By tab.
order by artist or album.
2. Press one of the softkeys below
The player scans the disc to sort the the Album tab from the sort
files by artist and album ID3 tag screen.
information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending 3. Press the softkey below the
on the number of files on the disc. Back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen.
The radio may begin playing while it
is scanning in the background. The album name displays on the
second line between the arrows and To connect a USB storage device,
When the scan is finished, the disc connect the device to the USB port
begins playing files in order by songs from the current album
begins to play. Once all songs from located in the instrument panel
artist. The current artist playing is storage area. See Instrument Panel
shown on the second line of the that album have played, the player
moves to the next album in Storage on page 4‑1 for more
display. Once all songs by that artist information.
alphabetical order on the CD and
are played, the player moves to the
begins playing MP3 files from that The USB port can be used to
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist. album. control an iPod or a USB storage
To exit music navigator mode, press device.
To listen to files by another artist,
the softkey below the Back tab to To connect an iPod, connect one
press the softkey below either arrow
return to normal MP3 playback. end of the USB cable that came
tab. The disc goes to the next or
previous artist in alphabetical order. with the iPod to the iPod’s dock

connector and connect the other Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
end to the USB port located in the USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback
instrument panel storage area. If the quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
vehicle is on and the USB The radio can control a USB
storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to
connection works, “OK to
radio buttons and knobs and display resume playing. The elapsed time of
disconnect” and a GM logo may
song information on the radio’s the file displays.
appear on the iPod, and iPod
appears on the radio's display. The display. 4 (Information): Press to display
iPod music appears on the radio’s f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the
display and begins playing. selected track.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
The iPod charges while it is the track, if more than 10 seconds Using Softkeys to Control a
connected to the vehicle if the have played. Press and hold or USB Storage Device or iPod
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY press multiple times to continue
or ON/RUN position. When the moving backward through tracks. The five softkeys below the radio
vehicle is turned off, the iPod display are used to control the
automatically powers off and will not
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next functions listed below.
track. Press and hold or press
charge or draw power from the To use the softkeys:
multiple times to continue moving
vehicle's battery.
forward through tracks. 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
If you have an older iPod model that below the radio display to
is not supported, it can still be used
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound display the functions listed
by connecting it to the Auxiliary below, or press the softkey
is heard at a reduced volume.
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm below the function if it is
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See Clock Release s REV to resume playing. currently displayed.
(Radio with Touchscreen) on The elapsed time of the file
page 5‑8 or Clock (Radio without displays. 2. Press the softkey below the tab
Touchscreen) on page 5‑7 for more with the function on it to use that
information. function.


. Genres
j (Pause): Press the softkey 5. Press f to select the file to be
below j to pause the track. The tab played. . Songs
appears raised when pause is being To skip through large lists, the five . Composers
used. Press the softkey below j softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files:
again to resume playback. the following order:
Back: Press the softkey below the . First softkey, first item in the list.
1. Press the softkey below h.
Back tab to go back to the main . Second softkey, 1% through the 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
display screen on an iPod, or the list each time the softkey is of menus.
root directory on a USB storage pressed.
device. 3. Press f to select the menu.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
c (Folder View): Press the each time the softkey is pressed. 4. Turn f to scroll through the
softkey below c to view the folders or files in the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
contents of the current folder on the selected menu.
list each time the softkey is
USB drive. To browse and select
files:
pressed. 5. Press f to select the file to be
. Fifth softkey, end of the list. played.
1. Press the softkey below c.
h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the five
2. Turn f to scroll through the list softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in
of folders. the following order:
select a file on an iPod, using the
iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list.
3. Press f to select the folder.
sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the
If there is more than one folder,
repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the . Playlists list each time the softkey is
folder is reached. pressed.
. Artists
4. Turn f to scroll through the files
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
. Albums
each time the softkey is pressed.
in the selected folder.


. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
Shuffle Functionality Auxiliary Devices
pressed. To use Shuffle: The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
Press the softkey below >, 2, (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack on the
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
C , or = to select between faceplate. For vehicles with a USB
Repeat Functionality Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ port, it is in the instrument panel
To use Repeat: Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, storage area.
or Shuffle Folder. Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
Press the softkey below " or '
to select between Repeat All and > (Shuffle Off): This is the Auxiliary Input Jack
Repeat Track. default mode when a USB storage This is not an audio output; do not
device or iPod is first connected. plug a headphone set into the front
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey
below " to repeat all tracks. The
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle auxiliary input jack. Connect an
Songs): Shuffles all songs on the auxiliary input device such as an
tab appears lowered when Repeat USB storage device or iPod. iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
All is being used. This is the default CD player, or cassette tape player
mode when a USB storage device C (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all
to the auxiliary input jack for use as
or iPod is first connected. songs in the current album on
another source for audio listening.
an iPod.
' (Repeat Track): Press the Drivers are encouraged to set up
softkey below ' to repeat one = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all
any auxiliary device while the
songs in the current folder on a USB
track. The tab appears raised when vehicle is in P (Park). See
storage device.
Repeat Track is being used. Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for
more information on driver
distraction.

To use an auxiliary input device, USB Supported Devices Rear Seat

connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to . USB Flash Drives
the radio's front auxiliary input jack. Infotainment
. Portable USB Hard Drives
Press CD/AUX or SRCE to select
the device. . Fifth generation or later iPod Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Using the USB Port
. iPod nano ® System
For vehicles with a USB port, the
. iPod touch® The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
® Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
connector is in the instrument panel . iPod classic The RSE system works with the
storage area. See Instrument Panel
Not all iPods and USB drives are vehicle's audio system. The DVD
Storage on page 4‑1.
compatible with the USB port. player is part of the front radio. The
Radios with a USB port can control RSE system includes a radio with a
Make sure the iPod has the latest
a USB storage device or an iPod DVD player, a video display screen,
firmware from Apple® for proper
using the radio buttons and knobs. audio/video jacks, two wireless
operation. iPod firmware can be
See MP3 (Radio with Touchscreen) headphones, and a remote control.
updated using the latest iTunes®
on page 7‑24 or MP3 (Radio without See Operation (Radio without
application. See www.apple.com/
Touchscreen) on page 7‑28 for Touchscreen) on page 7‑5 or
itunes.
information about how to connect Operation (Radio with Touchscreen)
and control a USB storage device or For help identifying your iPod, go to on page 7‑8 for more information on
an iPod. www.apple.com/support. the vehicle's infotainment system.
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather Headphones CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As,

conditions, the RSE system might or radio, any auxiliary source
might not work until the temperature connected to A/V jacks, or the
is within the operating range. The auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle
operating range for the RSE system has this feature. The wireless
is above −20°C (−4°F) or below headphones have a power button,
60°C (140°F). If the temperature of channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume
the vehicle is outside of this range, control. Switch the headphones off
heat or cool the vehicle until the when not in use.
temperature is within the operating Push the power button to turn on
range of the RSE system. the headphones. An indicator light
Parental Control located on the headphones comes
on. If the light does not come on,
The RSE system may have a the batteries might need to be
Parental Control feature, depending A. Battery cover replaced. Intermittent sound or static
on the radio. To enable Parental on the headphones can also be an
Control, press and hold the radio B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
indication of weak batteries. See
power button for more than C. Power button “Battery Replacement” later in this
two seconds to stop all system section for more information.
features such as: radio, video D. Volume control
screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While E. Power indicator light To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume control
Parental Control is on, Q displays. The RSE includes two 2-channel located on the right side.
When the radio is turned back on, wireless headphones that are
dedicated to this system. Channel 1 Infrared transmitters are located at
Parental Control is unlocked.
is dedicated to the video screen, the rear of the RSE overhead
while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA console. The headphones shut off
selections. These headphones are automatically to save the battery
used to listen to media such as power if the RSE system and RSA

are shut off or if the headphones are If the foam ear pads attached to the If the headphones are to be stored
out of range of the transmitters for headphones become worn or for a long period of time, remove the
more than three minutes. Moving too damaged, the pads can be replaced batteries and keep them in a cool,
far forward or stepping out of the separately from the headphone set. dry place.
vehicle, can cause the headphones To purchase replacement ear pads,
to lose the audio signal. call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
For optimal audio performance, the zero (0), or contact your dealer.
headphones must be worn correctly. Headphones should be stored in the
Headphones should be worn with front floor console and not in the
the headband over the top of the front seat back pocket. Headphone
head for best audio reception. The damage can occur when the second
symbol L (Left) appears on the row seats are folded forward.
outside bottom edge of the ear cup
and should be positioned on the left Battery Replacement
ear. The symbol R (Right) appears To change the batteries on the
on the outside bottom edge of the headphones:
ear cup and should be positioned on 1. Turn the screw to loosen the
the right ear. battery door located on the left
Notice: Do not store the side of the headphones. Slide A. Yellow: Video Input
headphones in heat or direct the battery door open.
sunlight. This could damage the B. White: Left Audio Input
2. Replace the two batteries in the
headphones and repairs will not compartment. Make sure that C. Red: Right Audio Input
be covered by the warranty. they are installed correctly, using The A/V jacks are color coded to
Storage in extreme cold can the diagram on the inside of the match typical home entertainment
weaken the batteries. Keep the battery compartment. system equipment.
headphones stored in a cool, dry
place. 3. Replace the battery door and
tighten the door screw.

The A/V jacks, located on the rear How to Change the RSE Video The RSE system always transmits
of the floor console, allow audio or Screen Settings the audio signal to the wireless
video signals to be connected from The screen display mode (normal, headphones, if there is audio
an auxiliary device such as a full, and zoom), screen brightness, available. See “Headphones” earlier
camcorder or a video game unit to and setup menu language can be in this section for more information.
the RSE system. Adapter changed from the on screen setup The DVD player is capable of
connectors or cables (not supplied) menu by using the remote control. outputting audio to the wired
might be required to connect the To change a setting: headphone jacks on the RSA
auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. system, if the vehicle has this
Refer to the manufacturer’s 1. Press z. feature. The DVD player can be
instructions for proper usage. selected as an audio source on the
2. Use n, q, p, o and r to
Power for auxiliary devices is not navigate and use the RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio
supplied by the radio system. setup menu. (RSA) System on page 7‑35 for
To use the auxiliary inputs of the more information.
RSE system, connect an external 3. Press z again to remove the When a device is connected to the
auxiliary device to the color-coded setup menu from the screen. A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary Audio Output input jack, if the vehicle has this
device and the video screen power feature, the rear seat passengers
on. If the video screen is in the DVD Audio from the DVD player or are able to hear audio from the
player mode, pressing the AUX auxiliary inputs can be heard auxiliary device through the wireless
(auxiliary) button on the remote through the following sources: or wired headphones. The front seat
control switches the video screen . Wireless headphones passengers are able to listen to
from the DVD player mode to the playback from this device through
auxiliary device. The radio can listen
. Vehicle speakers the vehicle speakers by selecting
to the audio of the connected . Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks AUX as the source on the radio.
auxiliary device by sourcing to on the RSA system, if the
auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on vehicle has this feature.

Video Screen Notice: Avoid directly touching not seem to be working, the
the video screen, as damage may batteries might need to be replaced.
The video screen is located in the
occur. See “Cleaning the Video See “Battery Replacement” later in
overhead console. When the video
Screens” later in this section for this section. Objects blocking the
screen is not in use, push it up into
more information. line of sight could also affect the
its locked position.
function of the remote control.
To use the video screen: Remote Control
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD
1. Push the release button located slot, the remote control O button
on the overhead console. can be used to turn on the video
2. Move the screen to the desired screen display and start the disc.
position. The radio can also turn on the video
screen display. See Operation
If a DVD is playing and the screen
is raised to its locked position, the
page 7‑5 or Operation (Radio with
screen remains on; this is normal,
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8 for more
and the DVD continues to play
information.
through the previous audio source.
Press P on the remote control or Notice: Storing the remote
eject the disc to turn off the screen. control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
The infrared receivers for the To use the remote control, aim it at repairs will not be covered by the
wireless headphones and the the transmitter window at the rear of warranty. Storage in extreme cold
remote control are located at the the overhead console and press the can weaken the batteries. Keep
rear of the overhead console. desired button. Direct sunlight or the remote control stored in a
very bright light could affect the cool, dry place.
ability of the RSE transmitter to
receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does

Remote Control Buttons z (Display Menu): Press to adjust t (Previous Track/Chapter):

O (Power): Press to turn the video the brightness, screen display mode Press to return to the start of the
screen on and off. (normal, full, or zoom), and display current track or chapter. Press again
the language menu. to go to the previous track or
P (Illumination): Press to turn the chapter. This button might not work
remote control backlight on. The q (Return): Press to exit the when the DVD is playing the
backlight automatically times out current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button copyright information or the
after seven to 10 seconds if no previews.
other button is pressed while the operates only when the display
backlight is on. menu or a DVD menu is active. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to
c (Stop): go to the beginning of the next
v (Title): Press to return the DVD Press to stop playing,
chapter or track. This button might
to the main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
Press twice to return to the not work when the DVD is playing
function could vary for each disc. the copyright information or the
beginning of the DVD.
y (Main Menu): Press to access previews.
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is s (Play/Pause): Press to start r (Fast Reverse): Press to
different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press while a DVD
is playing to pause it. Press again to quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To
navigation arrows to move the stop fast reversing a DVD video,
cursor around the DVD menu. After continue playing the DVD.
making a selection press the enter press s. To stop fast reversing a
When the DVD is playing,
button. This button only operates depending on the radio, play may DVD audio or CD, release r. This
when using a DVD. button might not work when the
be slowed down by pressing s
DVD is playing the copyright
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation then [. The DVD continues playing information or the previews.
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to in a slow play mode. Depending on
navigate through a menu. the radio, perform reverse slow play
r (Enter): Press to select the by pressing s then r. To cancel
choice that is highlighted in
slow play mode, press s again.
any menu.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast 2 (Camera): Press to change Battery Replacement

forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast camera angles on DVDs that have To change the remote control
forwarding a DVD video, press s. this feature when a DVD is playing. batteries:
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio The format and content of this
function vary for each disc. 1. Slide the rear cover back on the
or CD, release [. This button might remote control.
not work when the DVD is playing 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numeric keypad provides the 2. Replace the two batteries in the
the copyright information or the
capability of direct chapter or track compartment. Make sure that
previews. they are installed correctly, using
number selection.
e (Audio): Press to change audio the diagram on the inside of the
tracks on DVDs that have this \ (Clear): Press within battery compartment.
feature when the DVD is playing. three seconds after entering a
numeric selection, to clear all 3. Replace the battery cover.
The format and content of this
function vary for each disc. numerical inputs. If the remote control is to be stored
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): for a long period of time, remove the
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/ Press
batteries and keep them in a cool,
OFF subtitles and to move through to select chapter or track numbers
greater than nine. Press this button dry place.
subtitle options when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of before entering the number.
this function vary for each disc. If the remote control becomes lost
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch or damaged, a new universal
the system between the DVD player remote control can be purchased.
and an auxiliary source. If this happens, make sure the
universal remote control uses a
Toshiba® code set.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action
There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or the pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
picture looks stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimes If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
the DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at the resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
beginning. stop button was pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound. source mode.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
buzzes. and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use a
cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L
(left) and R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player.
DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message DVD Distortion
displays if the disc is not from a
The DVD display error message Video distortion can occur when
correct region.
depends on which radio the vehicle operating cellular phones, scanners,
has. The video screen might display No Disc Inserted: This message CB radios, Global Position Systems
one of the following: displays if no disc is present when (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile
Disc Load/Eject Error: This the Z EJECT button is pressed on faxes, or walkie talkies.
message displays when there are the radio. It might be necessary to turn off the
disc load or eject problems. DVD player when operating one of
Disc Format Error: This message these devices in or near the vehicle.
displays if the disc is inserted with *Excludes the OnStar® System.
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead x w (Next/Previous): Press the SRCE (Source): Press this button
Console down or up arrows to go to the next to switch between the radio (AM,
or to the previous radio station FM), SiriusXM (if equipped), CD,
When cleaning the RSE overhead and if the vehicle has these
console surface, use only a clean stored as a favorite.
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
cloth dampened with clean water. When a CD/DVD is playing, press rear auxiliary.
the down or up arrows to go to the
Cleaning the Video Screen next or previous track or chapter. > (Mute): Press this button to
Use only a clean cloth dampened silence the system. Press this
© SEEK ¨ : Press the SEEK button again, or any other radio
with clean water. Use care when arrows to go to the previous or to
directly touching or cleaning the button, to turn the sound on.
the next radio station while in AM,
screen, as damage could result. FM, or SiriusXM® (if equipped). + / − x (Volume): Press the plus or
Press the SEEK arrows to go to the minus volume buttons to increase or
Rear Audio previous or to the next track or to decrease the volume.
Controller (RAC) chapter while sourced to a CD or
DVD slot.
The vehicle may have the Rear

Audio Controller (RAC). Certain
radio functions can be controlled
with RAC.


. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in Hands-Free Profile to make and
Bluetooth this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: address book or contact list. See system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls in and not all phones work with the
a hands-free mode. for more information.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section for information on compatible phones.
the vehicle. more information.
Voice Recognition
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING The Bluetooth system uses voice
parked: recognition to interpret voice
When using a cell phone, it can commands to dial phone numbers
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or and name tags.
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment For additional information, say
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your “Help” while you are in a voice
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or too recognition menu.
If possible, program speed dial often could cause a crash Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Focus a minimum. The system may not
. Review the controls and your attention on driving. recognize voice commands if there
operation of the infotainment is too much background noise.
system.


. The pairing process is disabled
When to Speak: A short tone b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
when the vehicle is moving.
sounds after the system responds answer incoming calls, confirm
indicating when it is waiting for a system information, and start . Pairing only needs to be
voice command. Wait until the tone speech recognition. completed once, unless the
and then speak. pairing information on the cell
c / x (End): Press to end a call,
phone changes or the cell phone
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a reject a call, or cancel an operation.
calm and natural voice. is deleted from the system.
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can
Audio System
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone be connected to the Bluetooth
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time.
system, sound comes through the system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are
vehicle's front audio system vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the
speakers and overrides the audio the cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first
system. Use the audio system guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the
volume knob, during a call, to pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired
change the volume level. The phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To connect to a
adjusted volume level remains in made using OnStar Hands-Free different paired phone, see
memory for later calls. To prevent Calling, if equipped. See OnStar “Connecting to a Different
missed calls, a minimum volume Overview on page 14‑1. Phone” later in this section.
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low. Pairing Information Pairing a Phone
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Bluetooth Controls
capability cannot be paired to
1. Press and hold b / g for
Use the buttons located on the the vehicle as a phone and an two seconds.
steering wheel to operate the MP3 player at the same time. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See can be skipped.
. Up to five cell phones can be
Steering Wheel Controls on
paired to the Bluetooth system.
page 5‑2.

3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
with instructions and a four-digit Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell
cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on
For help with this process, see after that phone name. which cell phone you want to
the cell phone manufacturer's connect to, you may have to use
user guide. 1. Press and hold b / g for this command several times.
two seconds.
5. Locate the device named “Your
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Vehicle” in the list on the cell two seconds.
phone. Follow the instructions 3. Say “List.”
on the cell phone to enter the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
PIN provided in Step 3. After the Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.”
PIN is successfully entered, the If the phone name you want to
system prompts you to provide a
. If another cell phone is
delete is unknown, see “Listing All found, the response will be
name for the paired cell phone. Paired and Connected Phones.”
This name will be used to “<Phone name> is now
indicate which phones are 1. Press and hold b / g for connected.”
paired and connected to the two seconds. . If another cell phone is not
vehicle. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone
with “<phone name> has been remains connected.
successfully paired” after the 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
pairing process is complete. which phone to delete.
6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pair 4. Say the name of the phone you
additional phones. want to delete.

Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command repeats back the digit it heard
Numbers followed by a tone. After the last
1. Press and hold b / g for digit has been entered, say
The system can store up to 30 two seconds. “Store,” and then follow the
phone numbers as name tags in the directions given by the system to
2. Say “Store.”
Hands-Free Directory that is shared save a name tag for this number.
between the Bluetooth and OnStar 3. Say the phone number or group
systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store all Using the “Delete” Command
at once with no pauses, then
The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the 1. Press and hold b / g for
to delete and store phone numbers. two seconds.
system to save a name tag for
Store: This command will store a this number. 2. Say “Delete.”
phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag. Using the “Digit Store” Command 3. Say the name tag you want to
If an unwanted number is delete.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
name tag by entering the digits one “Clear” at any time to clear the last Command
at a time. number.
This command deletes all stored
Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers name tags in the Hands-Free
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say Calling Directory and the OnStar
“Verify” at any time. Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
Delete All Name Tags: This if equipped.
command deletes all stored name 1. Press and hold b / g for
tags in the Hands-Free Calling two seconds. To delete all name tags:
Directory and the OnStar 2. Say “Digit Store.” 1. Press and hold b / g for
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
3. Say each digit, one at a time, two seconds.
if equipped.
that you want to store. After 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
each digit is entered, the system

Listing Stored Numbers Using the “Dial” or “Call” If an unwanted number is

Command recognized by the system, say
The list command will list all stored
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
numbers and name tags. 1. Press and hold b / g for number.
Using the “List” Command two seconds.
To hear all of the numbers
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” recognized by the system, say
two seconds. 3. Say the entire number without “Verify” at any time.
pausing, or say the name tag.
2. Say “Directory.” 1. Press and hold b / g for
Once connected, the person called two seconds.
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” will be heard through the audio
speakers. 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
4. Say “List.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency that you want to dial. After each
Calls can be made using the 1. Press and hold b / g for digit is entered, the system
following commands. two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
Dial or Call: The dial or call 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” digit has been entered,
command can be used say “Dial.”
3. Say “911.”
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 4. Say "Dial" or "Call.” Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
Digit Dial: This command allows a Using the “Digit Dial” Command speakers.
phone number to be dialed by
The digit dial command allows a Using the “Re-dial” Command
entering the digits one at a time.
phone number to be dialed by
Re-dial: This command is used to entering the digits one at a time. 1. Press and hold b / g for
dial the last number used on the cell After each digit is entered, the two seconds.
phone. system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”

Once connected, the person called . Press c / x to disconnect the . To mute a call, press b / g , and
will be heard through the audio current call and switch to the call then say “Mute call.”
speakers. on hold. . To cancel mute, press b / g ,
Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling and then say “Un-mute call.”
When an incoming call is received, Three-way calling must be Transferring a Call
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service Audio can be transferred between
carrier. the Bluetooth system and the cell
. Press b / g to answer the call. phone.
1. While on a call, press b / g.
. Press c / x to ignore a call. The cell phone must be paired and
2. Say “Three-way call.” connected with the Bluetooth
Call Waiting system before a call can be
3. Use the dial or call command to
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party transferred. The connection process
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called. can take up to two minutes after the
wireless service carrier. ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
4. Once the call is connected,
Press b / g to answer an Transferring Audio from the
.
press b / g to link all callers
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
incoming call when another call together.
is active. The original call is During a call with the audio in the
placed on hold. Ending a Call vehicle:
. Press b / g again to return to Press c / x to end a call. 1. Press b / g.
the original call. Muting a Call 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call, all sounds from inside
action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.

Transferring Audio to the 3. Say “Voice.” The system Clearing the System
Bluetooth System from a Cell responds “OK, accessing
Unless information is deleted out of
Phone <phone name>.”
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
During a call with the audio on the The cell phone's normal prompt will be retained indefinitely. This
cell phone, press b / g. The audio messages will go through their cycle includes all saved name tags in the
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio according to the phone's operating phone book and phone pairing
does not transfer to the vehicle, use instructions. information. For information on how
the audio transfer feature on the cell to delete this information, see the
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency previous section “Deleting a Paired
phone. See your cell phone
(DTMF) Tones Phone” and the previous sections
manufacturer's user guide for more
information. The Bluetooth system can send on deleting name tags.
numbers and the numbers stored as
Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
Other Information
Voice pass-thru allows access to the use this feature when calling a The Bluetooth® word mark and
voice recognition commands on the menu-driven phone system. logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
cell phone. See your cell phone Account numbers can also be SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
manufacturer's user guide to see if stored for use. by General Motors is under license.
the cell phone supports this feature. Other trademarks and trade names
Sending a Number or Name Tag are those of their respective owners.
To access contacts stored in the cell During a Call
phone: See Radio Frequency Statement on
1. Press b / g. The system page 13‑21 for information
1. Press and hold b / g for responds “Ready,” followed by regarding Part 15 of the Federal
two seconds. a tone. Communications Commission (FCC)
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 2. Say “Dial.” rules and Industry Canada
can be skipped. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.

Settings Favorite Pages: Press to select

the number of favorite pages
Press Settings on the Home Page displayed on the screen. The choice
to adjust features and preferences, is 1–6 pages.
such as Time, Date, Bluetooth
Display Settings: Press to adjust
Device List, Voice Recognition,
the screen settings.
Favorite Pages, Display Settings,
Navigation Settings, etc. . The Auto setting adjusts the
screen background automatically
1. Press the Settings screen button
depending on the exterior
on the Home Page.
lighting conditions.
2. Touch-tap the scroll bar until the . The Day setting brightens the
desired option displays. Select
From the Settings menu, press the map background.
the desired settings to change.
Set Time or Set Date settings . The Night setting darkens the
A few of the setting options change screen button to display the different map background.
the way the navigation system options for setting the time
displays or reacts while in use. Speed Dependent Volume: Select
and date.
OFF, Low, Medium, or High
Bluetooth Device List: Press to sensitivity to automatically adjust
display paired bluetooth devices. the volume to minimize the effects
Voice Recognition: Press to of unwanted background noise that
display voice recognition options. can result from changing road
surfaces, driving speeds, or open
. Voice Prompt Volume: Press to windows. This feature works best at
adjust the prompt volume. lower volume settings where
. Prompt Length: Press to select background noise is typically louder
short or long prompts. than the sound system volume.

Startup Volume: Press to set the Set Date: Touchscreen) on page 7‑18 (if
maximum volume level for startup . Press the up or down arrows to equipped), for more information
that will be used even if a higher increase or decrease the Month, about XM Categories.
volume had been set when the radio Day, and Year settings. The Radio Settings are:
was turned off.
. Press and hold to quickly
Radio Favorites: Press to select Phone Settings
increase or decrease the date
the number of FAV pages to be settings. See Bluetooth on page 7‑45 in the
used in the system. “Phone” section for more
. Press OK or the Back screen information on phone settings.
Add/Remove XM Categories: button to save the adjustments.
Press to customize which available Vehicle Settings
XM Categories are displayed and Radio Settings
used in the system. See Vehicle Personalization (With
Press the Config button on the DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
RDS Settings: Press to customize Home Page or the CONFIG button
station name and radio text display on the faceplate to enter the menu Display
options. options. Turn the PUSH/SEL knob Mode: Press Mode to change the
Set Time: or touch-tap the scroll bar to scroll screen background. This setting
through the available options. Press controls map colors.
. Press the up or down arrows to the PUSH/SEL knob or press Radio
increase or decrease the Hours, Settings to display the radio settings Calibrate Touchscreen: Press to
Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on menu. Press this feature to make display the Touchscreen Calibration
the clock. changes for radio information Screen.
. Press and hold to quickly displayed, preset pages, Auto Turn Display Off: Press to turn the
increase or decrease the time Volume Control, and XM Categories Display option off.
settings. Restore. See Satellite Radio (Radio
without Touchscreen) on page 7‑15
. Press OK or the Back screen or Satellite Radio (Radio with
button to save the adjustments.

Rear Vision Camera (If Trademarks and

Equipped)
License Agreements
The rear vision camera can assist
the driver when backing up by
displaying a view of the area behind
the vehicle.
Press the Config button to access

the Display settings. Adjust the Manufactured under license under
brightness of the screen by pressing U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
the − or + screen button. See Rear 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑35. 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital
An image appears on the system’s Surround are registered trademarks
screen so that the driver can check and the DTS logos and Symbol are
the surroundings for safety. trademarks of DTS, Inc.©
1996-2010 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
1992-2010 Dolby Laboratories. All
rights reserved.

2 NOTES

Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Rear Climate Control System
(with Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . . 8-9
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
1. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the

2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) way counterclockwise to turn the
front climate control system off.
3. Temperature Control
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
4. Recirculation or counterclockwise to increase or
5. Air Delivery Mode Control decrease the fan speed.
6. Air Conditioning
7. Rear Window Defogger

8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. # (Air Conditioning): Press to
clockwise or counterclockwise to Recirculation cannot be selected turn the air conditioning system on
increase or decrease the while in floor mode. or off. An indicator light comes on
temperature of the air flowing from - (Defog): This clears the when A/C is on. The air conditioning
the system. windows of fog or moisture. Air is system does not operate when the
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn directed to the windshield, floor outside temperature is below 4°C
clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets, and side window vents. (40°F). The indicator light flashes
change the current airflow mode. When this mode is selected, the three times and turns off when
system turns off recirculation and outside conditions affect air
By positioning the right knob conditioning operation. This is
between two modes, a combination runs the air conditioning unless the
outside temperature is less than 4°C normal.
of those two modes is selected.
(40°F). Recirculation cannot be For quicker cool down on hot days:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the selected while in the defog mode.
instrument panel outlets. Do not drive the vehicle until all the 1. Open the windows to let hot air
windows are clear. escape.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and 0 (Defrost): This clears the 2. Select H mode.
floor outlets. Some air is directed windshield of fog or frost more
toward the windshield and side quickly. Air is directed to the 3. Select #.
window outlets. Cooler air is windshield and side window vents, 4. Select the coolest temperature.
directed to the upper outlets and with some to the floor vents. In this
warmer air to the floor outlets. 5. Select the highest fan speed.
mode, outside air is pulled inside
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be 6. Close the windows after the hot
floor outlets, with some of the air selected while in the defrost mode. air has escaped.
directed to the windshield, side The air conditioning system runs 7. Once the vehicle's interior
window, and second row floor automatically in this setting, unless temperature is below the outside
outlets. In this mode, the system the outside temperature is less than
4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle temperature, select @ mode
until all windows are clear. for faster cooling.

Using recirculation for long periods The recirculation mode cannot be 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
of time could cause the air inside used with floor, defrost, or defogging Press to turn the rear window
the vehicle to become too dry. To modes. If recirculation is selected in defogger on or off. The rear window
prevent this from happening, after these modes, the indicator flashes defogger stays on for about
the inside of the vehicle has cooled, three times and turns off. The air 10 minutes, before automatically
turn the recirculation mode off. conditioning also comes on when turning off. The defogger will also
The air conditioning system this mode is activated unless the turn off when the engine is
removes moisture from the air, so outside air temperature is less than turned off.
water might drip under the vehicle 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation
mode the windows can fog when Do not drive the vehicle until all
while idling or after turning off the windows are clear.
engine. This is normal. the weather is cold and damp. To
clear the fog, select either the defog For vehicles with heated outside
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn or defrost mode and increase the rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
the recirculation mode on or off. An fan speed. cleared from the surface of the
indicator light comes on when mirror when 1 is pressed.
recirculation is on. When the engine REAR (Rear Climate Control):
is turned off, the recirculation mode Press to turn the rear heating and Notice: Do not use anything
automatically turns off and must be air conditioning on or off. See Rear sharp on the inside of the rear
re-selected when the engine is Climate Control System on page 8‑8 window. If you do, you could cut
turned on again. or Rear Climate Control System or damage the warming grid, and
(with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑9. the repairs would not be covered
This mode recirculates and helps to
Rear Window Defogger by the vehicle warranty. Do not
quickly cool the air inside the
attach a temporary vehicle
vehicle. It can be used to prevent The rear window defogger uses a license, tape, a decal, or anything
outside air and odors from entering warming grid to remove fog from the similar to the defogger grid.
the vehicle. rear window.

Dual Automatic Climate Control System function along with the inside
temperature setting. The outside
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with temperature is displayed on the
this system. instrument cluster.
( (On/Off): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to turn the climate
control system on or off.
The climate control system will also
turn on if the defrost, AUTO, or air
conditioning buttons are pressed.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls the inside
temperature, the air delivery, and
the fan speed.
To use automatic mode:
1. Driver and Passenger Side 7. Rear Window Defogger
Temperature Controls 1. Press the AUTO button.
8. Fan Control
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls When AUTO is selected, the
9. Recirculation current temperature(s) is
3. SYNC (Synchronized 10. Air Conditioning displayed and the AUTO
Temperature) indicator light is on.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Display Function
When AUTO is selected, the air
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Each time the temperature, mode,
conditioning and air inlet are
or fan controls are adjusted, the
6. Defrost automatically controlled. The air
climate control display shows that
conditioning runs when the

outside temperature is over 4°C is available. Turn the fan knob to temperature. The passenger side
(40°F). The system is override this delay and select display will show the temperature
automatically set to outside air, the fan speed. setting.
unless it is hot outside and then SYNC (Synchronized
the air inlet changes to Temperature Control
Temperature): Press to set the
recirculation mode to help The driver and passenger side passenger temperature to match the
quickly cool the vehicle. The temperature controls are used to driver temperature setting.
recirculation indicator light will adjust the temperature of the air
come on. coming through the system. The Manual Operation
2. Set the temperature for the temperature can be adjusted even if
The air delivery mode or fan speed
driver and passenger. the system is turned off since
can be manually adjusted.
outside air still enters the vehicle,
To find a comfortable setting, unless the recirculation mode is 9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob
start with a 22°C (73°F) selected. See “Recirculation” later in clockwise or counterclockwise to
temperature setting and allow this section. increase or decrease the fan speed.
about 20 minutes for the system
Driver Side Temperature Turning the fan control knob while in
to regulate. Use the driver side
Control: Turn clockwise or automatic control places the fan
or passenger side temperature
counterclockwise to increase or speed under manual control.
control to adjust the temperature
setting as necessary. The decrease the driver side The air delivery mode remains in
system will remain at the temperature. The driver side automatic control. The fan setting
selected setting. Choosing the temperature display will show the displays momentarily and then no
warmest or coolest temperatures temperature setting. longer displays.
does not cause the vehicle to Passenger Side Temperature
heat or cool more quickly. Control: Turn clockwise or Air Delivery Modes: Press H, ),
counterclockwise to increase or 6, or- to change the direction of
To avoid blowing cold air in cold the airflow in the vehicle. An
weather, the system delays decrease the passenger side
indicator light comes on in the
turning on the fan until warm air selected mode button. Pressing a

mode button while the system is off outlets, and side window vents. The A/C does not work when the
changes the air delivery mode When this mode is selected, the outside temperature is below 4°C
without turning the system on. system turns off recirculation and (40°F). If A/C is pressed the
Changing the air delivery mode runs the air conditioning compressor indicator flashes three times and
while in automatic control places the unless the outside temperature is turns off to show that the A/C mode
system into manual control. The air less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive is not available. If the A/C is on and
delivery mode button indicator the vehicle until all the windows are the outside temperature drops
displays, and the AUTO button clear. below a temperature which is too
indicator light turns off. 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the cool for air conditioning to be
H (Vent): Air is directed to the defrost on or off. This mode quickly effective, the A/C indicator turns off
instrument panel outlets. clears the windshield of fog or frost. to show that the A/C mode has
Air is directed to the windshield, been canceled.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
side window, and floor vents. In this On hot days, open the windows
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed mode, outside air is pulled inside briefly to let hot inside air escape.
towards the windshield and side the vehicle. The air conditioning This helps reduce the time it takes
window outlets. Cooler air is system runs automatically in this for the interior of the vehicle to
directed to the upper outlets and setting, unless the outside cool down.
warmer air to the floor outlets. temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). The air conditioning system
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the removes moisture from the air, so
floor outlets, with some of the air windows are clear. water might drip under the vehicle
directed to the windshield, side while idling or after turning off the
Air Conditioning engine. This is normal.
window, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
uses outside air. turn the air conditioning on and off. the recirculation mode on or off. An
An indicator light comes on when indicator light comes on when
- (Defog): This mode clears the A/C is on. recirculation is on. When the engine
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor is turned off, the recirculation mode

automatically turns off and must be Rear Window Defogger Sensors

re-selected when the engine is
The rear window defogger uses a The solar sensor in the defrost grille
turned on again.
warming grid to remove fog from the in the middle of the instrument
This mode recirculates and helps to rear window. panel, monitors the solar heat. Do
quickly cool the air inside the not cover the solar sensor or the
vehicle. It can be used to prevent R1 (Rear Window Defogger): system will not work properly.
outside air and odors from entering Press to turn the rear window
the vehicle. defogger on or off. The rear window
defogger stays on for about
The recirculation mode cannot be 10 minutes, before turning off. The
used with floor, defog, or defrosting defogger also turns off when the
modes. If recirculation is selected in engine is turned off. Do not drive the
these modes, the indicator flashes vehicle until all the windows are
three times and turns off. The air clear.
conditioning compressor also comes
on when this mode is activated. For vehicles with heated outside
While in recirculation mode the rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
windows can fog when the weather cleared from the surface of the
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, mirror when the rear window defog
select either the defog or defrost button is pressed.
mode and increase the fan speed. Notice: Do not use a razor blade The interior temperature sensor, on
REAR: Press to turn the rear or sharp object to clear the inside the instrument panel to the right of
heating and air conditioning on or rear window. Do not adhere the steering column, measures the
off. See Rear Climate Control anything to the defogger grid temperature of the air inside the
System on page 8‑8 or Rear lines in the rear glass. These vehicle.
Climate Control System (with Rear actions may damage the rear
Seat Audio) on page 8‑9. defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.

There is also an exterior Rear Climate Control System

temperature sensor behind the front
grille. This sensor reads the outside
air temperature and helps maintain
the temperature inside the vehicle.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the
displayed temperature.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
maintain comfort settings by
adjusting the temperature, fan
speed, and air delivery mode. The
system may also supply cooler air to
the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also 1. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front
be used as needed to maintain cool 2. Temperature Control climate control system to control the
outlet temperatures. rear climate control system. The
3. Air Delivery Mode Control REAR text displays when the rear
For vehicles with the rear climate system is on.
control system, the controls are Sync Mode: This mode matches
located on the rear of the center the rear climate control to the front
console. The system can also be climate control settings. It comes on
controlled with the front controls. when REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This mode Rear Climate Control System (with Rear Seat Audio)
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to ( to turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
to the desired mode to change the 1. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front
airflow direction. 2. Air Delivery Mode Control climate control system to control the
rear climate control system. The
H (Vent): Air is directed through 3. Temperature Control system also turns on if any of the
the overhead outlets.
For vehicles with the rear climate rear controls, except C , are
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed control system, the controls are pressed. The display is activated
through the rear floor outlets, as located on the rear of the center when the rear system is on.
well as the overhead outlets. console. The system can also be turned off,
6 (Floor): Air is directed through by pressingC until the fan goes off.
the floor outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located under the
third row seats.

Sync Mode: This mode matches N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Air Vents
the rear climate control to the front Press to manually change the
climate control settings. It comes on direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Use the slider switch in the center of
when REAR is pressed. press the button until the desired the outlet, to change the direction of
mode appears on the display. the airflow. Use the thumbwheel
Independent Mode: This mode
near the outlet to control the amount
directs rear seating airflow H (Vent): Air is directed through of airflow or to shut off the airflow.
according to the settings of the rear the overhead outlets.
controls. It comes on when any rear Keep all outlets open whenever
control is adjusted. ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed possible for best system
through the rear floor outlets, as performance.
D and C (Fan Control): Press the well as the overhead outlets.
fan up or down buttons to increase Operation Tips
or decrease the fan speed. 6 (Floor): Air is directed through
the floor outlets. The rear system . Clear away any ice, snow,
Temperature Control: Press + or floor outlets are located under the or leaves from the air inlets at
− to increase or decrease the air third row seats. the base of the windshield that
temperature. The temperature can block the flow of air into the
settings will display in vehicle.
0-12 increments, going from the
coolest (0) to the warmest (12)
setting.


. Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect Maintenance
the performance of the system.
. Keep the path under all seats
Passenger Compartment
clear of objects to help circulate Air Filter
the air inside the vehicle more The filter removes dust, pollen, and
effectively. other airborne irritants from outside
. If fogging reoccurs while in vent air and inside air when in
or bi-level modes with mild recirculation mode.
temperature throughout the The filter should be replaced as part
vehicle, turn on the air of routine scheduled maintenance.
conditioner to reduce windshield See Maintenance Schedule on
fogging. 2. Twist the compartment
page 11‑3. To find out what type of retainers (1) and pull outward to
replacement filter to use, see remove.
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑13. 3. Lower the instrument panel
compartment assembly (2)
1. Open the glove box. beyond the stops.
4. If needed, unsnap the instrument
panel compartment assembly (2)
from the instrument panel. When
reinstalling, be sure the
instrument panel compartment
dampener arm is aligned
properly to the dampener gear
assembly.

6. Remove the old air filter from the

passenger compartment air filter
housing (2).
7. Install the new air filter.
8. Replace the housing cover.
9. If removed, reinstall the
instrument panel compartment
assembly.
10. Reinstall the compartment
retainers.
5. Squeeze the housing cover (1) See your dealer if additional
tabs to remove. assistance is needed.

Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Object Detection Systems

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-31
Operating Parking over Things Side Blind Zone
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Rear Vision
Driving Information Engine Exhaust Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Running the Vehicle While Fuel
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Automatic Transmission Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-39
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-21 California Fuel
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-39
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Drive Systems Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6 Filling a Portable Fuel
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Brakes Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Antilock Brake
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Towing
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 General Towing
Starting and Operating Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-13 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-27 Driving Characteristics and
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Ride Control Systems Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Cruise Control Conversions and Add-Ons
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

9-2 Driving and Operating

. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential { WARNING
distractions.
Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
and can take your focus from the crash resulting in injury or death.
programming favorite radio
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate Focus your attention on driving.
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into Refer to the Infotainment section
from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to and the infotainment manual for
governments have enacted laws driving. more information on using that
regarding driver distraction. Become system, including pairing and using
. Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in a cell phone.
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always Defensive Driving
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands Defensive driving means “always
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive. expect the unexpected.” The first
. Keep pets in an appropriate step in driving defensively is to wear
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations page 3‑13.
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a . Assume that other road users
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and
. Watch the road. Do not read, other drivers) are going to be
take notes, or look up careless and make mistakes.
information on phones or other Anticipate what they might do
electronic devices. and be ready.


. Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
Control of a Vehicle If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating normally but do not pump the
are important factors in helping to brakes. Doing so could make the
. Focus on the task of driving.
control a vehicle while driving. pedal harder to push down. If the
Drunk Driving engine stops, there will be some
Braking power brake assist but it will be
Death and injury associated with used when the brake is applied.
Braking action involves perception
drinking and driving is a global Once the power assist is used up, it
time and reaction time. Deciding to
tragedy. can take longer to stop and the
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is brake pedal will be harder to push.
{ WARNING reaction time.
Steering
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In Variable Effort Steering
perceptions, attentiveness, and that time, a vehicle moving at
Some vehicles have a steering
judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
system that varies the amount of
a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
effort required to steer the vehicle in
can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
The amount of steering effort
drinking. include:
required is less at slower speeds to
Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between make the vehicle more
a driver who has been drinking. you and the vehicle in front maneuverable and easier to park. At
Ride home in a cab; or if you are of you. faster speeds, the steering effort
with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking. increases to provide a sport-like feel
who will not drink. to the steering. This provides
. Keep pace with traffic. maximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steer Curve Tips Off-Road Recovery

than normal when parking or driving . Take curves at a reasonable
slowly, there may be a problem with
speed.
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer . Reduce speed before entering a
than normal at slow speeds. See curve.
your dealer for service. . Maintain a reasonable, steady
Hydraulic Power Steering speed through the curve.
If your vehicle has hydraulic power
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
steering, it may require the curve before accelerating
maintenance. See Power Steering gently into the straightaway.
Fluid on page 10‑18. Steering in Emergencies
If power steering assist is lost . There are some situations when
because the engine stops, or there steering around a problem may The vehicle's right wheels can drop
is a system malfunction, the vehicle be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
can be steered but may require shoulder while driving. Follow
increased effort. See your dealer if . Holding both sides of the
steering wheel allows you to turn these tips:
there is a problem.
180 degrees without removing 1. Ease off the accelerator and
a hand. then, if there is nothing in the
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) way, steer the vehicle so that it
allows steering while braking. straddles the edge of the
pavement.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to go If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help
straight down the roadway. these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid.
. Ease your foot off the
Loss of Control accelerator pedal and steer the Driving on Wet Roads
Skidding way you want the vehicle to go. Rain and wet roads can reduce
The vehicle may straighten out. vehicle traction and affect your
There are three types of skids that Be ready for a second skid if it ability to stop and accelerate.
correspond to the vehicle's three occurs. Always drive slower in these types
control systems: of driving conditions and avoid
. Slow down and adjust your
. Braking Skid — wheels are not driving according to weather driving through large puddles and
rolling. conditions. Stopping distance deep‐standing or flowing water.
. Steering or Cornering Skid — can be longer and vehicle
too much speed or steering in a control can be affected when { WARNING
curve causes tires to slip and traction is reduced by water,
lose cornering force. snow, ice, gravel, or other Wet brakes can cause crashes.
material on the road. Learn to They might not work as well in a
. Acceleration Skid — too much recognize warning clues — such quick stop and could cause
throttle causes the driving as enough water, ice, or packed pulling to one side. You could
wheels to spin. snow on the road to make a lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt. After driving through a large
by taking reasonable care suited to puddle of water or a car/vehicle
existing conditions, and by not . Try to avoid sudden steering, wash, lightly apply the brake
overdriving those conditions. But acceleration, or braking, pedal until the brakes work
skids are always possible. including reducing vehicle speed normally.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause (Continued)
the tires to slide.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

. Keep your eyes moving — scan
WARNING (Continued) the road ahead and to the sides.
Besides slowing down, other wet .
Flowing or rushing water creates weather driving tips include: Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
strong forces. Driving through . Allow extra following distance.
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
. Pass with caution. Hill and Mountain Roads
happens, you and other vehicle . Keep windshield wiping Driving on steep hills or through
occupants could drown. Do not equipment in good shape. mountains is different than driving
ignore police warnings and be . Keep the windshield washer fluid on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
very cautious about trying to drive reservoir filled. driving in these conditions include:
through flowing water. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on good shape.
Hydroplaning page 10‑35. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Turn off cruise control. tires, cooling system, and
can build up under the vehicle's transmission.
tires so they actually ride on the Highway Hypnosis . Shift to a lower gear when going
water. This can happen if the road is down steep or long hills.
wet enough and you are going fast Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no If you become tired or sleepy, find a { WARNING
contact with the road. safe place to park the vehicle
If you do not shift down, the
and rest.
There is no hard and fast rule about brakes could get so hot that they
hydroplaning. The best advice is to Other driving tips include: would not work well. You would
slow down when the road is wet. . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. then have poor braking or even
. Keep the interior (Continued)
temperature cool.


. Stay in your own lane. Do not Drive with caution, whatever the
WARNING (Continued) swing wide or cut across the condition. Accelerate gently so
center of the road. Drive at traction is not lost. Accelerating too
none going down a hill. You could speeds that let you stay in your quickly causes the wheels to spin
crash. Shift down to let the engine own lane. and makes the surface under the
assist the brakes on a steep tires slick, so there is even less
. Be alert on top of hills;
downhill slope. something could be in your lane traction.
(stalled car, accident). Try not to break the fragile traction.
. Pay attention to special road If you accelerate too fast, the drive
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding wheels will spin and polish the
roads, long grades, passing or surface under the tires even more.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
or with the ignition off is appropriate action. improves vehicle stability during
dangerous. The brakes will have hard stops on slippery roads, but
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving apply the brakes sooner than when
and they could get so hot that on dry pavement. See Antilock
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice Brake System (ABS) on page 9‑25.
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
even none going down a hill. Allow greater following distance on
or ice between the tires and the any slippery road and watch for
Steering may also be affected road, creating less traction or grip. slippery spots. Icy patches can
when ignition is off. You could Wet ice can occur at about 0°C occur on otherwise clear roads in
crash. Always have the engine (32°F) when freezing rain begins to shaded areas. The surface of a
running and the vehicle in gear fall, resulting in even less traction. curve or an overpass can remain icy
when going downhill. Avoid driving on wet ice or in when the surrounding roads are
freezing rain until roads can be clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand. maneuvers and braking while
on ice.

Turn off cruise control on slippery

surfaces. WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Blizzard Conditions cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See
cause unconsciousness and even “Climate Control Systems” in
Being stuck in snow can be a
death. the Index.
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
If possible, use Roadside carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
Assistance. See Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑20.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
especially any that is blocking
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
the exhaust pipe. To save fuel, run the engine for only
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
. Check again from time to short periods as needed to warm
page 13‑11. To get help and keep
time to be sure snow does the vehicle and then shut the engine
everyone in the vehicle safe:
not collect there. off and close the window most of
. Turn on the hazard warning the way to save heat. Repeat this
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm until help arrives but only when you
(2 in) on the side of the feel really uncomfortable from the
. Tie a red cloth to an outside
vehicle that is away from the cold. Moving about to keep warm
mirror.
wind to bring in fresh air. also helps.
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel. the engine, push the accelerator
under the vehicle. This may . Adjust the climate control pedal slightly so the engine runs
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that faster than the idle speed. This
inside. Engine exhaust contains circulates the air inside the keeps the battery charged to restart
carbon monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
(Continued) (Continued) as possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is Stuck system. Shift back and forth nonfactory-installed options.
between R (Reverse) and a low Two labels on your vehicle show
Slowly and cautiously spin the forward gear, spinning the wheels
wheels to free the vehicle when
how much weight it may
as little as possible. To prevent properly carry, the Tire and
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. transmission wear, wait until the
Loading Information label and
If stuck too severely for the traction wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator the Certification/Tire label.
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the pedal while shifting, and press
rocking method. See StabiliTrak® lightly on the accelerator pedal { WARNING
System on page 9‑27. when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
{ WARNING forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could Vehicle Weight Rating
If the vehicle's tires spin at high free the vehicle. If that does not get (GVWR), or either the
speed, they can explode, and you the vehicle out after a few tries, it maximum front or rear Gross
or others could be injured. The might need to be towed out. If the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
vehicle can overheat, causing an vehicle does need to be towed out, This can cause systems to
see Towing the Vehicle on break and change the way the
engine compartment fire or other
page 10‑69.
damage. Spin the wheels as little vehicle handles. This could
as possible and avoid going cause loss of control and a
above 56 km/h (35 mph).
Vehicle Load Limits crash. Overloading can also
It is very important to know how shorten the life of the vehicle.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get much weight your vehicle can
it Out carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
Turn the steering wheel left and includes the weight of all
right to clear the area around the
occupants, cargo, and all
front wheels. Turn off any traction

Tire and Loading Information maximum vehicle capacity Steps for Determining Correct
Label weight (2) in kilograms and Load Limit
pounds. 1. Locate the statement “The
The Tire and Loading combined weight of
Information label also shows the occupants and cargo should
size of the original equipment never exceed XXX kg or
tires (3) and the recommended XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
cold tire inflation pressures (4). placard.
For more information on tires 2. Determine the combined
and inflation see Tires on weight of the driver and
page 10‑35 and Tire Pressure passengers that will be riding
on page 10‑42. in your vehicle.
There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined
Example Label
information on the vehicle weight of the driver and
A vehicle-specific Tire and Certification/Tire label. It tells passengers from XXX kg or
Loading Information label is you the Gross Vehicle Weight XXX lbs.
attached to the center pillar Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
(B-pillar) of your vehicle. With Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for 4. The resulting figure equals
the driver door open, you will the front and rear axle. See the available amount of cargo
find the label attached below the “Certification/Tire Label” later in and luggage load capacity.
door lock post (striker). The tire this section. For example, if the “XXX”
and loading information label amount equals 1400 lbs and
shows the number of occupant there will be five 150 lb
seating positions (1), and the passengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Example 1 Example 2
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
trailer will be transferred to Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg
your vehicle. Consult this (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
manual to determine how this 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
reduces the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
and luggage load capacity for (300 lbs). (750 lbs).
your vehicle.
3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight =
See Trailer Towing on page 9‑45 Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs).
for important information on (700 lbs).
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.

seating positions. The combined GVWR includes the weight of

weight of the driver, passengers, the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo should never exceed and cargo.
your vehicle's capacity weight. The Certification/Tire label also
Certification/Tire Label tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your
Example 3 vehicle. Your dealer can help
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for you with this. Be sure to spread
Example 3 = 453 kg out your load equally on both
(1,000 lbs). sides of the centerline.
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ Never exceed the GVWR for
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example your vehicle or the GAWR for
(1,000 lbs). either the front or rear axle.
A vehicle-specific Certification/
3. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is attached to the rear
0 kg (0 lbs). edge of the driver door. { WARNING
Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the gross Do not load the vehicle any
loading information label for weight capacity of your vehicle. heavier than the Gross
specific information about your This is called the Gross Vehicle Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle's capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR). The (Continued)

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING Starting and

Operating
(GVWR), or either the Things you put inside the
maximum front or rear Gross vehicle can strike and injure New Vehicle Break-In
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). people in a sudden stop or
This can cause systems to turn, or in a crash. Notice: The vehicle does not
break and change the way the need an elaborate break-in. But it
. Put things in the cargo will perform better in the long run
vehicle handles. This could area of the vehicle. Try to if you follow these guidelines:
cause loss of control and a spread the weight evenly.
crash. Overloading can also . If you have all-wheel drive,
shorten the life of the vehicle. . Never stack heavier keep your speed at 88 km/h
things, like suitcases, (55 mph) or less for the first
inside the vehicle so that 805 km (500 mi).
Notice: Overloading the
some of them are above . Do not drive at any one
vehicle may cause damage. constant speed, fast or slow,
the tops of the seats.
Repairs would not be covered for the first 805 km (500 mi).
by the vehicle warranty. Do . Do not leave an Do not make full-throttle
not overload the vehicle. unsecured child restraint starts. Avoid downshifting to
in the vehicle. brake or slow the vehicle.
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases, tools, . When you carry something
packages, or anything else, they inside the vehicle, secure
will go as fast as the vehicle it whenever you can.
goes. If you have to stop or turn . Do not leave a seat folded
quickly, or if there is a crash, down unless you need to.
they will keep going.


. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
Ignition Positions and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
so. During this time the new hand, see your dealer.
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with ( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
new linings can mean LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
premature wear and earlier stopped, turn the ignition switch to
replacement. Follow this LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
breaking-in guideline every Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
time you get new brake will remain active. See Retained
linings. Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑18.
. Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving This position locks the ignition,
Characteristics and Towing transmission, and the steering
Tips on page 9‑42 for the wheel when the key Is removed
trailer towing capabilities of The ignition switch has four different from the ignition. The key can be
your vehicle and more positions. removed in LOCK/OFF.
information. In order to shift out of P (Park), the The steering can bind with the
Following break‐in, engine speed ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ wheels turned off center. If this
and load can be gradually ACCESSORY and the brake pedal happens, move the steering wheel
increased. must be applied. from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
Notice: Using a tool to force the
does not work, then the vehicle
key to turn in the ignition could
needs service.
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,

Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake. See instrument panel warning and
vehicle is moving. This will cause a Parking Brake on page 9‑26. indicator lights. This position can
loss of power assist in the brake also be used for service and
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
{ WARNING diagnostics, and to verify the proper
operation of the malfunction
If the vehicle must be shut off in an Turning off the vehicle while indicator lamp as may be required
emergency: moving may cause loss of power for emission inspection purposes.
assist in the brake and steering The switch stays in this position
1. Brake using a firm and steady systems and disable the airbags. when the engine is running. The
pressure. Do not pump the While driving, only shut the transmission is also unlocked in this
brakes repeatedly. This may position. If you leave the key in the
vehicle off in an emergency.
deplete power assist, requiring ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
increased brake pedal force. position with the engine off, the
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, battery could be drained. You may
This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving, not be able to start the vehicle if the
vehicle is moving. After shifting turn the ignition to ACC/ battery is allowed to drain for an
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ACCESSORY. extended period of time.
brakes and steer the vehicle to a ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is / (START): This is the position
safe location. the position in which you can that starts the engine. When the
3. Come to a complete stop, shift operate the electrical accessories or engine starts, release the key. The
to P (Park), and turn the ignition items plugged into the accessory ignition switch will return to ON/RUN
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with power outlets. This position unlocks for driving.
an automatic transmission, the the ignition and steering wheel. Use
this position if the vehicle must be Key Lock Release
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the pushed or towed. The vehicle has an electronic key
LOCK/OFF position. R (ON/RUN): This position can be lock release system. This system is
used to operate the electrical to prevent ignition key removal
accessories and to display some unless the shift lever is in P (Park).

The key lock release will not work if Starting Procedure the engine is already running.
the battery is charged less than 1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped
9-volts, or uncharged. Try charging pedal, turn the ignition to START. by turning the ignition switch to
or jump starting the battery. See When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or
Jump Starting on page 10‑66 the key. The idle speed will slow LOCK/OFF position.
down as the engine warms. Do Notice: Cranking the engine for
Starting the Engine not race the engine immediately long periods of time, by returning
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or after starting it. Operate the the key to the START position
N (Neutral). The engine will not start engine and transmission gently immediately after cranking has
in any other position. To restart the to allow the oil to warm up and ended, can overheat and damage
engine when the vehicle is already lubricate all moving parts. the cranking motor, and drain the
moving, use N (Neutral) only. The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the
Notice: Do not try to shift to cranking motor cool down.
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. System. This feature assists in
If you do, you could damage the starting the engine and protects 2. If the engine does not start after
transmission. Shift to P (Park) components. If the ignition key is five to 10 seconds, especially in
only when the vehicle is stopped. turned to the START position, very cold weather (below −18°C
and then released when the or 0°F), it could be flooded with
Notice: If you add electrical parts engine begins cranking, the too much gasoline. Try pushing
or accessories, you could change engine will continue cranking for the accelerator pedal all the way
the way the engine operates. Any a few seconds or until the to the floor and holding it there
resulting damage would not be vehicle starts. If the engine does as you hold the key in START
covered by the vehicle warranty. not start and the key is held in for up to a maximum of
See Add-On Electrical Equipment START, cranking will be stopped 15 seconds. Wait at least
on page 9‑49. after 15 seconds to prevent 15 seconds between each try, to
cranking motor damage. To allow the cranking motor to cool
prevent gear damage, this down. When the engine starts,
system also prevents cranking if let go of the key and accelerator.

If the vehicle starts briefly but with an engine coolant heater

then stops again, repeat these should be plugged in at least four { WARNING
steps. This clears the extra hours before starting. Some models
gasoline from the engine. Do not may have an internal thermostat in Plugging the cord into an
race the engine immediately the cord which will prevent engine ungrounded outlet could cause an
after starting it. Operate the coolant heater operation at electrical shock. Also, the wrong
engine and transmission gently temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). kind of extension cord could
until the oil warms up and overheat and cause a fire. You
lubricates all moving parts. To Use the Engine Coolant could be seriously injured. Plug
Heater the cord into a properly grounded
Notice: The engine is designed to
1. Turn off the engine. three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts If the cord will not reach, use a
2. Open the hood and unwrap the heavy-duty three-prong extension
or accessories, you could change electrical cord. The bundled cord
the way the engine operates. cord rated for at least 15 amps.
is located on the driver side of
Before adding electrical the engine compartment,
equipment, check with your between the engine air cleaner 4. Before starting the engine, be
dealer. If you do not, the engine and the windshield washer fluid sure to unplug and store the
might not perform properly. Any reservoir. See Engine cord as it was before to keep it
resulting damage would not be Compartment Overview on away from moving engine parts.
covered by the vehicle warranty. page 10‑5. If you do not, it could be
3. Plug the cord into a normal, damaged.
Engine Heater grounded 110-volt AC outlet. The length of time the heater should
The engine coolant heater can remain plugged in depends on
provide easier starting and better several factors. Ask a dealer in the
fuel economy during engine area where you will be parking the
warm-up in cold weather conditions vehicle for the best advice on this.
at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles

Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park WARNING (Continued)

Power (RAP) 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
These vehicle accessories can be set the parking brake. See It is dangerous to get out of the
used for up to 10 minutes after the Parking Brake on page 9‑26 for vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
ignition key is turned off: more information. in P (Park) with the parking brake
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
. Audio System
by holding in the button on the Do not leave the vehicle when the
. Power Windows shift lever and pushing the shift engine is running. If you have left
. Sunroof (if equipped) lever all the way toward the front the engine running, the vehicle
of the vehicle. can move suddenly. You or others
Power to the windows and sunroof
will work up to 10 minutes or until a 3. Turn the ignition key to could be injured. To be sure the
door is opened. LOCK/OFF. vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
The radio continues to work for 4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle always set the parking brake and
10 minutes or until the driver door is move the shift lever to P (Park).
opened. with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on
For an additional 10 minutes of page 9‑18. If you are towing a
operation, close all the doors and Leaving the Vehicle with the trailer, see Driving Characteristics
turn the key to ON/RUN and then Engine Running and Towing Tips on page 9‑42.
back to LOCK/OFF.
All these features will work when the { WARNING If you have to leave the vehicle with
key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ the engine running, be sure the
ACCESSORY positions. It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle is in P (Park) and the
vehicle with the engine running. parking brake is firmly set before
It could overheat and catch fire. you leave it. After you have moved
(Continued) the shift lever into P (Park), hold the

regular brake pedal down. Then, Shifting out of Park To shift out of P (Park):
see if you can move the shift lever 1. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.
away from P (Park) without first The vehicle is equipped with an
pushing the button. electronic shift lock release system. 2. Apply the brake pedal.
The shift lock release is
If you can, it means that the shift designed to: 3. Press the shift lever button.
lever was not fully locked in 4. Move the shift lever to the
P (Park).
. Prevent ignition key removal
desired position.
unless the shift lever is in
Torque Lock P (Park) with the shift lever If you still are unable to shift out of
Torque lock is when the weight of button fully released, and P (Park):
the vehicle puts too much force on . Prevent movement of the shift 1. Fully release the shift lever
the parking pawl in the lever out of P (Park), unless the button.
transmission. This happens when ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ 2. While holding down the brake
parking on a hill and shifting the ACCESSORY and the regular pedal, press the shift lever
transmission into P (Park) is not brake pedal is applied. button again.
done properly and then it is difficult
The shift lock release is always 3. Move the shift lever to the
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
functional except in the case of an desired position.
torque lock, set the parking brake
uncharged or low voltage (less than
and then shift into P (Park). To find If you still cannot move the shift
9-volt) battery.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” lever from P (Park), see your dealer.
listed previously. If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
If torque lock does occur, your
try charging or jump starting the
vehicle may need to be pushed
battery. See Jump Starting on
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).

Parking over Things Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

That Burn
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
{ WARNING Engine exhaust contains carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)

Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ WARNING
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
It is better not to park with the
engine running. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
If the vehicle is left with the engine firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move. Do not leave the vehicle when the
See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑18 engine is running. If you have left
and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑20. the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
If parking on a hill and pulling a
could be injured. To be sure the
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑42. vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
P (Park): This position locks the page 9‑18 and Driving
front wheels. It is the best position Characteristics and Towing Tips
to use when starting the engine on page 9‑42.
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. With the ignition in ON/
RUN, fully apply the regular brake,

then press the button on the back of the vehicle is already moving, use D (Drive): This position is for
the shift lever before shifting from N (Neutral) only. Also, use normal driving. It provides the best
P (Park). If you cannot shift out of N (Neutral) when the vehicle is fuel economy. If you need more
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift being towed. power for passing, and you are:
lever, then push the shift lever all . Going less than 56 km/h
the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
{ WARNING (35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
press the shift lever button and Shifting into a drive gear while the
move the shift lever into another engine is running at high speed is
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
gear. See Shifting out of Park on dangerous. Unless your foot is more, push the accelerator all
page 9‑19. firmly on the brake pedal, the the way down.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to vehicle could move very rapidly. Notice: If the vehicle seems to
back up. You could lose control and hit accelerate slowly or not shift
people or objects. Do not shift gears when you go faster, and
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) you continue to drive the vehicle
while the vehicle is moving into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed. that way, you could damage the
forward could damage the transmission. Have the vehicle
transmission. The repairs would serviced right away. You can
not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or drive in L (Low) when you are
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only N (Neutral) with the engine driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
after the vehicle is stopped. running at high speed may and D (Drive) for higher speeds
To rock the vehicle back and forth to damage the transmission. The until then.
get out of snow, ice, or sand without repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,
damaging the transmission, see If with your foot off the brake pedal,
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9. engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle. the vehicle may roll. This is normal
N (Neutral): In this position, the and is due to the torque converter
engine does not connect with the designed to improve fuel economy
wheels. To restart the engine when

and performance. Use the brake to next to the L in the DIC. See Driver
hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not use Information Center (DIC) (Without
the accelerator pedal. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 or Driver
L (Low): This position gives you Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
access to gear ranges. This Buttons) on page 5‑23 for more
provides more engine braking but information. The number displayed
lower fuel economy than D (Drive). in the DIC is the highest gear that
You can use it on very steep hills, the transmission will be allowed to
or in deep snow or mud. See operate in. This means that all
Manual Mode on page 9‑23. gears below that number are
available. For example, when
4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,
Manual Mode 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
To use this feature: automatically shifted by the vehicle.
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). The transmission will not shift into
2. Press the plus/minus button on 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
ERS mode allows you to choose the used or you shift back into D (Drive).
top-gear limit of the transmission the shift lever, to increase or
and the vehicle's speed while decrease the gear range While in L (Low), the transmission
driving downhill or towing a trailer. available. will prevent shifting to a lower gear
The vehicle has an electronic shift range if the engine speed is too
When you shift from D (Drive) to
position indicator within the high. You have a brief period of time
L (Low), the transmission will shift to
instrument panel cluster. When to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed
a pre-determined lower gear range.
using the ERS mode a number will The highest gear available for this is not reduced within the time
display next to the L, indicating the allowed, the lower gear range shift
pre-determined range is displayed
current gear that has been selected. will not be completed. You must
further slow the vehicle, then press
the − (Minus) button to the desired
lower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade Braking is Automatic Engine Grade Drive Systems

not available when the ERS is Braking
active. It is available in D (Drive) for
both normal and Tow/Haul mode. Automatic Engine Grade Braking All-Wheel Drive
While using the ERS, cruise control assists when driving on a downhill
Vehicles with this feature transfer
and the Tow/Haul mode can be grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
engine power, as required, to all
used. See Tow/Haul Mode following. automatically implementing a shift
four wheels. It is fully automatic, and
schedule that uses the engine and
adjusts itself as needed for road
the transmission to slow the vehicle.
Tow/Haul Mode The system will automatically
conditions.
_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may command downshifts to reduce When using a compact spare tire on
have a Tow/Haul mode. vehicle speed, until the brake pedal an AWD vehicle, the system
is no longer being pressed. automatically detects the compact
The button is located on the
spare and reduces AWD
instrument panel under the climate While in the Electronic Range
performance to protect the system.
controls. Select (ERS) mode, grade braking
To restore full AWD operation and
Push the button to activate the is deactivated, allowing the driver to
prevent excessive wear on the
system. Push it again to deactivate select a range and limiting the
system, replace the compact spare
the system. You can use this feature highest gear available. Grade
with a full-size tire as soon as
to assist when towing or hauling a braking is available for normal
possible. See Compact Spare Tire
heavy load. driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
on page 10‑65.
When Tow/Haul is activated the See Automatic Transmission on
Tow/Haul symbol will come on in the page 9‑21.
instrument cluster. See “Tow/Haul
Mode” under Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑42 for
more information.

Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it

becomes necessary to slam on the
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
When the engine is started and the normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
checks itself. A momentary motor or
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while ABS allows the driver to steer and
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might brake at the same time. In many
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this there will not be enough time to
warning light stays on. See Antilock apply the brakes if that vehicle
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑20.

Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist

brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving
brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the
driving. stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The
foot up off the park brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake
If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake
To set the parking brake, hold the
when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the
regular brake pedal down, then
system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates.
push the parking brake pedal down.
a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsation or
If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on. pedal movement during this time is
system warning light will come on. normal and the driver should
If you are towing a trailer and are
See Brake System Warning Light on continue to apply the brake pedal as
parking on a hill, see Driving
page 5‑19. the driving situation dictates. The
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑42. brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems SERVICE STABILITRAK, the
StabiliTrak light will come on and
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist stay and four chimes are heard.
(HSA) feature, which may be useful StabiliTrak® System If these conditions are observed,
when the vehicle is stopped on a The vehicle has the StabiliTrak turn the vehicle off, wait
grade. This feature is designed to system which combines antilock 15 seconds, and then turn it back
prevent the vehicle from rolling, brake, traction, and stability control on again to reset the system. If any
either forward or rearward, during systems and helps the driver of these messages still appear on
vehicle drive off. After the driver maintain directional control of the the Driver Information Center (DIC),
completely stops and holds the vehicle in most driving conditions. the vehicle should be taken in for
vehicle in a complete standstill on a service. For more information on the
grade, HSA will be automatically When you first start the vehicle and DIC messages, see Ride Control
activated. During the transition begin to drive away, the system System Messages on page 5‑37.
period between when the driver performs several diagnostic checks
releases the brake pedal and starts to ensure there are no problems.
to accelerate to drive off on a grade, The system may be heard or felt
HSA holds the braking pressure to while it is working. This is normal
ensure that there is no rolling. The and does not mean there is a
brakes will automatically release problem with the vehicle. The
when the accelerator pedal is system should initialize before the
applied within the two-second vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
window. It will not activate if the In some cases, it may take The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of instrument cluster when the system
downhill, or if the vehicle is facing driving before the system initializes. is both on and activated.
uphill and in R (Reverse). If the system fails to turn on or The system may be heard or felt
activate, one of the following while it is working; this is normal.
messages will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC):
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,

system. See “Traction Control The traction control system is

Operation” following for more enabled automatically when the
information. vehicle is started. It will activate and
When the traction control system the StabiliTrak light will flash if it
has been turned off, system noises senses that any of the wheels are
may be heard and felt as a result of spinning or beginning to lose
The traction control button is located the brake-traction control working. traction while driving. If traction
on the instrument panel. control is turned off, only the
It is recommended to leave the brake-traction control portion of
The traction control part of system on for normal driving traction control will work. The
StabiliTrak can be turned off by conditions, but it may be necessary engine speed management will be
pressing and releasing the traction to turn the system off if the vehicle disabled. In this mode, engine
control button. is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow, power is not reduced automatically
Traction control can be turned on by and you want to “rock” the vehicle to and the driven wheels can spin
pressing and releasing the traction attempt to free it. It may also be more freely. This can cause the
control button and the appropriate necessary to turn off the system brake-traction control to activate
TRACTION CONTROL ON when driving in extreme off-road constantly.
message will be displayed, if not conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
automatically shut off for any other is allowed to spin excessively
reason. on page 9‑9.
while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake
When the traction control system is Traction Control Operation warning lights, and any relevant
turned off, the appropriate DIC messages are displayed, the
The traction control system is part of
TRACTION CONTROL OFF transfer case could be damaged.
the StabiliTrak system. Traction
message will be displayed on the The repairs would not be covered
control limits wheel spin by reducing
DIC. The vehicle will still have by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power to the wheels (engine
brake-traction control when traction engine power and do not spin the
speed management) and by
control is off, but will not be able to applying the brakes as necessary.
use the engine speed management

wheel(s) excessively while these Cruise Control

lights and messages are
displayed. With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
The traction control system may
be maintained without keeping your
activate on dry or rough roads or
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
under conditions such as heavy
control does not work at speeds
acceleration while turning or abrupt
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens, a When the brakes are applied, the
reduction in acceleration may be cruise control is disengaged.
noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal. { WARNING
If cruise control is being used when The cruise control buttons are
the system activates, the StabiliTrak Cruise control can be dangerous located on left side of the steering
light will flash and cruise control will where you cannot drive safely at wheel.
a steady speed. So, do not use
automatically disengage. Cruise
the cruise control on winding
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise
control may be reengaged when control on and off. The indicator
road conditions allow. See Cruise roads or in heavy traffic. comes on when the cruise control
Control on page 9‑29. Cruise control can be dangerous is on.
StabiliTrak may also turn off on slippery roads. On such roads, + RES (Resume/Accelerate):
automatically if it determines that a fast changes in tire traction can Press briefly to make the vehicle
problem exists with the system. cause excessive wheel slip, and resume to a previously set speed,
If the problem does not clear itself you could lose control. Do not use or press and hold to accelerate.
after restarting the vehicle, see your cruise control on slippery roads.
dealer for service. SET–: Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or to make
the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengage Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using
cruise control without erasing the If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control
set speed from memory. desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is
Setting Cruise Control are applied, the cruise control is already activated:
disengaged without erasing the set . Press and hold the SET– button
If the cruise button is on when not in speed from memory.
use, it could get bumped and go into on the steering wheel until the
cruise when not desired. Keep the Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h lower speed desired is reached,
cruise control switch off when cruise (25 mph) or greater, press the +RES then release it.
is not being used. button on the steering wheel. The . To slow down in small amounts,
vehicle returns to the previously set press the SET– button briefly.
The cruise control light on the speed and stays there.
instrument cluster comes on after Each time this is done, the
the cruise control has been set to Increasing Speed While Using vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
the desired speed. Cruise Control (1 mph) slower.
If the cruise control system is Passing Another Vehicle While
1. Press the I button to turn the
already activated: Using Cruise Control
cruise control system on.
. Press and hold the +RES button Use the accelerator pedal to
2. Get up to the speed desired.
on the steering wheel until the increase vehicle speed. When you
3. Press and release the SET– desired speed is reached, then take your foot off the pedal, the
button located on the steering release it. vehicle will slow down to the
wheel. . previously set cruise speed.
To increase vehicle speed in
4. Take your foot off the small increments, press the
accelerator. +RES button briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Using Cruise Control on Hills Object Detection WARNING (Continued)

How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
Systems
It is not available at speeds
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, Ultrasonic Parking Assist greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To
you might have to step on the prevent injury, death, or vehicle
If available, the Ultrasonic Rear damage, even with URPA, always
accelerator pedal to maintain the Parking Assist (URPA) system
vehicle speed. When going check the area around the vehicle
assists the driver with parking and
downhill, you might have to brake or and check all mirrors before
avoiding objects while in
shift to a lower gear to keep the backing.
R (Reverse). URPA operates at
vehicle speed down. When the speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
brakes are applied the cruise control The sensors on the rear bumper are How the System Works
is disengaged. used to detect objects up to
2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and URPA comes on automatically when
Ending Cruise Control the shift lever is moved into
at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
There are three ways to end cruise and below liftgate level. R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
control: to indicate the system is working.
. Step lightly on the brake pedal. { WARNING URPA operates only at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
. Press the [ button. The URPA system does not An obstacle is indicated by audible
. To turn off the cruise control, detect children, pedestrians, beeps. The interval between the
press T on the steering wheel. bicyclists, animals, or objects beeps becomes shorter as the
below the bumper or that are too vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
Erasing Speed Memory close or too far from the vehicle. When the distance is less than
The cruise control set speed is (Continued) 30 cm (12 in) the beeping is a
erased from memory by pressing continuous tone for five seconds.
T or if the ignition is turned off.

To be detected, objects must be at PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE

. The bumper is damaged. Take
least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground OWNERS MANUAL: This the vehicle to your dealer to
and below liftgate level. Objects message can occur under the repair the system.
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from following conditions: . Other conditions, such as
the rear bumper. This detection . The ultrasonic sensors are not vibrations from a jackhammer or
distance may be less during warmer clean. Keep the vehicle's rear the compression of air brakes on
or humid weather. bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, a very large truck, are affecting
ice, and slush. For cleaning system performance.
Turning the System On and Off
instructions, see Exterior Care
The system can be disabled through on page 10‑73. Side Blind Zone
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Park Assist” under Driver
. The park assist sensors are Alert (SBZA)
Information Center (DIC) (Without covered by frost or ice. Frost or If available, the Side Blind Zone
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 or Driver ice can form around and behind Alert system is a lane changing aid
Information Center (DIC) (With DIC the sensors and may not always that assists drivers with avoiding
Buttons) on page 5‑23 for more be seen; this can occur after crashes that occur with vehicles in
information. washing the vehicle in cold the side blind zones.
weather. The message may not
URPA defaults to the on setting clear until the frost or ice has
each time the vehicle is started. melted. { WARNING
When the System Does Not . A trailer was attached to the SBZA does not detect vehicles
Seem to Work Properly vehicle, or an object was rapidly approaching outside of the
The following messages may be hanging out of the liftgate during side blind zones, pedestrians,
displayed on the DIC: the last drive cycle. Once the bicyclists, or animals. Failure to
object is removed, URPA will use proper care when changing
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this return to normal operation. lanes may result in injury, death,
message occurs, take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
. A tow bar is attached to the (Continued)
vehicle.

5.0 m (16 ft). The height of the zone When the vehicle is started, both
WARNING (Continued) is approximately between outside mirror SBZA displays will
0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off the briefly come on to indicate the
or vehicle damage. Before ground. system is operating. When the
making a lane change, always vehicle is moving forward, the left or
check mirrors, glance over your Use caution while changing lanes
when towing a trailer, as the SBZA right side mirror display will light up
shoulder, and use the turn if a vehicle is detected in that blind
signals. detection zones that extend back
from the sides of the vehicle do not zone. If the turn signal is activated
move further back when a trailer is and a vehicle is also detected on
towed. the same side, the display will flash
to give you extra warning not to
How the System Works change lanes.
The SBZA symbol lights up in the At speeds greater then 32 km/h
side mirrors when the system (20 mph), SBZA displays may come
detects a vehicle in the side blind on when approaching or passing
zone, indicating it may be unsafe to other vehicles. SBZA displays may
change lanes. Before making a lane come on when a passed vehicle
change, check the SBZA display, remains in or drops back into the
check all mirrors, glance over your detection zone. SBZA can be
shoulder, and use the turn signals. disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) (Without
SBZA Detection Zones DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 or Driver
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
approximately one lane over from Buttons) on page 5‑23. If SBZA is
both sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m disabled by the driver, the SBZA
(11 ft). This zone starts at each side Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror mirror displays will not light up.
mirror and goes back approximately Display Display

When the System Does Not Seem TEMPORARILY OFF message after your blind zone, or the vehicle is
To Work Properly cleaning the bumper, see your passing through an open field of
Missed alerts can occur under dealer. view area, such as the desert,
normal circumstances and will The SBZA displays may remain on where there is insufficient data for
increase in wet conditions. The if a trailer is attached to the vehicle, operation. This message may also
system does not need to be or a bicycle or object is extending activate during heavy rain or due to
serviced. SBZA is designed to out to either side of the vehicle. road spray. The vehicle does not
ignore stationary objects; however, need service. For cleaning, see
When SBZA is disabled for any “Washing the Vehicle” under
the system may occasionally light reason other than the driver turning
up due to guard rails, signs, trees, Exterior Care on page 10‑73.
it off, it cannot be turned back on.
shrubs, and other stationary objects. The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ON SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
This is normal system operation, the option will not be selectable if the SYSTEM: If this message appears,
vehicle does not need service. conditions for normal system both SBZA displays will remain on
If the SBZA displays do not light up operation are not met. indicating there is a problem with
when the system is on and vehicles the SBZA system. If these displays
are in the blind zone, the system SBZA Error Messages remain on after continued driving,
may need service. Take the vehicle The following messages may the system needs service. Take the
to your dealer. appear in the DIC: vehicle to your dealer.
SBZA does not operate when the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT FCC Information
SBZA sensors in the left or right SYSTEM OFF: This message See Radio Frequency Statement on
corners of the rear bumper are indicates that the driver has turned page 13‑21 for information
covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, the system off. regarding Part 15 of the Federal
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For SIDE DETECTION SYS Communications Commission (FCC)
cleaning instructions, see “Washing TEMPORARILY OFF: This rules and Industry Canada
the Vehicle” under Exterior Care on message indicates that the SBZA Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
page 10‑73. If the DIC still displays system is disabled either because
the SIDE DETECTION SYS the sensor cannot detect vehicles in

Rear Vision Vehicles with RVC on the system display is now enabled and
Rearview Mirror the display will appear in the mirror
Camera (RVC) normally.
The vehicle may have an RVC The rear vision camera system is
system. Read this entire section designed to help the driver when Vehicles with RVC on the
before using it. backing up by displaying a view of Infotainment System
the area behind the vehicle. When
the key is in the ON/RUN position The rear vision camera system is
{ WARNING and the driver shifts the vehicle into designed to help the driver when
R (Reverse), the video image backing up by displaying a view of
The RVC system does not display the area behind the vehicle. When
automatically appears on the inside
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, rearview mirror. Once the driver the driver shifts the vehicle into
animals, or any other object shifts out of R (Reverse), the video R (Reverse), the video image
located outside the camera's field image automatically disappears automatically appears on the
of view, below the bumper, from the inside rearview mirror. infotainment screen. Once the driver
or under the vehicle. Perceived shifts out of R (Reverse), the screen
distances may be different from Turning the Rear Vision Camera will go back to the last screen that
actual distances. Do not back the System Off or On had been displayed, after a delay.
vehicle using only the RVC To turn off the rear vision camera Turning the Rear Vision Camera
screen, during longer, higher system, press and hold z , located System On or Off
speed backing maneuvers, on the inside rearview mirror, until To turn the rear vision camera
or where there could be cross the left indicator light turns off. The system on or off:
traffic. Failure to use proper care rear vision camera display is now
before backing may result in disabled. 1. Shift into P (Park).
injury, death, or vehicle damage. 2. Press the Settings menu button
To turn the rear vision camera
Always check behind and around on the Home screen of the
the vehicle before backing. system on again, press and hold z
infotainment system.
until the left indicator light
illuminates. The rear vision camera

3. Select the Rear Camera screen The symbols appear when an object Use caution while backing up when
button. The Rear Camera screen has been detected by the URPA towing a trailer, as the RCTA
displays. system. The symbol may cover the detection zones that extend out
4. Select Rear Camera display and object when viewing the RVC from the back of your vehicle do not
then select ON or OFF. screen. move further back when a trailer is
To turn the symbols on or off: towed.
The display remains on after shifting
out of R (Reverse) for approximately 1. Shift into P (Park). The RCTA system can be disabled
10 seconds. The display can be through the Driver Information
2. Press the Settings menu button Center (DIC). See Driver
canceled during this time by on the Home screen of the
performing one of the following: Information Center (DIC) (Without
infotainment system. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑28 or Driver
. Press a hard key on the 3. Select the Rear Camera screen Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
infotainment system. button. The Rear Camera screen Buttons) on page 5‑23.
. Shift into P (Park). displays. Rear Vision Camera Location
. Reach a vehicle speed of 4. Select Park Assist Symbols and The camera is located above the
8 km/h (5 mph). then select ON or OFF. license plate.
Symbols Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) The area displayed by the camera is
The RVC system may have a On vehicles with RCTA, a red limited and does not display objects
feature that lets the driver view warning triangle with an arrow may that are close to either corner or
symbols on the RVC screen while also display on the RVC screen to under the bumper. The area
using the rear vision camera. The warn of traffic coming from either displayed can vary depending on
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist direction. Three beeps will sound vehicle orientation or road
(URPA) system must not be from the speaker on that side. This conditions. The distance of the
disabled to use the caution symbols. system detects objects coming from image that appears on the screen
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or differs from the actual distance.
page 9‑31. right side behind the vehicle.

The following illustrations show the 2. Corner of the rear bumper.

. The back of the vehicle is in an
field of view that the camera accident. The position and
provides. When the System Does Not mounting angle of the camera
Seem To Work Properly can change or the camera can
The rear vision camera system be affected. Be sure to have the
might not work properly or display a camera and its position and
clear image if: mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
. The RVC is turned off. See
“Turning the Rear Camera
. There are extreme temperature
System On or Off” earlier in this changes.
section. The rear vision camera system
. It is dark. display in the rearview mirror may
turn off or not appear as expected
. The sun or the beam of due to one of the following
headlights is shining directly into conditions. If this occurs the left
the camera lens. indicator light on the mirror will
1. View displayed by the camera. flash.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens. . A slow flash may indicate a loss
Clean the lens, rinse it with of video signal, or no video
water, and wipe it with a soft signal present during the reverse
cloth. cycle.
1. View displayed by the camera.


. A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the Fuel
maximum allowable time during Use of the recommended fuel is an
a reverse cycle, or the display important part of the proper
has reached an Over maintenance of this vehicle. To help
Temperature limit. keep the engine clean and maintain
The fast flash conditions are optimum vehicle performance, we
used to protect the video device recommend the use of gasoline
from high temperature advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
conditions. Once conditions Gasoline.
return to normal the device will Look for the TOP TIER label on the
reset and the green indicator will fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
stop flashing. enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel
During any of these fault conditions,
the display will be blank and the of marketers providing TOP TIER Use regular unleaded gasoline with
indicator will continue to flash as Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER higher. If the octane rating is less
or until the conditions return to gasoline is only available in the U.S. than 87, an audible knocking noise,
normal. and Canada. commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
Pressing and holding z when the If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
left indicator light is flashing will turn at 87 octane or higher as soon as
off the video display along with the possible. If heavy knocking is heard
left indicator light. when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.

Gasoline Specifications See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on emission control system to work
page 5‑17. If this occurs, return to properly. In most cases, nothing
At a minimum, gasoline should meet your authorized dealer for diagnosis. should have to be added to the fuel.
ASTM specification D 4814. Some If it is determined that the condition However, some gasolines contain
gasolines contain an is caused by the type of fuel used, only the minimum amount of
octane-enhancing additive called repairs might not be covered by the additive required to meet U.S.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese vehicle warranty. Environmental Protection Agency
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend regulations. To help keep fuel
against the use of gasolines Fuels in Foreign injectors and intake valves clean
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives and avoid problems due to dirty
on page 9‑39. Countries injectors or valves, look for gasoline
Never use leaded gasoline or any that is advertised as TOP TIER
California Fuel other fuel not recommended in the Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
Requirements previous text on fuel. Costly repairs TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
caused by use of improper fuel ensure gasoline meets enhanced
If the vehicle is certified to meet would not be covered by the vehicle detergency standards developed by
California Emissions Standards, it is warranty. the auto companies. A list of
designed to operate on fuels that marketers providing TOP TIER
meet California specifications. See To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil Detergent Gasoline can be found at
the underhood emission control www.toptiergas.com.
label. If this fuel is not available in company that does business in the
states adopting California Emissions country where you will be driving. For customers who do not use TOP
Standards, the vehicle will operate TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
satisfactorily on fuels meeting Fuel Additives one bottle of GM Fuel System
federal specifications, but emission Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines tank at every engine oil change, can
control system performance might in the United States are now
be affected. The malfunction help clean deposits from fuel
required to contain additives that injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
indicator lamp could turn on and the help prevent engine and fuel system
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. System Treatment PLUS is the only
deposits from forming, allowing the

gasoline additive recommended by additive called

General Motors. It is available at methylcyclopentadienyl manganese WARNING (Continued)
your dealer. tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
. Keep sparks, flames, and
Gasolines containing oxygenates, smoking materials away
such as ethers and ethanol, and fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. from fuel.
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We Fuels containing MMT can reduce . Do not leave the fuel pump
recommend that you use these spark plug life and affect emission unattended.
gasolines, if they comply with the control system performance. The . Do not reenter the vehicle
specifications described earlier. malfunction indicator lamp might while pumping fuel.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service. . Keep children away from the
other fuels containing more than fuel pump and never let
15% ethanol must not be used in children pump fuel.
vehicles that were not designed for Filling the Tank
those fuels. . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
Notice: This vehicle was not { WARNING cap is opened too quickly.
This spray can happen if the
designed for fuel that contains tank is nearly full, and is
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
methanol. Do not use fuel more likely in hot weather.
violently and can cause injury or
containing methanol. It can Open the fuel cap slowly and
corrode metal parts in the fuel death.
wait for any hiss noise to stop
system and also damage plastic . To help avoid injuries to you then unscrew the cap all
and rubber parts. That damage and others, read and follow the way
would not be covered under the all the instructions on the fuel
vehicle warranty. pump island.
The tethered fuel cap is located
Some gasolines that are not . Turn off the engine when
behind a hinged fuel door on the
reformulated for low emissions can refueling.
driver side of the vehicle.
contain an octane-enhancing (Continued)

To open the fuel door, push the Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Notice: If a new fuel cap is
rearward center edge in and release top off or overfill the tank and wait a needed, be sure to get the right
and it will open. few seconds after you have finished type of cap from your dealer. The
pumping before removing the wrong type of fuel cap might not
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted fit properly, might cause the
surfaces as soon as possible. See malfunction indicator lamp to
Exterior Care on page 10‑73. light, and could damage the fuel
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it tank and emissions system. See
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
the cap is fully installed. The page 5‑17.
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or Filling a Portable Fuel
improperly installed. This would Container
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17.
{ WARNING
To remove the fuel cap, turn it Filling a portable fuel container
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel { WARNING while it is in the vehicle can cause
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is fuel vapors that can ignite either
released too soon, it will spring back If a fire starts while you are by static electricity or other
to the right. refueling, do not remove the means. You or others could be
While refueling, hang the tethered nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by badly burned and the vehicle
fuel cap from the hook on the shutting off the pump or by could be damaged. Always:
fuel door. notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
. Use approved fuel
containers.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued) Towing Driving Characteristics

and Towing Tips
. Remove container from General Towing
vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed Driving with a Trailer
before filling.
Information
When towing a trailer:
Only use towing equipment that has
. Place container on the . Become familiar with the state
been designed for the vehicle.
ground. and local laws that apply
Contact your dealer or trailering
. Place the nozzle inside the fill dealer for assistance with preparing specifically to trailer towing.
opening of the container the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read . Do not tow a trailer during the
before dispensing fuel, and the entire section before towing a first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent
keep it in contact with the fill trailer. damage to the engine, axle or
opening until filling is other parts.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see
complete.
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑69. . Then, during the first 800 km
. Do not smoke while For towing the vehicle behind (500 mi) trailer towing, do not
pumping fuel. another vehicle such as a motor drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
home, see Recreational Vehicle do not make starts at full throttle.
Towing on page 10‑70. . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)
but M (Manual Mode) is
recommended. See Manual
Mode on page 9‑23. Use a lower
gear if the transmission shifts
too often.

Towing a trailer requires a certain trailer, which mainly occurs during

{ WARNING amount of experience. The cornering. This is normal when
combination you are driving is towing heavier trailers.
When towing a trailer, exhaust longer and not as responsive as the
gases may collect at the rear of vehicle itself. Get acquainted with Following Distance
the vehicle and enter if the the handling and braking of the rig Stay at least twice as far behind the
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most before setting out for the open road. vehicle ahead as you would when
window is open. driving the vehicle without a trailer.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
When towing a trailer: parts and attachments, safety This can help to avoid situations
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, that require heavy braking and
. Do not drive with the liftgate, sudden turns.
trunk/hatch, or rear-most tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
window open. electric brakes, start the Passing
combination moving and then apply
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand More passing distance is needed
or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work. when towing a trailer. Because the
panel. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
During the trip, check occasionally farther beyond the passed vehicle
. Also adjust the Climate to be sure that the load is secure
Control system to a setting before returning to the lane.
and the lamps and any trailer
that brings in only outside air. brakes still work. Backing Up
See “Climate Control
Systems” in the Index. Towing with a Stability Control Hold the bottom of the steering
System wheel with one hand. To move the
For more information about trailer to the left, move your hand to
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine When towing, the sound of the the left. To move the trailer to the
Exhaust on page 9‑20. stability control system might be right, move your hand to the right.
heard. The system is reacting to the Always back up slowly and,
vehicle movement caused by the if possible, have someone
guide you.

Making Turns burned out. Check occasionally to while parked, preferably on level
be sure the trailer bulbs are still ground, with the transmission in
Notice: Making very sharp turns
working. P (Park) for a few minutes before
while trailering could cause the
turning the engine off. If the
trailer to come in contact with the Driving on Grades overheat warning comes on, see
vehicle. The vehicle could be
Reduce speed and shift to a lower Engine Overheating on page 10‑16.
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering. gear before starting down a long or
steep downgrade. If the
Parking on Hills
When turning with a trailer, make transmission is not shifted down, the
wider turns than normal so the brakes might have to be used so { WARNING
trailer will not strike soft shoulders, much that they would get hot and no
curbs, road signs, trees or other longer work well. Parking the vehicle on a hill with
objects. Use the turn signal well in the trailer attached can be
advance and avoid jerky or sudden The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). dangerous. If something goes
maneuvers. Use a lower gear if the transmission wrong, the rig could start to move.
shifts too often. People can be injured, and both
Turn Signals When Towing a The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if the vehicle and the trailer can be
Trailer the transmission shifts too often. damaged. When possible, always
The turn signal indicators on the See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑24. park the rig on a flat surface.
instrument cluster flash whenever When towing at high altitude on
signaling a turn or lane change. steep uphill grades, engine coolant If parking the rig on a hill:
Properly hooked up, the trailer boils at a lower temperature than at
lamps also flash, telling other normal altitudes. If the engine is 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
drivers the vehicle is turning, turned off immediately after towing not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
changing lanes or stopping. at high altitude on steep uphill the wheels into the curb if facing
grades, the vehicle could show downhill or into traffic if facing
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
signs similar to engine overheating. uphill.
the instrument cluster flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are To avoid this, let the engine run

2. Have someone place chocks Maintenance When Trailer

. The weight of the trailer tongue
under the trailer wheels. Towing . The total weight on the vehicle's
3. When the wheel chocks are in The vehicle needs service more tires
place, release the brake pedal often when pulling a trailer. See the Weight of the Trailer
until the chocks absorb the load. Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3. Things that are How heavy can a trailer safely be?
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift especially important in trailer Speed, altitude, road grades,
into P (Park). operation are automatic outside temperature, special
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle equipment, and the amount of
5. Release the brake pedal. lubricant, belts, cooling system and tongue weight the vehicle can carry
Leaving After Parking on a Hill brake system. Inspect these before must be considered. See “Weight of
and during the trip. the Trailer Tongue” later in this
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal section for more information.
while you: Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Maximum trailer weight is calculated
. Start the engine. assuming only the driver is in the
Engine Cooling When Trailer tow vehicle and it has all the
. Shift into a gear.
Towing required trailering equipment. The
. Release the parking brake.
The cooling system may temporarily weight of additional optional
2. Let up on the brake pedal. overheat during severe operating equipment, passengers and cargo in
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is conditions. See Engine Overheating the tow vehicle must be subtracted
clear of the chocks. on page 10‑16. from the maximum trailer weight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up Use the following chart to determine
and store the chocks.
Trailer Towing how much the vehicle can weigh,
Three important considerations based upon the vehicle model and
have to do with weight: options.
. The weight of the trailer

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg)
All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering cargo carried in it, and the people
information or advice. See who will be riding in the vehicle.
Customer Assistance Offices (U.S. If there are a lot of options,
and Canada) on page 13‑5 or equipment, passengers or cargo in
Customer Assistance Offices the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more weight the vehicle can carry, which
information. will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
Weight of the Trailer Tongue the tongue load must be added to
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is the GVW because the vehicle will
an important weight to measure be carrying that weight, too. See
because it affects the total gross Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any

If a weight-carrying hitch or a It is important that the vehicle does Towing Equipment

weight-distributing hitch is being not exceed any of its ratings —
used, the trailer tongue (1) should GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Hitches
weigh 10-15 percent of the total Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. It is important to have the correct
loaded trailer weight (2). The only way to be sure it is not hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
After loading the trailer, weigh the exceeding any of these ratings is to trucks going by, and rough roads
trailer and then the tongue, weigh the vehicle and trailer. are a few reasons why the right
separately, to see if the weights are Total Weight on the Vehicle's hitch is needed.
proper. If they are not, adjustments Tires . The rear bumper on the vehicle
might be made by moving some is not intended for hitches. Do
items around in the trailer. Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These not attach rental hitches or other
Trailering may be limited by the numbers can be found on the bumper-type hitches to it. Use
vehicle's ability to carry tongue Certification label or see Vehicle only a frame-mounted hitch that
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause Load Limits on page 9‑9 for more does not attach to the bumper.
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR information. Do not go over the . Will any holes be made in the
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or GVW limit for the vehicle, or the body of the vehicle when the
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle GAWR, including the weight of the trailer hitch is installed? If so,
Weight Rating). The effect of trailer tongue. If using a weight then be sure to seal the holes
additional weight may reduce the distributing hitch, do not go over the when the hitch is removed. If the
trailering capacity more than the rear axle limit before applying the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
total of the additional weight. weight distribution spring bars. and deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) from the exhaust may get
into the vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑20.

Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Trailer Wiring Harness

Weight Carrying Hitches
Always attach chains between the Basic Trailer Wiring
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of The trailer wiring harness, with a
the trailer to help prevent the tongue seven-pin connector, is located at
from contacting the road if it the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
becomes separated from the hitch. the vehicle's frame. The harness
Always leave just enough slack so connector can be plugged into a
the rig can turn. Never allow safety seven-pin universal heavy-duty
chains to drag on the ground. trailer connector available through
your dealer.
Trailer Brakes The seven-wire harness contains
A loaded trailer that weighs more the following trailer circuits:
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
have its own brake system that is
1. Body-to-Ground Distance adequate for the weight of the
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
2. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow Signal
the instructions for the trailer brakes . Brown: Taillamps
When using a weight-distributing so they are installed, adjusted, and
hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so maintained properly.
. Black: Ground
that the distance (1) remains the
Because the vehicle has antilock
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
same both before and after coupling
the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the . Red/Black: Battery Feed
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.

*The fuse for this circuit is installed Electric Trailer Brake Control Conversions and
in the underhood electrical center, Wiring Provisions
but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an
Add-Ons
They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller are
dealer or a qualified service center. included with the vehicle as part of Add-On Electrical
If the back-up lamp circuit is not the trailer wiring package. The Equipment
functional, contact your dealer. instrument panel contains blunt cut
wires above the parking brake Notice: Some electrical
If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is equipment can damage the
being charged, press the Tow/Haul assembly for the electric trailer
brake controller. The harness vehicle or cause components to
mode switch located on the center not work and would not be
console near the climate controls. contains the following wires:
covered by the warranty. Always
This will boost the vehicle system . Red/Black: Power Supply check with your dealer before
voltage and properly charge the . White: Brake Switch Signal adding electrical equipment.
battery. If the trailer is too light for
Tow/Haul mode, turn on the . Gray: Illumination Add-on equipment can drain the
headlamps (non-HID only) as a vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal vehicle is not operating.
second way to boost the vehicle
system and charge the battery.
. Black: Ground The vehicle has an airbag system.
The electric trailer brake controller Before attempting to add anything
should be installed by your dealer or electrical to the vehicle, see
a qualified service center. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑34.

2 NOTES

Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Overheated Engine

Protection
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-18 Electrical System
General Information Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Fuses and Circuit
California Proposition Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Engine Compartment Fuse
California Perchlorate All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-2 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-22 Instrument Panel Fuse
Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Lock Control Function
Vehicle Checks Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Wheels and Tires
Doing Your Own Ignition Transmission Lock Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Park Brake and P (Park) Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Engine Compartment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-23 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Wiper Blade Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Tire Terminology and
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Headlamp Aiming Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Automatic Transmission
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Bulb Replacement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-27

10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information cause cancer and birth defects or
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 other reproductive harm. Engine
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 For service and parts needs, visit exhaust, many parts and systems,
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive many fluids, and some component
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 genuine GM parts and GM-trained wear by-products contain and/or
Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people. emit these chemicals.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Genuine GM parts have one of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks: California Perchlorate
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54 Materials Requirements
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Certain types of automotive
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 applications, such as airbag
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-65 and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
Jump Starting may contain perchlorate materials.
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Special handling may be necessary.
Towing For additional information, see
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-69 www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Recreational Vehicle perchlorate.
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Accessories and
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 California Proposition Modifications
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 65 Warning Adding non‐dealer accessories or
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Most motor vehicles, including this making modifications to the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals can affect vehicle performance and
known to the State of California to safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and

Vehicle Care 10-3
handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system.
aerodynamics, durability, and Before attempting to do your own
electronic systems like antilock service work, see Servicing the
brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
control. These accessories or Service Work page 3‑34.
modifications could even cause Keep a record with all parts receipts
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ WARNING and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on Maintenance Records on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have page 11‑14.
installation or use of non‐GM the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always Notice: Even small amounts of
certified parts, including control contamination can cause damage
module or software modifications, is follow owner manual procedures
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
not covered under the terms of the and consult the service manual
contaminants to contact the
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any fluids, reservoir caps,
remaining warranty coverage for service work. or dipsticks.
affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service
complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13‑17.
page 3‑34.

10-4 Vehicle Care
Hood 3. After you have partially lifted the

hood, gas struts will
To open the hood: automatically take over to lift and
hold the hood in the fully open
position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
filler caps are on properly.
Pull the hood down to close. Lower
the hood until the lifting pressure of
1. Pull the hood release handle the strut is reduced. Then allow the
with this symbol on it. It is under hood to fall and latch into place
the instrument panel on the under its own weight. Check to
driver side of the vehicle. make sure the hood is closed. If the
hood does not fully latch, gently
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull push the hood down at the front and
up on the center of the hood, center of the hood until it is
and push the secondary hood completely latched.
release to the right.

Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Compartment Overview

10-6 Vehicle Care
1. Radiator Pressure Cap. See 8. Engine Cover on page 10‑6. Engine Cover
Cooling System on page 10‑12. 9. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
2. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. View). See “Checking Engine
See Cooling System on Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10‑12. page 10‑7.
3. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. 10. Automatic Transmission Fluid
See Jump Starting on Dipstick. See “Checking the
page 10‑66. Fluid Level” under Automatic
4. Engine Compartment Fuse Transmission Fluid on
Block on page 10‑29. page 10‑10.
5. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. 11. Brake Master Cylinder

See Jump Starting on Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 10‑66. under Brakes on page 10‑19.
12. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 1. Oil Fill Cap
6. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap (Under Engine Cover). See page 10‑11. 2. Engine Cover
Power Steering Fluid on 13. Windshield Washer Fluid To remove:
page 10‑18. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on 1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine page 10‑19. 2. Raise the engine cover (2) to
Oil on page 10‑7. release it from the retainers.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall
engine cover.

Vehicle Care 10-7
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
push it back in all the way.
performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Remove it again, keeping the tip
attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
down, and check the level.
Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. When to Add Engine Oil
your investment: See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑5 for the location of the
. Always use engine oil approved engine oil dipstick.
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See Obtaining an accurate oil level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” reading is essential:
in this section. 1. If the engine has been running
. Check the engine oil level recently, turn off the engine and
regularly and maintain the allow several minutes for the oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched
proper oil level. See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
Engine Oil” and “When to Add Checking the oil level too soon 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
Engine Oil” in this section. after engine shutoff will not and then recheck the level. See
provide an accurate oil level “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
. Change the engine oil at the reading. this section for an explanation of
appropriate time. See Engine Oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
Life System on page 10‑9.
. Always dispose of engine oil
{ WARNING oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
properly. See “What to Do with The engine oil dipstick handle page 12‑2.
Used Oil” in this section. may be hot; it could burn you. Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Use a towel or glove to touch the Oil levels above or below the
dipstick handle. acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful

10-8 Vehicle Care
to the engine. If you find that you Specification Viscosity Grade

have an oil level above the Use and ask for licensed engine oils SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
operating range, i.e., the engine with the dexos1® approved grade for the vehicle. Do not use
has so much oil that the oil level certification mark. Engine oils other viscosity grade oils such as
gets above the cross-hatched meeting the requirements for the SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
area that shows the proper vehicle should have the dexos1
operating range, the engine could Cold Temperature Operation: In an
approved certification mark. This area of extreme cold, where the
be damaged. You should drain certification mark indicates that the
out the excess oil or limit driving temperature falls below −29°C
oil has been approved to the dexos1 (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
of the vehicle and seek a service specification.
professional to remove the used. An oil of this viscosity grade
excess amount of oil. will provide easier cold starting
for the engine at extremely low
See Engine Compartment Overview temperatures. When selecting an oil
on page 10‑5 for the location of the of the appropriate viscosity grade,
engine oil fill cap. always select an oil of the correct
Add enough oil to put the level specification. See “Specification”
somewhere in the proper operating earlier in this section for more
range. Push the dipstick all the way Notice: Failure to use the information.
back in when through. recommended engine oil or
equivalent can result in engine Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Selecting the Right Engine Oil damage not covered by the Oil Flushes
Selecting the right engine oil vehicle warranty. Check with your Do not add anything to the oil. The
depends on both the proper oil dealer or service provider on recommended oils with the dexos
specification and viscosity grade. whether the oil is approved to the specification and displaying the
See Recommended Fluids and dexos1 specification. dexos certification mark are all that
Lubricants on page 11‑12. is needed for good performance and
engine protection.

Vehicle Care 10-9
Engine oil system flushes are not Engine Oil Life System and, at this time, the system must
recommended and could cause be reset. Your dealer has trained
engine damage not covered by the When to Change Engine Oil service people who will perform this
vehicle warranty. This vehicle has a computer system work and reset the system. It is also
that indicates when to change the important to check the oil regularly
What to Do with Used Oil over the course of an oil drain
engine oil and filter. This is based
Used engine oil contains certain on a combination of factors which interval and keep it at the proper
elements that can be unhealthy for include engine revolutions, engine level.
your skin and could even cause temperature, and miles driven. If the system is ever reset
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Based on driving conditions, the accidentally, the oil must be
your skin for very long. Clean your mileage at which an oil change is changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
skin and nails with soap and water, indicated can vary considerably. For since the last oil change.
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the oil life system to work properly, Remember to reset the oil life
properly dispose of clothing or rags the system must be reset every time system whenever the oil is changed.
containing used engine oil. See the the oil is changed.
manufacturer's warnings about the How to Reset the Engine Oil
use and disposal of oil products. When the system has calculated Life System
that oil life has been diminished, it
Used oil can be a threat to the indicates that an oil change is Reset the system whenever the
environment. If you change your necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE engine oil is changed so that the
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil OIL SOON message comes on. system can calculate the next
from the filter before disposal. Never Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil change. To reset the
dispose of oil by putting it in the within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). system:
trash or pouring it on the ground, It is possible that, if driving under If the vehicle does not have Driver
into sewers, or into streams or the best conditions, the oil life Information Center (DIC) buttons:
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking system might indicate that an oil
it to a place that collects used oil. change is not necessary for up to a 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
year. The engine oil and filter must with the engine off. The vehicle
be changed at least once a year must be in P (Park) to access

10-10 Vehicle Care
this display. Press the trip 3. Press and hold the set/reset Change the fluid at the intervals
odometer reset stem until OIL button until “100%” is displayed. listed in Maintenance Schedule on
LIFE REMAINING displays. Three chimes sound and the page 11‑3, and be sure to use the
2. Press and hold the trip odometer CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON transmission fluid listed in
reset stem until OIL LIFE message goes off. Recommended Fluids and
REMAINING shows “100%.” 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. Lubricants on page 11‑12.
Three chimes sound and the If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Notice: Use of the incorrect
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the automatic transmission fluid may
message goes off. vehicle is started, the engine oil life damage the vehicle, and the
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. system has not been reset. Repeat damages may not be covered by
the procedure. the vehicle warranty. Always use
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL the automatic transmission fluid
SOON message comes back on listed in Recommended Fluids
when the vehicle is started, the Automatic Transmission and Lubricants on page 11‑12.
engine oil life system has not Fluid The transmission fluid will not reach
been reset. Repeat the
It is not necessary to check the the end of the dipstick unless the
procedure.
transmission fluid level. transmission is at operating
If the vehicle has Driver Information A transmission fluid leak is the only temperature. If you need to check
Center (DIC) buttons: reason for fluid loss. If a leak the transmission fluid level, please
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, occurs, take the vehicle to the take the vehicle to your dealer.
with the engine off. dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
2. Press the vehicle information
button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays.

Vehicle Care 10-11
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air

cleaner/filter:
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)
interval. See Maintenance Schedule
on page 11‑3. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
1. Clamp
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑5 for the location of the 2. Screws
engine air cleaner/filter. 1. Ventilation Tube 3. Housing Cover
How to Inspect the Engine Air 2. Sensor 4. Filter
Cleaner/Filter 5. Base
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 1. Remove the engine cover. See
remove the filter from the vehicle Engine Cover on page 10‑6.
and lightly shake the filter (away
from vehicle) to release loose dust 2. Disconnect the cover fitting from
and dirt. If the filter remains covered the ventilation tube (1).
with dirt, a new filter is required. 3. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector from the sensor (2).
4. Loosen the outlet duct clamp (1).

10-12 Vehicle Care
5. Loosen the six housing cover (3) Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
screws (2). off, dirt can easily get into the { WARNING
6. Remove the housing cover (3) engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter An electric engine cooling fan
with outlet duct. under the hood can start up even
in place when you are driving.
7. Remove the filter (4) and any when the engine is not running
loose debris that may be found Cooling System and can cause injury. Keep
in the base (5). hands, clothing, and tools away
The cooling system allows the from any underhood electric fan.
8. Inspect or replace the filter (4). engine to maintain the correct
9. Reverse Steps 2–6 to reinstall working temperature.
the housing cover and reconnect
the electrical connector to the { WARNING
sensor.
Heater and radiator hoses, and
10. Reinstall the engine cover. See other engine parts, can be very
Engine Cover on page 10‑6. hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
{ WARNING Do not run the engine if there is a
Operating the engine with the air leak. If you run the engine, it
cleaner/filter off can cause you or could lose all coolant. That could
others to be burned. The air cause an engine fire, and you
cleaner not only cleans the air; it could be burned. Get any leak
helps to stop flames if the engine fixed before you drive the vehicle.
1. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not 2. Radiator Pressure Cap
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. 3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out
of View)

Vehicle Care 10-13
Notice: Using coolant other than What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
DEX-COOL® can cause premature drinkable water and DEX-COOL
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
coolant could require changing Adding only plain water or some This mixture:
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down
or 24 months, whichever occurs can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside
first. Any repairs would not be and other liquids, can boil before temperature.
covered by the vehicle warranty. the proper coolant mixture will.
Always use DEX-COOL . Gives boiling protection up to
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine
(silicate-free) coolant in the
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature.
vehicle.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and
Engine Coolant hot but you would not get the corrosion.
The cooling system in the vehicle is overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
filled with DEX-COOL® engine could catch fire and you or . Helps keep the proper engine
coolant. See Maintenance Schedule others could be burned. Use a temperature.
on page 11‑3 and Recommended 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Fluids and Lubricants on water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If improper coolant
page 11‑12. mixture, inhibitors, or additives
are used in the vehicle cooling
The following explains the cooling
system, the engine could
system and how to check and add
overheat and be damaged. Too
coolant when it is low. If there is a
much water in the mixture can
problem with engine overheating,
freeze and crack engine cooling
see Engine Overheating on
parts. The repairs would not be
page 10‑16.
covered by the warranty. Use only
the proper mixture of engine

10-14 Vehicle Care
coolant for the cooling system. the cooling system is cool before How to Add Coolant to the
See Recommended Fluids and this is done. See Engine Recovery Tank
Lubricants on page 11‑12. Overheating on page 10‑16.
Never dispose of engine coolant by { WARNING
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, or into sewers, streams, You can be burned if you spill
or bodies of water. Have the coolant coolant on hot engine parts.
changed by an authorized service Coolant contains ethylene glycol
center, familiar with legal and it will burn if the engine parts
requirements regarding used are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant disposal. This will help The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on a hot engine.
protect the environment and your this symbol on it.
health. When the engine is cold, the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a
Checking Coolant level should be at or above the specific coolant fill procedure.
FULL COLD line marked on the Failure to follow this procedure
The vehicle must be on a level recovery tank. could cause the engine to
surface when checking the coolant
When the engine is hot, the level overheat and be severely
level.
could be higher than the FULL damaged.
Check to see if coolant is visible in COLD line. If the coolant is below If coolant is needed, add the proper
the coolant recovery tank. If the the FULL COLD line when the DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
coolant inside the coolant recovery engine is hot, there could be a leak coolant recovery tank.
tank is boiling, do not do anything in the cooling system.
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at If the coolant is low, add the coolant
or above the FULL COLD mark, add or take the vehicle to a dealer for
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable service.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure

Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Add Coolant to the 2. Remove the radiator pressure

Radiator cap when the cooling system,
including the upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
{ WARNING pressure cap slowly
Steam and scalding liquids from a counterclockwise about one
hot cooling system can blow out full turn.
and burn you badly. Never turn If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
the cap when the cooling system, stop. A hiss means there is still
including the surge tank pressure some pressure left in the
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system.
system and surge tank pressure 3. Keep turning the pressure cap
cap to cool. 1. Detach the fasteners and lift off slowly and remove it.
the panel that covers the
radiator cap. 4. Fill the radiator to the base of
If coolant is needed, add the proper the filler neck with the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but DEX-COOL coolant mixture.
be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.

10-16 Vehicle Care
coolant mixture through the filler message in the Driver Information

neck until the level is back up to Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
the base of the filler neck. System Messages on page 5‑33.
9. Replace the pressure cap tightly. You may decide not to lift the hood
At any time during this when this warning appears, but
procedure if coolant begins to instead get service help right away.
flow out of the filler neck, See Roadside Assistance Program
reinstall the pressure cap. (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Notice: If the pressure cap is not Assistance Program (U.S. and
tightly installed, coolant loss and Canada) on page 13‑11.
possible engine damage may If you do decide to lift the hood,
occur. Be sure the cap is properly make sure the vehicle is parked on
5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to and tightly secured. a level surface.
the FULL COLD mark.
Then check to see if the engine
6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant Engine Overheating cooling fans are running. If the
recovery tank but leave the engine is overheating, both fans
The vehicle has several indicators
radiator pressure cap off. should be running. If they are not,
to warn of engine overheating.
7. Start the engine and let it run do not continue to run the engine
There is an engine coolant and have the vehicle serviced.
until the upper radiator hose
temperature gauge on the
feels warm. Any time during this Notice: Running the engine
instrument panel cluster. See
procedure, watch out for the without coolant may cause
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
engine cooling fans. damage or a fire. Vehicle damage
on page 5‑13.
8. If the coolant level inside the would not be covered by the
The vehicle may also display an warranty. See Overheated Engine
radiator filler neck is low, add
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE Protection Operating Mode on
more of the proper DEX-COOL
ENGINE and ENGINE
OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Vehicle Care 10-17
page 10‑18 for information on 2. Turn the heater on to the highest

driving to a safe place in an WARNING (Continued) temperature and to the highest
emergency. fan speed. Open the windows as
See Overheated Engine necessary.
If Steam Is Coming from the Protection Operating Mode on
Engine Compartment page 10‑18 for information on 3. If in a traffic jam, shift to
driving to a safe place in an N (Neutral); otherwise, shift to
the highest gear while
{ WARNING emergency.
driving — D (Drive) or L (Low).
Steam from an overheated engine If the temperature overheat gauge is
If No Steam Is Coming from no longer in the overheat zone or an
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
the Engine Compartment overheat warning no longer
from the engine if you see or hear If an engine overheat warning is displays, the vehicle can be driven.
steam coming from it. Turn it off displayed but no steam can be seen Continue to drive the vehicle slow
and get everyone away from the or heard, the problem may not be for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle until it cools down. Wait too serious. Sometimes the engine vehicle distance from the car in front
until there is no sign of steam or can get a little too hot when the of you. If the warning does not come
coolant before you open vehicle: back on, continue to drive normally.
the hood. . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
If you keep driving when the . Stops after high-speed driving.
right away.
vehicles engine is overheated, . Idles for long periods in traffic.
the liquids in it can catch fire. You If there is no sign of steam, idle the
or others could be badly burned.
. Tows a trailer. engine for three minutes while
Stop the engine if it overheats, If the overheat warning is displayed parked. If the warning is still
and get out of the vehicle until the with no sign of steam: displayed, turn off the engine until it
engine is cool. cools down. Also, see “Overheated
1. Turn the air conditioning off. Engine Protection Operating Mode”
(Continued) next in this section.

10-18 Vehicle Care
Overheated Engine Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering

Protection Fluid
Operating Mode To check the power steering fluid:
This emergency operating mode lets 1. Turn the key off and let the
the vehicle be driven to a safe place engine compartment cool down.
in an emergency situation. If an 2. Remove the engine cover. See
overheated engine condition exists, Engine Cover on page 10‑6.
an overheat protection mode which The power steering fluid reservoir is 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
alternates firing groups of cylinders located under the engine cover on reservoir clean.
helps prevent engine damage. In the passenger side of the vehicle.
this mode, there is a significant loss See Engine Compartment Overview 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
in power and engine performance. on page 10‑5 for reservoir location. dipstick with a clean rag.
The temperature gauge indicates an 5. Replace the cap and completely
overheat condition exists. Driving When to Check Power Steering tighten it.
extended distances and/or towing a Fluid
trailer in the overheat protection 6. Remove the cap again and look
It is not necessary to regularly at the fluid level on the dipstick.
mode should be avoided.
check power steering fluid unless
Notice: After driving in the you suspect there is a leak in the The fluid level should be
overheated engine protection system or you hear an unusual somewhere between the MAX and
operating mode, to avoid engine noise. A fluid loss in this system MIN line on the dipstick in room
damage, allow the engine to cool could indicate a problem. Have the temperature. If the fluid is on or
before attempting any repair. The system inspected and repaired. below the MIN line, add fluid close
engine oil will be severely to the MAX Line.
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Vehicle Care 10-19
What to Use Adding Washer Fluid

. Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
To determine what kind of fluid to When the windshield washer fluid Water can cause the solution
use, see Recommended Fluids and reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID to freeze and damage the
Lubricants on page 11‑12. Always LOW ADD FLUID message will be washer fluid tank and other
use the proper fluid. displayed on the Driver Information parts of the washer system.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid
Messages on page 5‑40 for more
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
may damage the vehicle and the three-quarters full when it is
damages may not be covered by information.
very cold. This allows for
the vehicle's warranty. Always fluid expansion if freezing
use the correct fluid listed in occurs, which could damage
Recommended Fluids and the tank if it is
Lubricants on page 11‑12. completely full.
. Do not use engine coolant
Washer Fluid (antifreeze) in the windshield
What to Use Open the cap with the washer washer. It can damage the
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until windshield washer system
When adding windshield washer and paint.
fluid, be sure to read the the tank is full. See Engine
manufacturer's instructions before Compartment Overview on
use. If the vehicle will be operating page 10‑5 for reservoir location. Brakes
in an area where the temperature Notice This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
may fall below freezing, use a fluid brake pads have built-in wear
. When using concentrated
that has sufficient protection against indicators that make a high-pitched
washer fluid, follow the
freezing. warning sound when the brake pads
manufacturer instructions for
are worn and new pads are needed.
adding water.
The sound can come and go or be

10-20 Vehicle Care
heard all the time the vehicle is proper sequence to torque new, approved replacement parts.
moving, except when applying the specifications in Capacities and If this is not done, the brakes might
brake pedal firmly. Specifications on page 12‑2. not work properly. For example,
Brake linings should always be installing disc brake pads that are
{ WARNING replaced as complete axle sets. wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
The brake wear warning sound Brake Pedal Travel rear brakes — for the worse. The
means that soon the brakes will braking performance expected can
See your dealer if the brake pedal
not work well. That could lead to change in many other ways if the
does not return to normal height,
a crash. When the brake wear wrong replacement brake parts are
or if there is a rapid increase in
warning sound is heard, have the installed.
pedal travel. This could be a sign
vehicle serviced. that brake service might be
required. Brake Fluid
Notice: Continuing to drive with Brake Adjustment
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair. Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
Some driving conditions or climates the brakes adjust for wear.
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly Replacing Brake System Parts
applied. This does not mean The braking system on a vehicle is The brake master cylinder reservoir
something is wrong with the brakes. complex. Its many parts have to be is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
Properly torqued wheel nuts are of top quality and work well together indicated on the reservoir cap. See
necessary to help prevent brake if the vehicle is to have really good Engine Compartment Overview on
pulsation. When tires are rotated, braking. The vehicle was designed page 10‑5 for the location of the
inspect brake pads for wear and and tested with top-quality brake reservoir.
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get

Vehicle Care 10-21
There are only two reasons why the

brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING { WARNING
might go down:
If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in the
. The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn, brake hydraulic system, the
because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You brakes might not work well. This
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and could cause a crash. Always use
installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged. the proper brake fluid.
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is
. A fluid leak in the brake done on the brake hydraulic Notice
hydraulic system can also cause system.
a low fluid level. Have the brake . Using the wrong fluid can
hydraulic system fixed, since a badly damage brake
leak means that sooner or later When the brake fluid falls to a low hydraulic system parts. For
the brakes will not work well. level, the brake warning light comes example, just a few drops of
on. See Brake System Warning mineral-based oil, such as
Do not top off the brake fluid. Light on page 5‑19. engine oil, in the brake
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. hydraulic system can
If fluid is added when the linings are What to Add
damage brake hydraulic
worn, there will be too much fluid Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid system parts so badly that
when new brake linings are from a sealed container. See they will have to be replaced.
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, Recommended Fluids and Do not let someone put in
as necessary, only when work is Lubricants on page 11‑12. the wrong kind of fluid.
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.

10-22 Vehicle Care

. If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive
the paint finish can be Transfer case fluid does not require
damaged. Be careful not to { WARNING checking unless there is a fluid leak
spill brake fluid on the or unusual noise. If required, have
Batteries have acid that can burn
vehicle. If you do, wash it off the transfer case serviced by your
you and gas that can explode.
immediately. dealer.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
Battery page 10‑66 for tips on working
Starter Switch Check
Refer to the replacement number on around a battery without
the original battery label when a getting hurt. { WARNING
new battery is needed.
When you are doing this
Infrequent Usage: Remove the inspection, the vehicle could
{ WARNING black, negative (−) cable from the move suddenly. If the vehicle
battery to keep the battery from moves, you or others could be
Battery posts, terminals, and
running down. injured.
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals Extended Storage: Remove the
known to the State of California to black, negative (−) cable from the 1. Before starting this check, be
cause cancer and reproductive battery or use a battery trickle sure there is enough room
harm. Wash hands after handling. charger. around the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-23
2. Firmly apply both the parking 1. Before starting this check, be

. The ignition should turn to
brake and the regular brake. sure there is enough room LOCK/OFF only when the shift
See Parking Brake on around the vehicle. It should be lever is in P (Park).
page 9‑26. parked on a level surface. . The ignition key should come
Do not use the accelerator 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. out only in LOCK/OFF.
pedal, and be ready to turn off See Parking Brake on Contact your dealer if service is
the engine immediately if it page 9‑26. required.
starts. Be ready to apply the regular
3. Try to start the engine in each brake immediately if the vehicle Park Brake and P (Park)
gear. The vehicle should start begins to move. Mechanism Check
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). 3. With the engine off, turn the
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
{ WARNING
service. regular brake, try to move the When you are doing this check,
shift lever out of P (Park) with the vehicle could begin to move.
Automatic Transmission normal effort. If the shift lever You or others could be injured
Shift Lock Control moves out of P (Park), contact and property could be damaged.
Function Check your dealer for service. Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
Ignition Transmission
{ WARNING Lock Check
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
When you are doing this begin to move.
While parked, and with the parking
inspection, the vehicle could brake set, try to turn the ignition to
move suddenly. If the vehicle LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
moves, you or others could be position.
injured.

10-24 Vehicle Care
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement

vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set Front Wiper Blade
the parking brake. Windshield wiper blades should be
. To check the parking brake's inspected for wear or cracking. See
holding ability: With the engine Maintenance Schedule on
running and the transmission in page 11‑3. 2. Squeeze the tabs on each side
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot Replacement blades come in of the wiper blade assembly and
pressure from the regular brake different types and are removed in slide the assembly off the end of
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is different ways. For the proper type the wiper arm.
held by the parking brake only. and size, see Maintenance
. To check the P (Park) Replacement Parts on page 11‑13.
mechanism's holding ability: To replace the wiper blade
With the engine running, shift to assembly:
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the 1. Pull the windshield wiper
regular brake. assembly away from the
windshield.
Contact your dealer if service is 3. Install the new blade onto the
required. arm connector and make sure
the tabs are fully set in the
locked position.

Vehicle Care 10-25
Allowing the wiper blade arm to Headlamp Aiming

touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could Headlamp aim has been preset and
damage the windshield. Any should need no further adjustment.
damage that occurs would not If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
be covered by your warranty. Do the headlamp aim may be affected.
not allow the wiper blade arm to If adjustment to the headlamps is
touch the windshield. necessary, see your dealer.
4. Repeat the steps for the other
blade. 2. Push the release lever (2) to
disengage the hook and push
Rear Wiper Blade the wiper arm (1) out of the
To replace the rear wiper blade: blade assembly (3).
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly 3. Push the new blade assembly
away from the backglass. securely in the wiper arm hook
until the release lever clicks into
The rear wiper blade will not lock place.
in a vertical position so care
should be used when pulling it 4. Return the wiper arm and blade
away from the vehicle. assembly to the rest position on
the glass.

10-26 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement To replace one of these bulbs: 6. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
For the proper type of replacement straight out to remove it from the
on page 2‑8.
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on taillamp assembly.
page 10‑27. 2. Remove the convenience net,
if the vehicle has one. 7. Pull the old bulb straight out of
For any bulb‐changing procedure the bulb socket.
not listed in this section, contact
8. Push the new bulb straight into
your dealer.
the bulb socket.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, 9. Push the taillamp assembly back
into its original location.
and Stoplamps
When reinstalling the taillamp
assembly, make sure the pin on
the taillamp assembly lines up
and is inserted correctly into the
opening of the vehicle.
10. Reinstall the two screws that
hold the taillamp assembly in
3. Remove the two taillamp screw place.
covers. 11. Reinstall the two taillamp screw
4. Remove the two screws holding covers.
the taillamp assembly in place.
5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.
1. Turn Signal Lamp
2. Stoplamp/Taillamp

Vehicle Care 10-27
License Plate Lamp 7. Turn the lamp assembly into the

liftgate engaging the clip side
To replace one of these bulbs: first.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 8. Push on the lamp side opposite
on page 2‑8. the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number
License Plate Lamp 194 LL
4. Turn the bulb socket (1) Rear Turn 7443 NA
counterclockwise to remove it Signal Lamp
from the lamp assembly (3).
Taillamp/Stop Lamp 7444 LL
5. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
the bulb socket.
For replacement bulbs not listed
2. Push the left end of the lamp 6. Push the replacement bulb here, contact your dealer.
assembly toward the right. straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to install it into the lamp assembly.
remove it from the liftgate.

10-28 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Electrical System Headlamp Wiring

Overload An electrical overload may cause
High Voltage Devices and The vehicle has fuses and circuit
the lamps to go on and off, or in
Wiring some cases to remain off. Have the
breakers to protect against an
headlamp wiring checked right away
electrical system overload.
if the lamps go on and off or
{ WARNING When the current electrical load is remain off.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Exposure to high voltage can and closes, protecting the circuit Windshield Wipers
cause shock, burns, and even until the current load returns to If the wiper motor overheats due to
death. The high voltage normal or the problem is fixed. This heavy snow or ice, the windshield
components in the vehicle can greatly reduces the chance of circuit wipers will stop until the motor cools
only be serviced by technicians overload and fire caused by and will then restart.
with special training. electrical problems.
Although the circuit is protected
High voltage components are Fuses and circuit breakers protect from electrical overload, overload
identified by labels. Do not power devices in the vehicle. due to heavy snow or ice may
remove, open, take apart, Replace a bad fuse with a new one cause wiper linkage damage.
or modify these components. of the identical size and rating. Always clear ice and heavy snow
High voltage cable or wiring has from the windshield before using the
orange covering. Do not probe, If there is a problem on the road and windshield wipers.
tamper with, cut, or modify high a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be If the overload is caused by an
voltage cable or wiring. electrical problem and not snow or
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use ice, be sure to get it fixed.
and replace it as soon as possible.

Vehicle Care 10-29
Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment Notice: Spilling liquid on any

electrical component on the
Breakers Fuse Block vehicle may damage it. Always
The wiring circuits in your vehicle The underhood fuse block is in the keep the covers on any electrical
are protected from short circuits by engine compartment, on the component.
a combination of fuses, circuit passenger side of the vehicle. To remove fuses, hold the end of
breakers and fusible thermal links. the fuse between your thumb and
This greatly reduces the chance of index finger and pull straight out.
fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/
relay block.

10-30 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuses Usage
A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning
Clutch
ABS MTR Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
Motor
AIRBAG Airbag System
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power
AUX Auxiliary
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump
AWD All-Wheel-Drive
System
BATT 1 Battery 1
BATT 2 Battery 2
BATT 3 Battery 3
CIGAR Cigarette Lighter
LIGHTER
ECM 1 Engine Control
Module 1

Vehicle Care 10-31
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

EMISSION 1 Emission 1 LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam RT PRK Right
Headlamp Parking Lamp
EMISSION 2 Emission 2
LT PRK Left Parking Lamp RT TRLR Trailer Right
EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils
STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
LT TRLR Trailer Left
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Signal
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Signal RVC SNSR Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
FSCM Fuel System ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils
Control Module S/ROOF/ Sunroof
PCM IGN Powertrain Control
SUNSHADE
HORN Horn Module Ignition
SERVICE Service Repair
HTD MIR Heated Outside PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
Rearview Mirror SPARE Spare
PWR Power Outlet
HTD Heated Steering OUTLET STOP Stoplamps
STR WHL Wheel LAMPS
RR APO Rear Accessory
HUMIDITY/ Humidity Sensor/ Power Outlet STRTR Starter
MAF MAF Sensor
RR DEFOG Rear Defogger TCM Transmission
HVAC BLWR Heating, Control Module
RR HVAC Rear Climate
Ventilation, and Air
Control System TRANS Transmission
Conditioning
Blower RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam TRLR Trailer Back-up
Headlamp BCK/UP Lamps
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam
Headlamp RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam TRLR BRK Trailer Brake
Headlamp

10-32 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage

TRLR Trailer Parking HID/ High Intensity WPR Windshield Wiper
PRK LAMP Lamps LO BEAM Discharge (HID)
WPR HI Windshield Wiper
Low-Beam
TRLR PWR Trailer Power High Speed
Headlamps
WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/
HORN Horn Instrument Panel Fuse
Washer
IGN Ignition Main Block
Relays Usage LT TRLR Trailer Left
A/C Air Conditioning STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
CMPRSR Compressor Clutch Signal Lamp
CLTCH PRK LAMP Parking Lamp
AUX Auxiliary PWR/TRN Powertrain
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump
RR DEFOG Rear Window
CRNK Switched Power Defogger
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Headlamp
FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 RT TRLR Trailer Right

HI BEAM High-Beam Signal Lamp The instrument panel fuse block is
Headlamps under the instrument panel on the
STOP LAMP Stop Lamps passenger side of the vehicle. Pull
TRLR Trailer Back-up down on the cover to access the
BCK/UP Lamps fuse block.

Vehicle Care 10-33
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

# GMC NON HID = DRL/ Daytime Running
Lo Beam LO BEAM Lamps Relay/Low
Beam Headlamps
) GMC NON HID =
Relay
High Shutter
DSPLY Display
)) Chevy = Fog
Lamps EMPTY Empty
))) Buick China = FRT WSW Front Windshield
Rear Fog Lamp Washer
AIRBAG Airbag HTD/ Heated/Cooling
COOL SEAT Seats
AMP Amplifier
HVAC Heating,
BCK Back-up Lamp/
Ventilation, and Air
UP/STOP Stoplamp
Conditioning
BCM Body Control
INADV PWR Inadvertent Power/
Module
INT LAMPS Interior Light Pipe
CNSTR Canister Vent Lamps
VENT
INFOTMNT/ Infotainment/
CTSY Courtesy Lamps MSM Memory Seat
Module
DR LCK Door Locks
Fuse Side
LT TRN SIG Driver Side Turn
The vehicle may not be equipped Signal
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.

10-34 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage

PDM Power Mirrors, LT/ Driver Side Power
Liftgate Release PWR/SEAT Seat Relay
PWR MODE Power Mode RT/ Passenger Side
PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay
PWR MIR Power Mirrors
PWR/WNDW Power Windows
RDO Radio
Relay
REAR WPR Rear Wiper
PWR/ Power Steering
RPA/ Rear Park Assist/ COLUMN Column Relay
SBZA/UGDO Side Blind Zone
L/GATE Liftgate Relay
Alert/Universal
Garage Door LCK Power Lock Relay
Opener
REAR/WSW Rear Window
RT TRN SIG Passenger Side Washer Relay
Turn Signal
UNLCK Power Unlock
STR WHL Steering Wheel Relay
ILLUM Illumination
DRL/ Daytime Running
LO BEAM Lamps Relay/Low
Beam Headlamps
Relay
Relay Side

Vehicle Care 10-35
Relays Usage Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued)

LT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock
Relay Tires and a serious crash. See
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on
DRL/ Daytime Running
high-quality tires made by a page 9‑9.
LO BEAM Lamps Relay (If
Equipped) leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose
FOG LAMPS Fog Lamps Relay the warranty manual for the same danger as
(Chevy) information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The
warranty and where to get resulting crash could
FRT/WSW Front Windshield cause serious injury.
service. For additional
Washer Relay
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently
manufacturer. to maintain the
recommended pressure.
{ WARNING Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a impact— such as when
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout tires at the recommended
(Continued) pressure.
(Continued)

10-36 Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
All-Season Tires Winter Tires
This vehicle may come with This vehicle was not, originally,
. Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are equipped with winter tires. Winter
cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall tires are designed for increased
is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces traction on snow and ice-covered
replace them. and weather conditions. Original roads. Consider installing winter
equipment tires designed to GM's tires on the vehicle if frequent
. Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria driving on snow or ice-covered
have been damaged by have a TPC specification code roads is expected. See your dealer
impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original for details regarding winter tire
curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be availability and proper tire selection.
identified by the last two characters Also, see Buying New Tires on
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will page 10‑50.
can cause a crash. Only be “MS.”
the dealer or an With winter tires, there may be
Consider installing winter tires on decreased dry road traction,
authorized tire service the vehicle if frequent driving on increased road noise, and shorter
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is tread life. After changing to winter
replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
mount the tires. adequate performance for most handling and braking.
. Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they If using winter tires:
may not offer the same level of
excess of 56 km/h . Use tires of the same brand and
traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads. tread type on all four wheel
surfaces such as snow, See Winter Tires on page 10‑36. positions.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
spinning may cause the
tires to explode.

Vehicle Care 10-37

. Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is section.
equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
Winter tires with the same speed examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
rating as the original equipment tires passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter equipment tires designed to
tires with a lower speed rating are GM's specific tire performance
chosen, never exceed the tire's criteria have a TPC specification
maximum speed capability. code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
Summer Tires exceed all federal safety
This vehicle may come with high guidelines.
performance summer tires. These (3) DOT (Department of
tires have a special tread and
Transportation): The
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road Department of Transportation
performance. This special tread and (DOT) code indicates that the
compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example tire is in compliance with the
performance in cold climates, and U.S. Department of
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle
installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and Safety Standards.
if frequent driving in cold numbers used to define a
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four
Winter Tires on page 10‑36. digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two

10-38 Vehicle Care
digits represent the week performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The
(01–52) and the last two digits, traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary
the year. For example, the third resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at
week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 10‑52. The compact spare tire is for
of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular
(4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone
(TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare
of Transportation) code are the support that load. Tire on page 10‑65 and If a Tire
Tire Identification Number Goes Flat on page 10‑55.
(TIN). The TIN shows the (3) Tire Identification Number
manufacturer and plant code, (TIN): The letters and numbers
tire size, and date the tire was following the DOT (Department
manufactured. The TIN is of Transportation) code are the
molded onto both sides of the Tire Identification Number (TIN).
tire, although only one side may The TIN shows the
have the date of manufacture. manufacturer and plant code,
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type tire size, and date the tire was
of cord and number of plies in manufactured. The TIN is
the sidewall and under the tread. molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
have the date of manufacture.
Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.

Vehicle Care 10-39
(4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to
Load Limit: Maximum load that code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire
can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association.
maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit
support that load. guidelines. number indicates the tire section
(5) Tire Inflation: The width in millimeters from
temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
420 kPa (60 psi). For more number that indicates the tire
The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and height-to-width measurements.
typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on For example, if the tire size
tire size.
page 10‑42. aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
(6) Tire Size: A combination of item 3 of the illustration, it would
letters and numbers define a mean that the tire's sidewall is
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, 60 percent as high as it is wide.
construction type, and service (4) Construction Code: A letter
description. The letter T as the code is used to indicate the type
first character in the tire size of ply construction in the tire.
means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
use only. construction; the letter D means
metric tire sizing system. The
(7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply
Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B
Specification): Original means belted-bias ply
equipment tires designed to construction.
GM's specific tire performance

10-40 Vehicle Care
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of steering, power brakes, power before a tire has built up heat
the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
(6) Service Description: These conditioning. on page 10‑42.
characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the
the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without
rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo.
tire is certified to carry a load. materials. DOT Markings: A code molded
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire
Tire Terminology and signifying that the tire is in
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S.
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. Department of Transportation
air inside the tire pressing (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
the tire. Air pressure is in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
or psi (pounds per square inch). 90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer,
Accessory Weight: The production plant, brand, and
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production.
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑9.

Vehicle Care 10-41
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9. which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears
Rating for the rear axle. See molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9. Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
Intended Outboard Sidewall : moldings on the other sidewall
The side of an asymmetrical tire, maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric some light duty trucks and
unit for air pressure. weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A production options weight. Recommended Inflation
tire used on light duty trucks and Pressure: Vehicle
some multipurpose passenger Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
vehicles. tire inflation pressure as shown
is designed to seat multiplied by
Load Index: An assigned 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle on the tire placard. See Tire
number ranging from 1 to 279 Load Limits on page 9‑9. Pressure on page 10‑42 and
that corresponds to the load Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.
carrying capacity of a tire. Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
Outward Facing Sidewall: The extend to the beads are laid at
side of an asymmetrical tire that 90 degrees to the centerline of
has a particular side that faces the tread.

10-42 Vehicle Care
Rim: A metal support for a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label
and upon which the tire beads Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a
are seated. information system that vehicle showing the vehicle
Sidewall: The portion of a tire provides consumers with capacity weight and the original
between the tread and the bead. ratings for a tire's traction, equipment tire size and
temperature, and treadwear. recommended inflation pressure.
Speed Rating: An Ratings are determined by See “Tire and Loading
alphanumeric code assigned to tire manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle
a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑9.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the
operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure
Traction: The friction between Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount of
the tire and the road surface. page 10‑52. air pressure to operate
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The effectively.
Tread: The portion of a tire that number of designated seating Notice: Neither tire
comes into contact with positions multiplied by underinflation nor
the road. 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated overinflation is good.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 9‑9.
bands, sometimes called wear that do not have enough air,
bars, that show across the tread Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in:
of a tire when only 1.6 mm Tire: Load on an individual tire . Tire overloading and
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See due to curb weight, accessory overheating which could
When It Is Time for New Tires weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout.
on page 10‑49. cargo weight.

Vehicle Care 10-43

. Premature or How the vehicle is loaded Remove the valve cap from the
irregular wear. affects vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire
. Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to
with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement.
. Reduced fuel economy. designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure
Overinflated tires, or tires that matches the recommended
When to Check
have too much air, can pressure on the Tire and
result in: Check the tires once a month or Loading Information label, no
more. Do not forget the compact further adjustment is necessary.
. Unusual wear.
spare, if the vehicle has one. If the inflation pressure is low,
. Poor handling. The cold compact spare tire add air until the recommended
. Rough ride. pressure should be at 420 kPa pressure is reached. If the
(60 psi). See Compact Spare inflation pressure is high, press
. Needless damage from Tire on page 10‑65. on the metal stem in the center
road hazards. of the tire valve to release air.
How to Check
The Tire and Loading Recheck the tire pressure with
Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge.
indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the
inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire. valve stems to prevent leaks
recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture.
minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
load carrying capacity. See for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9. more than 1.6 km (1 mi).

10-44 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
System under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start-ups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly under-inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
Each tire, including the spare (if lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be
provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability. of reasons, including the installation
vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the
As an added safety feature, your
TPMS to continue to function
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been properly.
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑45.

Vehicle Care 10-45
Federal Communications displays see Driver Information

Commission (FCC) Rules and Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
with Industry Canada on page 5‑28 or Driver Information
Standards Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
page 5‑23 and Tire Messages on
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 5‑38.
page 13‑21 for information
When a low tire pressure condition The low tire pressure warning light
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
is detected, the TPMS illuminates may come on in cool weather when
Communications Commission (FCC)
the low tire pressure warning light the vehicle is first started, and then
Rules and with Industry Canada
located on the instrument cluster. turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If the warning light comes on, stop could be an early indicator that the
as soon as possible and inflate the air pressure is getting low and
Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure needs to be inflated to the proper
Operation shown on the tire loading pressure.
information label. See Vehicle Load
This vehicle may have a Tire A Tire and Loading Information label
Limits on page 9‑9.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). shows the size of the original
The TPMS is designed to warn the A message to check the pressure in equipment tires and the correct
driver when a low tire pressure a specific tire displays in the Driver inflation pressure for the tires when
condition exists. TPMS sensors are Information Center (DIC). The low they are cold. See Vehicle Load
mounted onto each tire and wheel tire pressure warning light and the Limits on page 9‑9, for an example
assembly, excluding the spare tire DIC warning message come on at of the Tire and Loading Information
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle each ignition cycle until the tires are label and its location. Also see Tire
has one. The TPMS sensors inflated to the correct inflation Pressure on page 10‑42.
monitor the air pressure in the tires pressure. Using the DIC, tire
and transmits the tire pressure pressure levels can be viewed. For
readings to a receiver located in the additional information and details
vehicle. about the DIC operation and

10-46 Vehicle Care
The TPMS can warn about a low TPMS Malfunction Light and
. The TPMS sensor matching
tire pressure condition but it Message process was not done or not
does not replace normal tire completed successfully after
maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly rotating the tires. The
on page 10‑48, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC
page 10‑48 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
page 10‑35. system detects a malfunction, the successfully completing the
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process. See
Notice: Tire sealant materials are about one minute and then stays on "TPMS Sensor Matching
not all the same. A non-approved for the remainder of the ignition Process" later in this section.
tire sealant could damage the cycle. A DIC warning message
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor displays. The malfunction light and
. One or more TPMS sensors are
damage caused by using an DIC warning message come on at missing or damaged. The
incorrect tire sealant is not each ignition cycle until the problem malfunction light and the DIC
covered by the vehicle warranty. is corrected. Some of the conditions message should go off when the
Always use only the that can cause these to come TPMS sensors are installed and
GM-approved tire sealant on are: the sensor matching process is
available through your dealer or performed successfully. See
included in the vehicle.
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service.
replaced with the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. The
. Replacement tires or wheels do
spare tire does not have a not match the original equipment
TPMS sensor. The malfunction tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
light and DIC message should other than those recommended
go off after the road tire is could prevent the TPMS from
replaced and the sensor functioning properly. See Buying
matching process is performed New Tires on page 10‑50.
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.

Vehicle Care 10-47

. Operating electronic devices or relearn tool, in the following order: 4. Start with the driver side
being near facilities using radio driver side front tire, passenger side front tire.
wave frequencies similar to the front tire, passenger side rear tire,
TPMS could cause the TPMS 5. Place the relearn tool against
and driver side rear. See your the tire sidewall, near the valve
sensors to malfunction. dealer for service or to purchase a stem. Then press the button to
If the TPMS is not functioning relearn tool. activate the TPMS sensor.
properly, it cannot detect or signal a There are two minutes to match the A horn chirp confirms that the
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and sensor identification code has
for service if the TPMS malfunction five minutes overall to match all four been matched to this tire and
light and DIC message comes on tire/wheel positions. If it takes wheel position.
and stays on. longer, the matching process stops 6. Proceed to the passenger side
TPMS Sensor Matching and must be restarted. front tire, and repeat the
Process The TPMS sensor matching process procedure in Step 5.
is outlined below: 7. Proceed to the passenger side
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake. rear tire, and repeat the
code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with procedure in Step 5.
tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off. 8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tires or replacing one or more of the tire, and repeat the procedure in
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter's LOCK and Step 5. The horn sounds two
matching process should also be times to indicate the sensor
performed after replacing a spare UNLOCK buttons at the same
time for approximately identification code has been
tire with a road tire containing the matched to the driver side rear
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in tire, and the TPMS sensor
and the DIC message should go off matching process is no longer
at the next ignition cycle. The relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message active. The TIRE LEARNING
sensors are matched to the tire/ ACTIVE message on the DIC
wheel positions, using a TPMS displays on the DIC screen.
display screen goes off.

10-48 Vehicle Care
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. . The tread or sidewall is inflation pressure, and check for
10. Set all four tires to the
cracked, cut, or snagged damaged tires or wheels. If the
recommended air pressure deep enough to show cord or unusual wear continues after the
level as indicated on the Tire fabric. rotation, check the wheel
and Loading Information label. . The tire has a bump, bulge, alignment. See When It Is Time
11. Put the valve caps back on the or split. for New Tires on page 10‑49
valve stems. and Wheel Replacement on
. The tire has a puncture, cut, page 10‑54.
or other damage that cannot
Tire Inspection be repaired well because of
We recommend that the tires, the size or location of the
including the spare tire, if the damage.
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at Tire Rotation
least once a month.
Tires should be rotated every
Replace the tire if: 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
. The indicators at three or Maintenance Schedule on
more places around the tire page 11‑3.
can be seen. Tires are rotated to achieve a
. There is cord or fabric uniform wear for all tires. The
showing through the tire's first rotation is the most Use this rotation pattern when
rubber. important. rotating the tires.
Anytime unusual wear is If the vehicle has a compact
noticed, rotate the tires as soon spare tire, do not include it in the
as possible, check for proper tire tire rotation.

Vehicle Care 10-49
Adjust the front and rear tires to

WARNING (Continued)
When It Is Time for New
the recommended inflation Tires
pressure on the Tire and off and cause an accident. When
Loading Information label after Factors such as maintenance,
changing a wheel, remove any temperatures, driving speeds,
the tires have been rotated. See rust or dirt from places where the vehicle loading, and road conditions
Tire Pressure on page 10‑42 wheel attaches to the vehicle. In affect the wear rate of the tires.
and Vehicle Load Limits on an emergency, a cloth or a paper
page 9‑9. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑45. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12‑2. grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
{ WARNING Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Check that the spare tire, if the
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the vehicle has one, is stored Treadwear indicators appear when
parts to which it is fastened, can properly. Push, pull, and then try the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
make wheel nuts become loose to rotate or turn the tire. If it or less of tread remaining. See Tire
after time. The wheel could come Inspection on page 10‑48 and Tire
moves, tighten the cable. See
(Continued) Rotation on page 10‑48.
Tire Changing on page 10‑57.

10-50 Vehicle Care
The rubber in tires ages over time. slow aging. This area should be free GM's exclusive TPC Spec
This also applies to the spare tire, of grease, gasoline, or other system considers over a dozen
if the vehicle has one, even if it is substances that can deteriorate critical specifications that impact
never used. Multiple factors rubber. the overall performance of the
including temperatures, loading Parking for an extended period can vehicle, including brake system
conditions, and inflation pressure cause flat spots on the tires that
maintenance affect how fast aging performance, ride and handling,
may result in vibrations while traction control, and tire
takes place. GM recommends that driving. When storing a vehicle for
tires, including the spare if pressure monitoring
at least a month, remove the tires or performance. GM's TPC Spec
equipped, be replaced after six raise the vehicle to reduce the
years, regardless of tread wear. The weight from the tires.
number is molded onto the tire's
tire manufacturer date is the last sidewall near the tire size. If the
four digits of the DOT Tire tires have an all-season tread
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires
design, the TPC Spec number
molded into one side of the tire GM has developed and matched will be followed by MS for mud
sidewall. The first two digits specific tires for the vehicle. The and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01–52) and the original equipment tires installed
last two digits, the year. For Labeling on page 10‑37.
were designed to meet General
example, the third week of the year GM recommends replacing worn
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) tires in complete sets of four.
date of 0310. Uniform tread depth on all tires
system rating. When
Vehicle Storage replacement tires are needed, will help to maintain the
GM strongly recommends performance of the vehicle.
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park buying tires with the same TPC Braking and handling
a vehicle that will be stored for at Spec rating. performance may be adversely
least a month in a cool, dry, clean affected if all the tires are not
area away from direct sunlight to replaced at the same time.
If proper rotation and

Vehicle Care 10-51
maintenance have been done,

all four tires should wear out at WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
about the same time. See Tire Only your dealer or authorized A tire and/or wheel could fail
Rotation on page 10‑48 for tire service center should suddenly and cause a crash.
information on proper tire mount or dismount the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with
rotation. However, if it is the wheels on the vehicle.
necessary to replace only one
axle set of worn tires, place the
new tires on the rear axle. { WARNING If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
Winter tires with the same speed Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make
rating as the original equipment brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size,
tires may not be available for H, loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the
tires. Never exceed the winter vehicle damage. Use the original tires.
tire's maximum speed capability correct size, brand, and type
when using winter tires with a of tires on all wheels. Vehicles that have a tire
lower speed rating. pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
{ WARNING { WARNING Spec rated tires are installed.
Tires could explode during See Tire Pressure Monitor
Using bias-ply tires on the
improper service. Attempting System on page 10‑44.
vehicle may cause the wheel
to mount or dismount a tire rim flanges to develop cracks
could cause injury or death. after many miles of driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)

10-52 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality

Information label indicates the { WARNING Grading
original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
on page 9‑9. level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire
tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder
Different Size Tires and wheels are selected. This and maximum section width. For
Wheels increases the chance of a crash example:
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA
If wheels or tires are installed that
specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A
are a different size than the original
developed for the vehicle, and
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle The following information relates
performance, including its braking, have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician. to the system developed by the
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover United States National Highway
may be affected. If the vehicle has See Buying New Tires on
Traffic Safety Administration
electronic systems such as antilock page 10‑50 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires by
brakes, rollover airbags, traction Modifications on page 10‑2. treadwear, traction, and
control, electronic stability control, temperature performance. This
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance applies only to vehicles sold in
of these systems can also be the United States. The grades
affected. are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with

Vehicle Care 10-53
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature – A, B, C
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of

10-54 Vehicle Care
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might

test wheel than the minimum need to be rebalanced. See your { WARNING
required by law. Warning: The dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement
temperature grade for this tire is wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
established for a tire that is Wheel Replacement nuts can be dangerous. It could
properly inflated and not Replace any wheel that is bent, affect the braking and handling of
overloaded. Excessive speed, cracked, or badly rusted or the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
underinflation, or excessive corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming and cause loss of control, causing
loading, either separately or in loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and a crash. Always use the correct
combination, can cause heat wheel nuts should be replaced. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
buildup and possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. nuts for replacement.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these conditions exist. Notice: The wrong wheel can
Balance Your dealer will know the kind of
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
The tires and wheels were aligned wheel that is needed. or odometer calibration,
and balanced at the factory to Each new wheel should have the headlamp aim, bumper height,
provide the longest tire life and best same load-carrying capacity, vehicle ground clearance, and tire
overall performance. Adjustments to diameter, width, offset, and be or tire chain clearance to the
wheel alignment and tire balancing mounted the same way as the one it body and chassis.
will not be necessary on a regular replaces.
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
one side or the other. If the vehicle System (TPMS) sensors with new
vibrates when driving on a smooth GM original equipment parts.

Vehicle Care 10-55
Used Replacement Wheels

WARNING (Continued)
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
{ WARNING parts. The area damaged by the while driving, especially if the tires
tire chains could cause loss of are maintained properly. See Tires
Replacing a wheel with a used
control and a crash. on page 10‑35. If air goes out of a
one is dangerous. How it has
Use another type of traction tire, it is much more likely to leak
been used or how far it has been out slowly. But if there ever is a
driven may be unknown. It could device only if its manufacturer
blowout, here are a few tips about
fail suddenly and cause a crash. recommends it for the vehicle's what to expect and what to do:
When replacing wheels, use a tire size combination and road
new GM original equipment conditions. Follow that If a front tire fails, the flat tire
wheel. manufacturer's instructions. To creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow toward that side. Take your foot off
and readjust or remove the the accelerator pedal and grip the
Tire Chains traction device if it contacts the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
gently brake to a stop, well off the
{ WARNING If traction devices are used, install
road, if possible.
them on the front tires.
Do not use tire chains. There is A rear blowout, particularly on a
not enough clearance. Tire chains curve, acts much like a skid and
used on a vehicle without the may require the same correction as
proper amount of clearance can used in a skid. Stop pressing the
cause damage to the brakes, accelerator pedal and steer to
suspension, or other vehicle straighten the vehicle. It may be
(Continued) very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.

10-56 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could 2. Put an automatic
Re-inflating a tire after it has been be badly injured or killed if the transmission in P (Park) or a
driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack manual transmission in
underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
3. Turn off the engine and do
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
not restart while the vehicle
that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire is raised.
severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
Have your dealer or an authorized 4. Do not allow passengers to
to a level place, well off the road,
tire service center repair or remain in the vehicle.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
replace the flat tire as soon as warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Place wheel blocks on both
possible. Warning Flashers on page 6‑3. sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
{ WARNING being changed.
{ WARNING Changing a tire can be When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
Lifting a vehicle and getting under dangerous. The vehicle can slip use the following example as a
it to do maintenance or repairs is off the jack and roll over or fall guide to assist in the placement of
dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a the wheel blocks (1).
appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire. To
training. If a jack is provided with help prevent the vehicle from
the vehicle, it is designed only for moving:
(Continued) (Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-57
4. Turn the jack on its side, with the

bottom facing toward you.
5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom
first.
1. Wheel Block
2. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire. 1. Tool Bag
2. Wing Bolt
Tire Changing 3. Jack
Removing Tools 1. Open the jack storage
compartment by pulling on the 1. Jack
The tools needed to remove the
latch tab, located toward the rear
spare tire are located in the storage 2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,
of the vehicle, and pulling the
compartment on the driver side, at One-Piece Similar)
cover off.
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the wing bolt (2) by The tools you will be using include
turning it counterclockwise. the jack (1) and wrench (2).
3. Push the jack (3) up out of the

holding bracket and remove the
tool bag (1).

10-58 Vehicle Care
Removing the Spare Tire 1. Open the storage compartment 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it
door of the convenience through the wheel opening to
The compact spare tire is located
center (1) that is nearest the remove the spare tire from the
under the vehicle, in front of the rear
liftgate. cable.
bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 10‑65 for more information. 2. Open the carpet cutout (3) that 6. Turn the wrench clockwise to
is located through the hole of the raise the cable back up after
storage compartment. removing the spare tire.
3. Attach the wrench (2) into the Do not store a full-size or a flat
hoist shaft (4). road tire under the vehicle. See
4. Turn the wrench (2) “Storing the Spare Tire” and
counterclockwise to lower the “Storing the Flat Tire” later in this
spare tire (5) to the ground. section.
Continue turning the wrench until Removing the Flat Tire and
the spare tire can be pulled out Installing the Spare Tire
from under the vehicle.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑55 for more
1. Rear Convenience Center information.
2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,
One-Piece Similar)
3. Carpet Cutout
4. Hoist Shaft
5. Compact Spare Tire
6. Retainer

Vehicle Care 10-59
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, Notice: If this vehicle has wheel
loosen the plastic nut caps with locks and an impact wrench is
the wheel wrench. They will not used to remove the wheel nuts,
come off. Then, using the flat the lock nut or wheel lock key
end of the wheel wrench, pry could be damaged. Do not use an
along the edge of the cover until impact wrench to remove the
it comes off. Be careful; the wheel nuts if this vehicle has
edges may be sharp. Do not try wheel locks.
to remove the cover with your
bare hands.
Store the wheel cover securely
in the rear of the vehicle until
you have the flat tire repaired or 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do
replaced. not remove them — using the
If the vehicle has aluminum wrench. For wheels with a wheel
wheels, remove the wheel nut lock key, use the wheel lock key 4. To identify the appropriate
caps using the wheel wrench. between the lock nut and jacking location, find the triangle
wrench. The key is supplied in or rectangular notch about
the front passenger door pocket. 30.5 cm (12 in) from the front tire
or about 27 cm (10.5 in) from the
rear tire.

10-60 Vehicle Care
6. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the
the compact spare tire near you. wrench clockwise in the jack.
Raise the vehicle far enough off
{ WARNING the ground so that there is
enough room for the spare tire to
Getting under a vehicle when it is fit under the wheel well.
lifted on a jack is dangerous. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and
If the vehicle slips off the jack, the flat tire.
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
Triangle Shown, Without Similar
The triangle may be located
near each wheel on the vehicle's
exterior.
{ WARNING
Notice: If a jack is used to raise Raising the vehicle with the jack
the vehicle without positioning it improperly positioned can
correctly, the vehicle could be damage the vehicle and even
damaged. When raising the make the vehicle fall. To help
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact avoid personal injury and vehicle
with the rear axle control arms. damage, be sure to fit the jack lift 9. Remove the plastic spare tire
head into the proper location heat shield by pulling the rubber
5. Attach the wrench to the jack, latch. Store the plastic spare tire
and turn the wrench clockwise to before raising the vehicle.
heat shield. See “Storing the
raise the jack head 7.6 cm (3 in). Spare Tire” later in this section
for more information.

Vehicle Care 10-61
10. Remove any rust or dirt from

{ WARNING the wheel bolts, mounting WARNING (Continued)
surfaces, and spare wheel.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the after replacing. Follow the torque
parts to which it is fastened, can 11. Place the spare tire on the specification supplied by the
make wheel nuts become loose wheel mounting surface. aftermarket manufacturer when
after time. The wheel could come 12. Put the nuts on by hand by using accessory locking wheel
off and cause an accident. When turning them clockwise until the nuts. See Capacities and
changing a wheel, remove any wheel is held against the Specifications on page 12‑2 for
rust or dirt from places where the mounting surface. Make sure original equipment wheel nut
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In the rounded end is toward the torque specifications.
an emergency, a cloth or a paper wheel.
towel can be used; however, use 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching Notice: Improperly tightened
a scraper or wire brush later to the wrench to the jack and wheel nuts can lead to brake
remove all rust or dirt. turning the wrench pulsation and rotor damage. To
counterclockwise. Lower the avoid expensive brake repairs,
jack completely. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
{ WARNING { WARNING proper torque specification. See
Never use oil or grease on bolts Capacities and Specifications on
or nuts because the nuts might Wheel nuts that are improperly or page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
come loose. The vehicle's wheel incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification.
could fall off, causing a crash. the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
(Continued)

10-62 Vehicle Care
Storing the Spare Tire

{ WARNING
{ WARNING Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
The underbody-mounted spare
compartment of the vehicle could
tire needs to be stored with the
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
valve stem pointing down. If the
collision, loose equipment could
spare tire is stored with the valve
strike someone. Store all these in
stem pointing upwards, the
the proper place.
secondary latch will not work
properly and the spare tire could
loosen and suddenly fall from the To store the spare tire:
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in vehicle. If this happened when 1. Lay the compact spare tire near
a crisscross sequence, as the vehicle was being driven, the the rear of the vehicle with the
shown. tire might contact a person or valve stem down.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit another vehicle, causing injury
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire
on the vehicle's compact spare. and damage to itself. Be sure the
heat shield on the compact
If you try to put a wheel cover on underbody-mounted spare tire is spare tire.
the compact spare, the cover or stored with the valve stem
the spare could be damaged. pointing down. 3. Slide the cable retainer through
the center of the wheel and start
to raise the compact spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.

Vehicle Care 10-63
4. When the compact spare tire is Storing the Flat Tire

almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is
toward the rear of the vehicle.
This position helps when
checking the air pressure in the
compact spare tire.
5. Raise the tire fully against the
underside of the vehicle.
Continue turning the wrench until
you feel more than two clicks.
This indicates that the compact
6. Make sure the tire is stored
spare tire is secure and the
securely. Push, pull, and then try
cable is tight. The spare tire
to turn the tire. If the tire moves, 1. Cable
hoist cannot be overtightened.
use the wrench to tighten the
cable. 2. Liftgate Hinges
3. Spare Tire Heat Shield
4. Center of the Wheel
5. Door Striker
1. Remove the cable package from
the jack storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by
tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.

10-64 Vehicle Care
3. Put the flat tire in the rear 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it Storing the Tools
storage area with the valve stem is secure.
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
4. Pull the cable (1) through the
door striker (5), the center of the
wheel (4), and the plastic spare
tire heat shield (3), as shown.
1. Tool Bag
8. Make sure the metal tube is 2. Wing Bolt
centered at the striker. Push the
tube toward the front of the 3. Jack
vehicle. Put back all tools as they were
9. Close the liftgate and make sure stored in the jack storage
it is latched properly. compartment and put the
5. Hook the cable onto the outside compartment cover back on.
portion of the liftgate hinges (2). 1. Ensure that the bottom of the
6. Hook the other end of the cable jack is facing toward you.
onto the outside portion of the 2. Replace the tool bag (1).
liftgate hinge on the other side of
the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-65
3. Turn the jack (3) on its side and Compact Spare Tire Stop as soon as possible and check
place down on the holding that the spare tire is correctly
bracket. inflated after being installed on the
4. Reinstall the wing bolt (2) by
{ WARNING vehicle. The compact spare tire is
turning clockwise. Driving with more than one designed for temporary use only.
The vehicle will perform differently
5. To replace the cover, line up the compact spare tire at a time could
with the spare tire installed and it is
tab at the front of the cover with result in loss of braking and
recommended that the vehicle
the notch in the cover opening. handling. This could lead to a speed be limited to 80 km/h (50
Push the cover in place and crash and you or others could be mph). To conserve the tread of the
make sure that the rear clips are injured. Use only one compact spare tire, have the standard tire
in the slots and push the cover spare tire at a time. repaired or replaced as soon as
closed. convenient and return the spare tire
Store the center cap or the plastic If this vehicle has a compact spare to the storage area.
bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire, it was fully inflated when new; Notice: When the compact spare
tire is put back on the vehicle. When however, it can lose air over time. is installed, do not take the
you replace the compact spare with Check the inflation pressure vehicle through an automatic car
a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on regularly. It should be 420 kPa wash with guide rails. The
wheel covers or the center cap. (60 psi). compact spare can get caught on
Hand-tighten them over the wheel the rails which can damage the
nuts, using the wrench. tire, wheel, and other parts of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.

10-66 Vehicle Care
Do not mix the compact spare tire or Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps
wheel with other wheels or tires. could result in costly damage to
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire For more information about the the vehicle that would not be
and its wheel together. vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty.
page 10‑22.
Performance of the All-Wheel Trying to start the vehicle by
Drive (AWD) system will be If the vehicle battery has run down, pushing or pulling it will not
automatically reduced to protect the you may want to use another work, and it could damage the
system when using the compact vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle.
spare. To restore the AWD and start your vehicle. Be sure to use
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
prevent excessive wear on the the following steps to do it safely.
have a 12-volt battery with a
clutch in the AWD, replace the negative ground system.
compact spare tire with a full-size
tire as soon as possible.
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that
Batteries can hurt you. They can has a 12-volt system with a
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the negative ground for jump
compact spare. Using them can be dangerous because:
starting. If the other vehicle does
damage the vehicle and the . They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a
chains. Do not use tire chains on burn you. negative ground, both vehicles
the compact spare. can be damaged.
. They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
. They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.

Vehicle Care 10-67
2. Get the vehicles close enough Notice: If any accessories are left
so the jumper cables can reach, on or plugged in during the jump { WARNING
but be sure the vehicles are not starting procedure, they could be
touching each other. If they are, damaged. The repairs would not Using a match near a battery can
it could cause a ground be covered by the vehicle cause battery gas to explode.
connection you do not want. You warranty. Whenever possible, People have been hurt doing this,
would not be able to start your turn off or unplug all accessories and some have been blinded.
vehicle, and the bad grounding on either vehicle when jump Use a flashlight if you need more
could damage the electrical starting the vehicle. light.
systems. 3. Turn off the ignition on both Be sure the batteries have
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles. Unplug unnecessary enough water. You do not need to
vehicles rolling, set the parking accessories plugged into the add water to the ACDelco®
brake firmly on both vehicles cigarette lighter or the accessory battery (or batteries) installed in
involved in the jump start power outlets. Turn off the radio your new vehicle. But if a battery
procedure. Put an automatic and all lamps that are not has filler caps, be sure the right
transmission in P (Park) or a needed. This will avoid sparks amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
manual transmission in Neutral and help save both batteries. add water to take care of that
before setting the parking brake. And it could save the radio! first. If you do not, explosive gas
If one of the vehicles is a 4. Open the hoods and locate the could be present.
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure positive (+) and negative (−)
the transfer case is not in Battery fluid contains acid that
terminal locations on the other
Neutral. can burn you. Do not get it on
vehicle. Your vehicle has a
you. If you accidentally get it in
remote positive (+) and a remote
negative (−) jump starting your eyes or on your skin, flush
terminal. See Engine the place with water and get
Compartment Overview on medical help immediately.
page 10‑5 for the terminal
locations.

10-68 Vehicle Care
Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end touch
{ WARNING negative (−) or you will get a metal. Connect it to the
short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the good
Fans or other moving engine battery and maybe other parts battery. Use a remote
parts can injure you badly. Keep too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
your hands away from moving negative (−) cable to the has one.
parts once the engine is running. negative (−) terminal on the dead 8. Now connect the black
battery because this can cause negative (−) cable to the
5. Check that the jumper cables do sparks. negative (−) terminal of the good
not have loose or missing battery. Use a remote
insulation. If they do, you could negative (−) terminal if the
get a shock. The vehicles could vehicle has one.
be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch
Before you connect the cables, anything until the next step. The
here are some basic things you other end of the negative (−)
should know. Positive (+) will go cable does not go to the dead
to positive (+) or to a remote battery. It goes to a heavy,
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle unpainted metal engine part,
has one. Negative (−) will go to a or to a remote negative (−)
heavy, unpainted metal engine terminal on the vehicle with the
part or to a remote negative (−) dead battery.
terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.

Vehicle Care 10-69
10. Now start the vehicle with the Towing

good battery and run the
engine for a while.
Towing the Vehicle
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not Notice: Incorrectly towing a
start after a few tries, it disabled vehicle may cause
probably needs service. damage. The damage would not
be covered by the vehicle
Notice: If the jumper cables are warranty.
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
may occur and damage the car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.
vehicle. The repairs would not be If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the
9. Connect the other end of the covered by the vehicle warranty. drive wheels cannot contact the
negative (−) cable at least 45 cm Always connect and remove the road while the vehicle is being
(18 in) away from the dead jumper cables in the correct towed. A wheel dolly must be used
battery, but not near engine order, making sure that the to lift all drive wheels off the ground.
parts that move. cables do not touch each other or Consult your dealer or a
The electrical connection is just other metal. professional towing service if the
as good there, and the chance Jumper Cable Removal disabled vehicle must be towed.
of sparks getting back to the To tow the vehicle behind another
battery is much less. Reverse the sequence exactly when
removing the jumper cables. vehicle for recreational purposes,
Your vehicle has a remote such as behind a motor home, see
negative (−) terminal for this “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
purpose. section.

10-70 Vehicle Care

. What is the distance that will be
Recreational Vehicle travelled? Some vehicles have
Dinghy Towing
Towing restrictions on how far and how
Recreational vehicle towing means long they can be towed.
towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment
vehicle – such as behind a going to be used? See your
motorhome. The two most common dealer or trailering professional
types of recreational vehicle towing for additional advice and
are known as dinghy towing and equipment recommendations.
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is
towing the vehicle with all four
. Is the vehicle ready to be
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing towed? Just as preparing the
is towing the vehicle with two vehicle for a long trip, make sure
wheels on the ground and two the vehicle is prepared to be
wheels up on a device known as a towed.
dolly. If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it
can be dinghy towed from the front.
Here are some important things to These vehicles may also be towed
consider before recreational vehicle by putting the front wheels on a
towing: dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this
. What is the towing capacity of section.
the towing vehicle? Be sure to If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it
read the tow vehicle can be dinghy towed from the front.
manufacturer's These vehicles can also be towed
recommendations. by placing them on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the
ground. These vehicles cannot be
towed using a dolly.

Vehicle Care 10-71
For vehicles being dinghy towed, 6. To prevent the battery from Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
the vehicle should be run at the draining while the vehicle is exceeded while towing the
beginning of each day and at each being towed, remove the 15 amp vehicle, it could be damaged.
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. ECM fuse and the 15 amp Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
This will ensure proper lubrication of Onstar fuse. These are in the while towing the vehicle.
transmission components. Reinstall battery compartment behind the Once the destination is reached:
the fuse to start the vehicle. passenger seat on the floor.
Also, remove the 50 amp BATT1 1. Set the parking brake.
To tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground: fuse from the underhood fuse 2. Reinstall the fuses.
block and store all fuses in a
1. Position the vehicle to be towed, safe location. See Engine 3. Shift the transmission to
shift the transmission to Compartment Fuse Block on P (Park), turn the ignition to
P (Park), and turn the ignition to page 10‑29. LOCK/OFF and remove the key
LOCK/OFF. from the ignition.
7. Release the parking brake.
2. Secure the vehicle to the towing 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the
vehicle. Notice: If the vehicle is towed towing vehicle.
without performing each of the
3. Set the parking brake. steps listed under “Dinghy Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with
Towing,” the automatic the front drive wheels on the
4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ ground if one of the front tires is
ACCESSORY. transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the a compact spare tire. Towing with
5. Shift the transmission to dinghy towing procedure prior to two different tire sizes on the
N (Neutral). and after towing the vehicle. front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the
transmission.

10-72 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Dolly Towing 3. Set the parking brake.

Vehicles) (Front-Wheel-Drive 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
Vehicles Only) straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be

towed with two wheels on the To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle
ground. To properly tow these from the front with two wheels on
vehicles, they should be placed on the ground:
a platform trailer with all four wheels
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

Vehicle Care 10-73
Appearance Care exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)

can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
Exterior Care
Rinse the vehicle well, before
Washing the Vehicle washing and after, to remove all
To preserve the vehicle's finish, cleaning agents completely. If they
wash it often and out of direct are allowed to dry on the surface,
sunlight. they could stain.
Notice: Do not use Dry the finish with a soft, clean

petroleum-based, acidic, chamois or an all-cotton towel to
or abrasive cleaning agents as avoid surface scratches and water
they can damage the vehicle's spotting.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also, paint, metal, or plastic parts. Finish Care
repairs would not be covered by If damage occurs, it would not be
the vehicle warranty. Never have covered by the vehicle's warranty. Application of aftermarket clearcoat
the vehicle towed from the rear. Approved cleaning products can sealant/wax materials is not
be obtained from your dealer. recommended. If painted surfaces
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. are damaged, see your dealer to
Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct have the damage assessed and
product usage, necessary safety repaired. Foreign materials such as
precautions, and appropriate calcium chloride and other salts, ice
disposal of any vehicle care melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
product. sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
Notice: Avoid using damage the vehicle's finish if they
high-pressure washes closer than remain on painted surfaces. Wash
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the the vehicle as soon as possible.
vehicle. Use of power washers

10-74 Vehicle Care
If necessary, use non-abrasive Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
cleaners that are marked safe for Parts cloth or paper towel soaked with
painted surfaces to remove foreign Regularly clean bright metal parts windshield washer fluid or a mild
matter. with water or chrome polish on detergent. Wash the windshield
Occasional hand waxing or mild chrome or stainless steel trim, thoroughly when cleaning the
polishing should be done to remove if necessary. blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
residue from the paint finish. See a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
For aluminum, never use auto or treatments may cause wiper
your dealer for approved cleaning chrome polish, steam, or caustic
products. streaking.
soap to clean. A coating of wax,
Do not apply waxes or polishes to rubbed to a high polish, is Replace the wiper blades if they are
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, recommended for all bright metal worn or damaged. Damage can be
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint parts. caused by extreme dusty
as damage can occur. conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ snow, and ice.
Notice: Machine compounding or Lenses and Emblems
aggressive polishing on a Weatherstrips
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
Apply silicone grease on
may damage it. Use only soft cloth, and a car washing soap
weatherstrips to make them last
non-abrasive waxes and polishes to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
longer, seal better, and not stick or
that are made for a basecoat/ emblems. Follow instructions under
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips
clearcoat paint finish on the "Washing the Vehicle" in this
once a year. Black marks from
vehicle. section.
rubber material on painted surfaces
To keep the paint finish looking new, Windshield and Wiper Blades can be removed by rubbing with a
keep the vehicle garaged or clean cloth. See Recommended
Clean the outside of the windshield Fluids and Lubricants on
covered whenever possible. with glass cleaner. page 11‑12.

Vehicle Care 10-75
Tires and dust. Always wash the check constant velocity joints,
chrome with soap and water after rubber boots, and axle seals for
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
exposure. leaks.
clean the tires.
Notice: To avoid surface damage, Body Component Lubrication
Notice: Using petroleum-based
do not use strong soaps,
tire dressing products on the Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
vehicle may damage the paint hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
finish and/or tires. When applying steel fuel door hinge unless the
that contain acid on aluminum or
a tire dressing, always wipe off components are plastic. Applying
chrome-plated wheels. Use only
any overspray from all painted silicone grease on weatherstrips
approved cleaners. Also, never
surfaces on the vehicle. with a clean cloth will make them
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an last longer, seal better, and not stick
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum or squeak.
or Chrome automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning Underbody Maintenance
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild brushes. Damage could occur
soap and water to clean the wheels. and the repairs would not be Use plain water to flush dirt and
After rinsing thoroughly with clean covered by the vehicle warranty. debris from the vehicle's underbody.
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. Your dealer or an underbody car
A wax may then be applied. Steering, Suspension, and washing system can do this. If not
Notice: Chrome wheels and other Chassis Components removed, rust and corrosion can
chrome trim may be damaged if Visually inspect the front and rear develop.
the vehicle is not washed after suspension and steering system for Sheet Metal Damage
driving on roads that have been damaged, loose, or missing parts or
sprayed with magnesium, signs of wear. Inspect the power If the vehicle is damaged and
calcium, or sodium chloride. steering for proper hook-up, binding, requires sheet metal repair or
These chlorides are used on leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually replacement, make sure the body
roads for conditions such as ice repair shop applies anti-corrosion

10-76 Vehicle Care
material to parts repaired or Interior Care Cleaners should be removed

replaced to restore corrosion quickly. Never allow cleaners to
protection. To prevent dirt particle abrasions, remain on the surface being
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. cleaned for extended periods
Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
parts will provide the corrosion of time.
that newspapers or dark garments
protection while maintaining the that can transfer color to home Cleaners may contain solvents that
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently can become concentrated in the
transfer color to the vehicle's interior. Before using cleaners, read
Finish Damage and adhere to all safety instructions
interior.
Quickly repair minor chips and on the label. While cleaning the
scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove interior, maintain adequate
available from your dealer to avoid dust from knobs and crevices on the ventilation by opening the doors and
corrosion. Larger areas of finish instrument cluster. Using a mild windows.
damage can be corrected in your soap solution, immediately remove
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect To prevent damage, do not clean
dealer's body and paint shop. the interior using the following
repellent from all interior surfaces or
Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result. cleaners or techniques:
Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for
. Never use a razor or any other
and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners sharp object to remove a soil
causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the from any interior surface.
discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent . Never use a brush with stiff
dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. Apply all bristles.
surface. cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
. Never rub any surface
on any switches or controls. aggressively or with excessive
pressure.

Vehicle Care 10-77

. Do not use laundry detergents or Notice: To prevent scratching, Fabric/Carpet/Suede
dishwashing soaps with never use abrasive cleaners on
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, Start by vacuuming the surface
automotive glass. Abrasive
use approximately 20 drops per using a soft brush attachment. If a
cleaners or aggressive cleaning
3.78 L (1 gal) of water. rotating brush attachment is being
may damage the rear window
A concentrated soap solution will used during vacuuming, only use it
defogger.
leave a residue that creates on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not Notice: Cleaning the windshield gently remove as much of the soil
use solutions that contain strong with water during the first three to as possible using one of the
or caustic soap. six months of ownership will following techniques:
reduce tendency to fog.
. Do not heavily saturate the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
upholstery when cleaning. Speaker Covers towel. Continue blotting until no
more soil can be removed.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners Vacuum around a speaker cover
containing solvents. gently, so that the speaker will not . For solid soils, remove as much
be damaged. Clean spots with just as possible prior to vacuuming.
Interior Glass water and mild soap. To clean:
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric Coated Moldings 1. Saturate a clean lint-free
dampened with water. Wipe droplets
Coated moldings should be cleaned. colorfast cloth with water or club
left behind with a clean dry cloth.
soda. Microfiber cloth is
Commercial glass cleaners may be . When lightly soiled, wipe with a recommended to prevent lint
used, if necessary, after cleaning sponge or soft lint-free cloth transfer to the fabric or carpet.
the interior glass with plain water. dampened with water.
2. Remove excess moisture by
. When heavily soiled, use warm gently wringing until water does
soapy water. not drip from the cleaning cloth.

10-78 Vehicle Care
3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather,
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays
a clean area frequently to Use a soft microfiber cloth
prevent forcing the soil in to the For vehicles with high gloss dampened with water to remove
fabric. surfaces or vehicle displays, use a dust and loose dirt. For a more
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. thorough cleaning, use a soft
4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the microfiber cloth dampened with a
soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle mild soap solution.
longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. Notice: Soaking or saturating
scratch the surface. Then use the leather, especially perforated
5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to leather, as well as other interior
removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners surfaces, may cause permanent
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash damage. Wipe excess moisture
soda or plain water. the microfiber cloth separately, from these surfaces after
using mild soap. Do not use bleach cleaning and allow them to dry
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
removed, it may be necessary to naturally. Never use heat, steam,
and air dry before next use. spot lifters, or spot removers. Do
use a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small Notice: Do not attach a device not use cleaners that contain
hidden area for colorfastness before with a suction cup to the display. silicone or wax-based products.
using a commercial upholstery This may cause damage and Cleaners containing these
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring would not be covered by the solvents can permanently change
formation occurs, clean the entire warranty. the appearance and feel of leather
fabric or carpet. or soft trim and are not
recommended.
Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.

Vehicle Care 10-79
Do not use cleaners that increase Use the following guidelines for
gloss, especially on the instrument { WARNING proper floor mat usage.
panel. Reflected glare can decrease . The original equipment floor
visibility through the windshield Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In mats were designed for your
under certain conditions. vehicle. If the floor mats need
a crash, they might not be able to
Notice: Use of air fresheners may provide adequate protection. replacing, it is recommended
cause permanent damage to Clean safety belts only with mild that GM certified floor mats be
plastics and painted surfaces. soap and lukewarm water. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
If an air freshener comes in may not fit properly and may
contact with any plastic or interfere with the accelerator or
painted surface in the vehicle, Floor Mats brake pedal. Always check that
blot immediately and clean with a the floor mats do not interfere
soft cloth dampened with a mild with the pedals.
soap solution. Damage caused by { WARNING . Use the floor mat with the
air fresheners would not be If a floor mat is the wrong size or correct side up. Do not turn
covered by the vehicle warranty. is not properly installed, it can it over.
Cargo Cover and interfere with the pedals. . Do not place anything on top of
Convenience Net Interference with the pedals can the driver side floor mat.
cause unintended acceleration
Wash with warm water and mild and/or increased stopping
. Use only a single floor mat on
detergent. Do not use chlorine distance which can cause a crash the driver side.
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
and injury. Make sure the floor . Do not place one floor mat on
then dry completely.
mat does not interfere with the top of another.
Care of Safety Belts pedals.
Keep belts clean and dry.

10-80 Vehicle Care
Button Retainer 3. Make sure the floor mat is 2. Pull up on the floor mat.
properly secured and verify that 3. Center the slot in the floor mat
Floor mats with a button-type
it does not interfere with the grommet with the knob on the
retainer.
pedals. floor and set into position.
Knob Retainer 4. Turn the knob until it is
Floor mats with a knob retainer. perpendicular to the slot in the
grommet to lock the mat in
place.
5. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mat
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
unlock and remove. Removing and Replacing the
2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining Floor Mat
up the floor mat openings over 1. Turn the knob until it is aligned
the carpet retainers and with the slot in the floor mat
snapping into position. grommet.

Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the

importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Notice: Damage caused by
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application improper maintenance can lead to
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 costly repairs and may not be
Your dealer has trained technicians covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additional Maintenance who can perform required Maintenance intervals, checks,
and Care maintenance using genuine inspections, recommended fluids,
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have up‐to‐ and lubricants are important to
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 date tools and equipment for fast keep the vehicle in good working
and accurate diagnostics. Many condition.
Recommended Fluids, dealers have extended evening and
Lubricants, and Parts The Tire Rotation and Required
Saturday hours, courtesy
Recommended Fluids and Services are the responsibility of the
transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 vehicle owner. It is recommended to
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement have your dealer perform these
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14 condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.

11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use Refer to the information in the Refer to the information in the
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Maintenance Schedule Additional Maintenance Schedule Additional
There may need to be more Required Services ‐ Normal chart. Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
frequent checks and services. The The Additional Required Services ‐
Additional Required Services ‐
Normal are for vehicles that:
Severe are for vehicles that are: { WARNING
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic Performing maintenance work can
. Carry passengers and cargo in hot weather.
within recommended limits on be dangerous and can cause
the Tire and Loading Information . Mainly driven in hilly or serious injury. Perform
label. See Vehicle Load Limits mountainous terrain. maintenance work only if the
on page 9‑9. . Frequently towing a trailer. required information, proper tools,
and equipment are available.
. Are driven on reasonable road . Used for high speed or If they are not, see your dealer to
surfaces within legal driving competitive driving.
limits. have a trained technician do the
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery work. See Doing Your Own
. Use the recommended fuel. See service. Service Work on page 10‑3.
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑38.


. Check engine coolant level. See
Maintenance for more than a year. The engine oil
and filter must be changed at least Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.
Schedule once a year and the oil life system . Check windshield washer fluid
must be reset. Your trained dealer level. See Washer Fluid on
Owner Checks and Services technician can perform this work. page 10‑19.
At Each Fuel Stop If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
. Check the engine oil level. See within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the blades for wear, cracking,
Engine Oil on page 10‑7. last service. Reset the oil life or contamination. See Exterior
system when the oil is changed. Care on page 10‑73. Replace
Once a Month worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Engine Oil Life System on
. Check the tire inflation page 10‑9. See Wiper Blade Replacement
pressures. See Tire Pressure on on page 10‑24.
page 10‑42. Tire Rotation and Required . Check tire inflation pressures.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Services Every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on
Tire Inspection on page 10‑48. 7,500 mi page 10‑42.
. Check the windshield washer Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Inspect tire wear. See Tire
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on the vehicle, and perform the Inspection on page 10‑48.
page 10‑19. following services. See Tire .
Rotation on page 10‑48. Visually check for fluid leaks.
Engine Oil Change . Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
. Check engine oil level and oil
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
SOON message displays, have the change engine oil and filter, and page 10‑11.
engine oil and filter changed within reset oil life system. See Engine . Inspect brake system.
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven Oil on page 10‑7 and Engine Oil
under the best conditions, the Life System on page 10‑9.
engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service


. Visually inspect steering, . Check ignition transmission lock.
suspension, and chassis See Ignition Transmission Lock
components for damaged, loose, Check on page 10‑23.
or missing parts or signs of . Check parking brake and
wear. See Exterior Care on automatic transmission park
page 10‑73. mechanism. See Park Brake and
. Check restraint system P (Park) Mechanism Check on
components. See Safety System page 10‑23.
Check on page 3‑21. . Check accelerator pedal for
. Visually inspect fuel system for damage, high effort, or binding.
damage or leaks. Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect exhaust system . Visually inspect gas strut for
and nearby heat shields for signs of wear, cracks, or other
loose or damaged parts. damage. Check the hold open
. Lubricate body components. See ability of the strut. See your
Exterior Care on page 10‑73. dealer if service is required.
. Check starter switch. See Starter
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
Switch Check on page 10‑22. if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2‑20.
. Check automatic transmission
shift lock control function. See
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check on
page 10‑23.


Footnotes — Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services — Normal (4) Do not directly power wash the
(1) Or every two years, whichever transfer case output seals. High
comes first. More frequent pressure water can overcome the
replacement may be needed if the seals and contaminate the transfer
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
traffic, areas with poor air quality, decrease the life of the transfer
or areas with high dust levels. case and should be replaced.
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 10‑12.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first.
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has (7) Inspect for fraying, excessive
one, works properly. Replace as cracking, or damage; replace,
needed. if needed.


Footnotes — Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services — Severe (4) Do not directly power wash the
Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever transfer case output seals. High . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent pressure water can overcome the Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the seals and contaminate the transfer components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy case fluid. Contaminated fluid will 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, decrease the life of the transfer . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. case and should be replaced.
performed once a year.
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 10‑12.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first.
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has (7) Inspect for fraying, excessive
one, works properly. Replace as cracking, or damage; replace,
needed. if needed.


. To avoid break‐down or failure to . Trained dealer technicians have
Additional start the vehicle, maintain a access to tools and equipment
Maintenance and Care battery with full cranking power. to inspect the brakes and
. Trained dealer technicians have recommend quality parts
Your vehicle is an important engineered for the vehicle.
investment and caring for it properly the diagnostic equipment to test
may help to avoid future costly the battery and ensure that the Fluids
repairs. To maintain vehicle connections and cables are
corrosion‐free. Proper fluid levels and approved
performance, additional fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
maintenance services may be Belts and components. See
required. It is recommended that Recommended Fluids and
your dealer perform these services
. Belts may need replacing if they
squeak or show signs of Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM
— their trained dealer technicians approved fluids.
know your vehicle best. Your dealer cracking or splitting.
can also perform a thorough . Trained dealer technicians can
. Engine oil and windshield
assessment with a multi‐point inspect the belts and washer fluid levels should be
inspection to recommend when your recommend replacement when checked at every fuel fill.
vehicle may need attention. The necessary. . Instrument cluster lights may
following list is intended to explain come on to indicate that fluids
the services and conditions to look Brakes may be low and need to be
for that may indicate services are Brakes stop the vehicle and are filled.
required. crucial to safe driving.
Hoses
Battery . Signs of brake wear may include
chirping, grinding, or squealing Hoses transport fluids and should
The battery supplies power to start be regularly inspected to ensure
the engine and operate any noises, or difficulty stopping.
that there are no cracks or leaks.
additional electrical accessories. With a multi‐point inspection, your
dealer can inspect the hoses and
advise if replacement is needed.

Lamps
. As part of the multi‐point Vehicle Care
inspection, trained dealer
Properly working headlamps, technicians can visually inspect To help keep the vehicle looking like
taillamps, and brake lamps are the shocks and struts for signs new, vehicle care products are
important to see and be seen on of leaking, blown seals, available from your dealer. For
the road. or damage, and can advise information on how to clean and
. Signs that the headlamps need when service is needed. protect the vehicle’s interior and
attention include dimming, failure exterior, see Interior Care on
Tires page 10‑76 and Exterior Care on
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires need to be properly inflated, page 10‑73.
checked periodically to ensure rotated, and balanced. Maintaining Wheel Alignment
that they light when braking. the tires can save money, fuel, and
can reduce the risk of tire failure. Wheel alignment is critical for
. With a multi‐point inspection, ensuring that the tires deliver
your dealer can check the lamps . Signs that the tires need to be optimal wear and performance.
and note any concerns. replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
. Signs that the alignment may
Shocks and Struts or fabric showing through the need to be adjusted include
Shocks and struts help aid in control rubber; cracks or cuts in the pulling, improper vehicle
for a smoother ride. tread or sidewall; or a bulge or handling, or unusual tire wear.
split in the tire. . Your dealer has the required
. Signs of wear may include
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ . Trained dealer technicians can equipment to ensure proper
sway while braking, longer inspect and recommend the right wheel alignment.
stopping distance, or uneven tires. Your dealer can also
tire wear. provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.

Windshield Wiper Blades

For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
. Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
if needed. replace them when needed.

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Carrier Assembly— Differential (Rear SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in
Drive Module) and Transfer Case Canada 89021678).
(Power Transfer Unit)
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).

Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C
Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20958479 CF179C
Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 25941805 —
Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 25941804 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 25920067 —

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading

Odometer
Reading

Odometer
Reading

Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.

12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Capacities
Application Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 L 6.4 qt
Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal
Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt
Transfer Case Fluid 1.0 L 1.0 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑10 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing

Customer Information 13-1
Customer Roadside Assistance Program Reporting Safety Defects

(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Reporting Safety Defects to
Information Roadside Assistance the United States
Program (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information Scheduling Service the Canadian
Customer Satisfaction Appointments (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Reporting Safety Defects to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Courtesy Transportation General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Satisfaction Program (U.S. and
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4 Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Collision Damage Repair Privacy
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Service Publications Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance for Text OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S. Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-20
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Radio Frequency
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21
GM Mobility Reimbursement Radio Frequency
Program (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

13-2 Customer Information
Customer Information STEP TWO: If after contacting a

member of dealership management,
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's
Customer Satisfaction resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest
Procedure (U.S. and further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first.
Canada) Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your
Your satisfaction and goodwill are Canada, call General Motors of
important to your dealer and to dealer are committed to making
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns 1-800-263-3777 (English),
with the sales transaction or the with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or We encourage you to call the after following the procedure
service departments. Sometimes, toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you
however, despite the best intentions inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business
of all concerned, misunderstandings following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
can occur. If your concern has not give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
been resolved to your satisfaction, representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an
the following steps should be taken: . Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
with a member of dealership from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive
management. Normally, concerns title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
can be quickly resolved at that level. the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle
If the matter has already been through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may
reviewed with the sales, service, . Dealership name and location. be required to resort to this informal
or parts manager, contact the owner dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the
of your dealership or the general
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
manager.
case will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with the STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning
decision given in your case, you Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
may reject it and proceed with any not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
other venue for relief available addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
to you. procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
You may contact the BBB Auto Line and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Program using the toll-free Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
telephone number or write them at participation in a no-charge or write to:
the following address: Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
BBB Auto Line Program has committed to binding arbitration
Council of Better Business Bureaus, General Motors of Canada Limited
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Inc. factory-related vehicle service
4200 Wilson Boulevard 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Suite 800 the review of the facts involved by
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
designed so that the entire dispute
This program is available in all settlement process, from the time
50 states and the District of you file your complaint to the final
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by decision, should be completed in
vehicle age, mileage, and other about 70 days. We believe our
factors. General Motors reserves impartial program offers advantages
the right to change eligibility over courts in most jurisdictions
limitations and/or discontinue its because it is informal, quick, and
participation in this program. free of charge.

Customer Satisfaction However, we recognize that despite STEP THREE

the good intentions of all parties
Procedure (Mexico) involved, sometimes a
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
misunderstanding may occur. dealer, please call the General
If you have a problem that has not Motors Customer Assistance
been satisfactorily handled through Center (CAC) and provide the
the normal means, we suggest the following information:
following steps: . Name
STEP ONE . Address
Did you get the Warranty Extension Explain your case to your dealer . Phone number
Plan? This plan is recommended by service agent, service manager,
General Motors to supplement the dealer sales agent, or sales
. Model year
warranty included with the new manager, depending on your case. . Brand
vehicle purchase.
Make sure that they have all . Vehicle Identification
See your dealer for details. necessary information. They are Number (VIN)
interested in your continual
Customer Assistance . Mileage
satisfaction.
Procedure . Delivery date
STEP TWO
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are . Description of the problem
very important to your dealer and If you are not satisfied, please
. Dealership name
General Motors. contact the general manager or your
dealership owner to ask for their . Dealership address
Normally, any problem with the
help. If they are not able to resolve
transaction, sale, or usage of the See Customer Assistance Offices
your case, ask them to contact the
vehicle must be handled by your (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
right people at General Motors for
dealer sales or service departments. Customer Assistance Offices
support, if needed.
(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Customer Assistance Canada All e-mail inquiries to the Customer

Assistance Center (CAC) should be
Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
Chevrolet encourages customers to
CA1-163-005 Mexico
call the toll-free number for
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
assistance. However, if a customer From Mexico City
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
www.gm.ca 5329-0811
the letter should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) From Other Mexico Locations
United States and Puerto Rico 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text 01-800-466-0811
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Telephone devices (TTYs)) United States and Canada
Center Roadside Assistance:
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-268-6800 1-866-466-8190
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 Overseas Costa Rica
www.Chevrolet.com
Please contact the local General 00-800-052-1005
1-800-222-1020
Motors Business Unit. Guatemala
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) 1-800-999-5252
Roadside Assistance: Customer Assistance
1-800-243-8872 Offices (Mexico) Panama
From U.S. Virgin Islands: To contact the Customer Assistance 00-800-052-0001
1-800-496-9994 Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section. Dominican Republic
Customer assistance is available 1-888-751-5301
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.

El Salvador Online Owner Center D (Preferred Dealer

800-6273 Information): Select a preferred
Online Owner Experience dealer and view dealer location,
Honduras (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com maps, phone numbers, and hours.
800-0122-6101 The Chevrolet online owner J (Warranty Tracking
experience is a one-stop resource Information): Track the vehicle’s
Customer Assistance for that allows interaction with warranty information.
Chevrolet and keeps important
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific information in one J (Recall Information): View
Users (U.S. and Canada) place. active recalls or search by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See
To assist customers who are deaf, Membership Benefits Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired on page 12‑1.
and who use Text Telephones E (Vehicle Information):
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY Download owner manuals and view H (Other Account Information):
equipment available at its Customer vehicle-specific how-to videos. View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in G (Maintenance Information): radio, and OnStar account
the U.S. can communicate with View maintenance schedules, information.
Chevrolet by dialing: required alerts, OnStar onboard F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in vehicle diagnostic information, and with online help representatives.
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. schedule service appointments. Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
I (Service History): View your vehicle.
printable dealer-recorded service
records and self-recorded service
records.

Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Call
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner (U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program (Mexico)
. Access third party enthusiast As a new owner, your vehicle is
sites and social media networks. automatically enrolled in the
. Locate owner resources such as Roadside Assistance program. The
This program is available to services are available at no cost
lease-end, financing, and qualified applicants for cost
warranty information. under the terms and conditions of
reimbursement of eligible the program. The Roadside
. Retrieve your favorite articles, aftermarket adaptive equipment Assistance program is not part of,
quizzes, tips, and multimedia required for the vehicle, such as or included, in the coverage
galleries organized into the hand controls or a wheelchair/ provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Features and Auto Care scooter lift for the vehicle. Warranty.
Sections. For more information on the limited Roadside Assistance provides
. Download the owner manual for offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or assistance to the driver and
your vehicle, quickly and easily. call the GM Mobility Assistance passengers while driving the vehicle
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text within your city of residence or on
. Find the Telephone (TTY) users, call
Chevrolet-recommended any passable road in Mexico, the
1-800-833-9935. United States, and Canada.
maintenance services for your
vehicle.

Services are subject to the This service is limited to the

. Emergency Towing: Tow to the
limitations described in the following transfer of the vehicle to the nearest dealer for warranty
pages. Program coverage varies by repair facility. service if the vehicle cannot be
country. driven.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Roadside Assistance is available Delivery of enough fuel for the If the vehicle is involved in an
24 hours a day, 365 days of vehicle to get to the nearest accident during the commission
the year. service station. of a crime, administrative
violation, or breach of traffic
This program expires two years . Lock-Out Service: Service to regulations, Roadside
from the date of the invoice for the unlock the vehicle if you are Assistance will not provide
vehicle, regardless of vehicle locked out. service. When the vehicle is not
mileage and changes in vehicle . Battery Jump Start: Service to accessible to be towed, all
ownership. jump start a dead battery. maneuvers required to access it
For more information about the will be at the owner's expense.
. *Emergency Messages:
renewal of this program at the end Transmission of urgent phone If the vehicle is in another city
of its term, contact the Chevrolet messages. outside of your residence,
Customer Assistance Center at Roadside Assistance is limited
. *Emergency Calls: Call for
01-800-466-0800. to moving the vehicle to the
emergency services.
Services Provided nearest dealer. If you would like
. *Dealership Location the vehicle moved to a different
. Flat Tire Change: If unable to Assistance: Information dealer, you will be asked to
change a flat tire, Roadside regarding addresses and cover the difference in cost at
Assistance will provide towing telephone numbers for Chevrolet the time of the move.
service to the nearest authorized dealers.
Chevrolet dealership. It is the
owner's responsibility for the
repair or replacement of the tire.

If the vehicle cannot be received and prior to confirmation by the Complimentary Transportation: If
by the nearest Chevrolet dealer dealership, you are entitled to you prefer to continue your trip
due to scheduling conflicts, the choose one of the following to the intended destination or
vehicle will be taken to a safe alternatives, within the limits of return to your place of
place where it will remain for up existing Roadside Assistance residence, and the trip requires
to 48 hours until it can be taken program guidelines. If the costs more than eight hours driving on
to the dealer. If the storage costs exceed the amount authorized the road, transportation for the
exceed the amount authorized, for these services, you must pay driver and passengers by first
the owner is responsible to pay the difference at the time of class bus or coach commercial
the difference at the time of service. airline will be provided to a
service. Contact Roadside Roadside Assistance will location chosen by Roadside
Assistance for more information coordinate hotel Assistance, depending on
on authorized amounts. accommodations for all vehicle availability at the chosen
. *Trip Interruption: This service travelers for up to two nights. destination. Restrictions apply
is provided if you are prevented based on vehicle specifications.
A rental car will be provided for
from further usage of your up to two days and the vehicle If you are on the road, taxi
vehicle while traveling and it is must be returned to its original service to the nearest bus
not possible for the nearest destination, excluding vehicles station or airport will be
Chevrolet dealership to repair with a carrying capacity greater provided.
the vehicle the same day, than 3.5 tons.
requiring the vehicle to stay at
the dealership for a night or
more. If this happens, in addition
to the previously listed services


. *Complimentary Services Not Included in Roadside
. Food service, beverages,
Transportation for Vehicle Pick Assistance telephone calls, or other extra
Up: Transportation to pick up costs. Accommodation costs
your vehicle after repairs are Roadside Assistance does not apply only to Mexico per the
complete. Once the dealer has cover or reimburse services for the terms and conditions of the
reported that the vehicle has following: Roadside Assistance program.
been repaired, Roadside . Events caused by fraud or bad . Any damage to the vehicle
Assistance will provide bus or faith by the driver. without intent, derived from the
commercial airline one-way . services provided.
Vehicle immobilization situations
service (subject to availability)
due to a major force or . Cost of towing a trailer when
for the person designated by you
unforeseen circumstances, such choosing a Chevrolet dealer that
to collect your vehicle at the
as natural phenomena of an is nearest to the temporary
dealership's location if you or the
extraordinary nature, storage facility for the disabled
designated person are not in the
earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, vehicle.
same town or city as the
and other cyclonic storms.
dealership. . Cost of all maneuvers required
. Vehicle immobilization situations to access the vehicle when it is
*These services are not provided for
arising from car accidents not available to be towed.
U.S. or Canada residents. All
caused by the driver of the
services provided in the U.S. and . Cost of fuel provided.
vehicle or third parties. This
Canada are at the owner's expense
means any occurrence that Routine vehicle repair costs are not
and will be reimbursed by Roadside
causes physical injury to the covered by the Roadside
Assistance.
occupants and/or the vehicle Assistance program. For more
caused by external forces. information, see your new vehicle
. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, warranty.
armed forces or police actions
which prevent timely delivery of
assistance services.


. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Contacting Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
Roadside Assistance services are of Program (U.S. and delivery date of the vehicle.
no cost to you and available Canada)
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
. Description of the problem.
Costs are only incurred in situations For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
Coverage
that exceed the limits of the 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
program, some of which are listed (TTY): 1-888-889-2438). Services are provided up to 5 years/
previously in this section. 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
comes first.
To contact Roadside Assistance by call 1-800-268-6800.
phone, use the following numbers: In the U.S., anyone driving the
Service is available 24 hours a day,
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
Mexico 365 days a year.
person driving the vehicle without
01-800-466-0800 Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not
covered.
United States When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information Roadside Assistance is not a part of
1-866-466-8901 the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ready:
Canada Chevrolet and General Motors of
. Your name, home address, and Canada Limited reserve the right to
1-800-268-6800 home telephone number. make any changes or discontinue
E-mail . Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at
location. any time without notification.
asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com
. Location of the vehicle.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make
any changes or discontinue the . Model, year, color, and license
Roadside Assistance program at plate number of the vehicle.
any time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors of

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to
Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
claims are made too often, or the properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
same type of claim is made many responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
times. replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
Services Provided this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
jump start a dead battery.
Delivery of enough fuel for the registration is required.
vehicle to get to the nearest Services Not Included in . Trip Interruption Benefits and
service station. Roadside Assistance
Assistance: Must be over
. Lock-Out Service: Service to . Impound towing caused by 250 kilometers from where your
unlock the vehicle if you are violation of any laws. trip was started to qualify.
locked out. A remote unlock may . Legal fines. General Motors of Canada
be available if you have OnStar. Limited requires
For security reasons, the driver
. Mounting, dismounting, pre-authorization, original
must present identification or changing of snow tires, detailed receipts, and a copy of
before this service is given. chains, or other traction devices. the repair orders. Once
. Towing or services for vehicles authorization has been received,
. Emergency Tow from a Public
driven on a non-public road or the Roadside Assistance advisor
Road or Highway: Tow to the
highway. will help to make arrangements
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
and explain how to receive
warranty service, or if the vehicle
payment.
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.


. Alternative Service: If If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation
assistance cannot be provided into the service department options are available to assist in
right away, the Roadside immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when
Assistance advisor may give can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required.
permission to get local unless, of course, the problem is
emergency road service. You will Courtesy Transportation is not a
safety related. If it is, please call part of the New Vehicle Limited
receive payment, up to $100, your dealership, let them know this,
after sending the original receipt Warranty. A separate booklet
and ask for instructions. entitled “Limited Warranty and
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be If your dealer requests you to bring Owner Assistance Information”
covered, however any cost for the vehicle for service, you are furnished with each new vehicle
parts and labor for repairs not urged to do so as early in the work provides detailed warranty coverage
covered by the warranty are the day as possible to allow for information.
owner responsibility. same-day repair.
Transportation Options
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Warranty service can generally be
Program (U.S. and completed while you wait. However,
Appointments (U.S. and if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Canada) Canada) to minimize inconvenience by
To enhance your ownership providing several transportation
When the vehicle requires warranty
experience, we and our participating options. Depending on the
service, contact your dealer and
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy circumstances, your dealer can offer
request an appointment. By
Transportation, a customer support one of the following:
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the Shuttle Service
of your transportation needs, your Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle service is the preferred
dealer can help minimize your
extended powertrain, and/or means of offering Courtesy
inconvenience.
hybrid-specific warranties in both Transportation. Dealers may provide
the U.S. and Canada. shuttle service to get you to your

destination with minimal interruption Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program

of your daily schedule. This includes Your dealer may arrange to provide Information
one-way or round-trip shuttle service you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
within reasonable time and distance All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at
parameters of your dealer's area. that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your
Public Transportation or Fuel for an overnight warranty repair. dealer for specific information about
Reimbursement Rental reimbursement will be limited availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original Transportation arrangements will be
If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign
warranty repairs, and public administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement personnel.
transportation is used instead of and meet state/provincial, local, and
your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the right to
expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include unilaterally modify, change,
original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements, or discontinue Courtesy
to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Transportation at any time and to
GM for shuttle service. In addition, You are responsible for fuel usage resolve all questions of claim
for U.S. customers, should you charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and
arrange transportation through a responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its
friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion.
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the
expenses may be available. Claim repair. Collision Damage Repair
amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original It may not be possible to provide a (U.S. and Canada)
receipts. See your dealer for like vehicle as a courtesy rental. If the vehicle is involved in a
information regarding the allowance collision and it is damaged, have the
amounts for reimbursement of fuel damage repaired by a qualified
or other transportation costs. technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision

repairs diminish the vehicle resale performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment.
related failures are not covered by
Collision Parts that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be

If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside Inflates? on page 3‑28. obligated to have the vehicle
Assistance Program (U.S. and repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Canada) on page 13‑11. even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications Or write to:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Booklet. Attention: Customer Service
Service Manuals 47911 Halyard Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
and repair information on the shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without
engines, transmission, axle, notice and without incurring
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time for
steering, body, etc. Manual only. delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
Service Bulletins
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees. funds.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.

Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may call
to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Transport Canada at
a crash or could cause injury or write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.

Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or event data recorder (EDR). The
Transport Canada) in a situation like
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to
this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: bag deployment or hitting a road
about the vehicle’s performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s
Center monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to designed to record data related to
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time,
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 typically 30 seconds or less. The
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 crash, and, if equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to
(French), or write: record such data as:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating;
CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or passenger safety belts were
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
retain personal preferences, such as . How far (if at all) the driver was
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.

These data can help provide a GM will not access this data or OnStar®
better understanding of the share it with others except: with the
circumstances in which crashes and consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar® and has an active
recorded by your vehicle only if a consent of the lessee; in response subscription, additional data may be
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no to an official request by police or collected through the OnStar
data are recorded by the EDR under similar government office; as part of system. This includes information
normal driving conditions and no GM's defense of litigation through about the vehicle’s operation; about
personal data (e.g., name, gender, the discovery process; or, as collisions involving the vehicle; the
age, and crash location) are required by law. Data that GM use of the vehicle and its features;
recorded. However, other parties, collects or receives may also be and, in certain situations, the
such as law enforcement, could used for GM research needs or may location and approximate GPS
combine the EDR data with the type be made available to others for speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
of personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is OnStar Terms and Conditions and
routinely acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a Privacy Statement on the OnStar
investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. website.
To read data recorded by an EDR, Infotainment System
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is If the vehicle is equipped with a
needed. In addition to the vehicle navigation system as part of the
manufacturer, other parties, such as infotainment system, use of the
law enforcement, that have the system may result in the storage of
special equipment, can read the destinations, addresses, telephone
information if they have access to numbers, and other trip information.
the vehicle or the EDR. See the infotainment manual for
information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.

Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) Statement
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
transmitters for remote door locking/ Operation is subject to the following
unlocking and starting, and two conditions:
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in 1. The device may not cause
GM vehicles does not use or record harmful interference.
personal information or link with any 2. The device must accept any
other GM system containing interference received, including
personal information. interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

2 NOTES

OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Push = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Push Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Push Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.

14-2 OnStar
Push the OnStar Emergency OnStar Services equipped with automatic door locks,
button > to get a priority and can help police locate the
connection to an Emergency vehicle if it is stolen.
Emergency
Advisor available 24/7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
With Automatic Crash Response, Navigation
the built-in system can automatically
OnStar navigation requires the
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
Directions and Connections
respond to an AMBER Alert. even if help cannot be requested.
service plan.
. Get crisis assistance and Push > to connect to an
evacuation routes. Push Q to receive directions or
Emergency Advisor. GPS
have them sent to the vehicle
technology is used to identify the
navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle location and can provide
Destinations can also be forwarded
critical information to emergency
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
personnel. The Advisor is also
The OnStar mapping database is
trained to offer critical assistance in
continuously updated. Visit
emergency situations before first
www.onstar.com for coverage maps.
responders arrive.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Security
1. Push Q to connect to a live
OnStar provides services like Stolen Advisor.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition
Block, and Roadside Assistance, 2. Request directions.
if the vehicle is equipped with these 3. Directions are downloaded to the
services. OnStar can unlock the vehicle.
vehicle doors remotely, if it is
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.

OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds Destination Download: Push Q,
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then then request the Advisor to
responds with “OnStar ready,” download directions to the
Cancel Route then a tone. navigation system in the vehicle.
1. Push =. System responds: 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice After the call ends, push the “Go”
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say commands. button on the navigation screen to
“Cancel route.” System begin driving directions.
Get My Destination
responds: “Do you want to Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 1. Push =. System responds: downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone. information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank 2. Say “Get my destination.” Download, and coverage maps visit
you, goodbye.” System responds with address www.onstar.com.
Route Preview and the distance to the
destination, then responds with Connections
1. Push =. System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice calls to be made and received from
2. Say “Route preview.” System commands. the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
responds with the next three controlled from a cell phone through
maneuvers. Other Navigation Services the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
Available from OnStar See www.onstar.com for
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice coverage maps.
commands. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from
Repeat MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn
Navigation or screen-based
1. Push =. System responds:
navigation system. When ready, the
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. directions will be downloaded to the
vehicle.

14-4 OnStar
Hands-Free Calling Retrieve My Number 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try

again. System responds: “OK,
1. Push =. System responds: 1. Push =. System responds: storing <name tag>.”
“OnStar ready.” “OnStar ready.”
Place a Call Using a Stored
2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “My number.” System
Number
“Please say the name or number responds: “Your OnStar
to call.” Hands-Free Calling number is.” 1. Push =. System responds:
3. Say the entire number without End a Call “OnStar ready.”
pausing, including a “1” and the 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
area code. System responds: Push =. System responds: “Call responds: “OK, calling
“OK calling.” ended.” <name tag>.”
Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed Verify Minutes and Expiration
Dialing
1. Press =. The system responds Push = and say “Minutes” then
“OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Push =. System responds: “Verify” to check how many minutes
a tone. “OnStar ready.” remain and their expiration date.
2. Say “Call.” The system responds 2. Say “Store.” System responds: OnStar Mobile App
“Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
to call.” would like to store.” Download the OnStar RemoteLink
mobile app to your iPhone, Android,
3. Say “911” without pausing. The 3. Say the entire number without or BlackBerry smartphone to check
system responds “911.” pausing. System responds: vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire
4. Say “Call.” The system responds “Please say the name tag.” pressure; to start the vehicle (if
“OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System equipped) or unlock it; or to connect
responds: “About to store <name to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar
tag>. Does that sound OK?” RemoteLink information and
compatibility, see www.onstar.com.

OnStar 14-5
Diagnostics OnStar Additional Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,

Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will Information Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
perform a vehicle check every are available on most vehicles. Not
month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service all OnStar services are available
transmission, antilock brakes, and everywhere or on all vehicles. For
major vehicle systems. It also Push Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor more information, a full description
checks the tire pressures, if the of OnStar services, system
vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing
account information. If OnStar limitations, and OnStar terms and
Pressure Monitoring System. If a conditions, see www.onstar.com
diagnostics check is needed receives information that vehicle
ownership has changed, OnStar (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
between e-mails, push Q, and an contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR
may send a voice message to the
Advisor can run a check. vehicle, requesting updated account (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
information. 1-877-248-2080; or push Q to
speak with an Advisor. OnStar
Reactivation for Subsequent services require a vehicle electrical
Owners system, wireless service, and GPS
satellite technologies to be available
Push Q and follow the prompts to and operating for features to
speak to an Advisor as soon as function properly. These systems
possible after acquiring the vehicle. may not operate if the battery is
The Advisor will update vehicle discharged or disconnected.
records and will explain the OnStar
service offers and options available. OnStar service cannot work unless
your vehicle is in a place where
How OnStar Service Works OnStar has an agreement with a
Automatic Crash Response, wireless service provider for service
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, in that area, and the wireless
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle service provider has coverage,

14-6 OnStar
network capacity, reception, and Services for People with OnStar.com

technology compatible with OnStar Disabilities The website provides access to
service. Service involving location
Advisors provide services to help account information, manages the
information about the vehicle cannot
subscribers with physical disabilities OnStar subscription, and allows
work unless GPS signals are
and medical conditions. viewing of videos of each service.
available, unobstructed, and
Get subscription plan pricing and
compatible with the OnStar Push Q for help with: sign up for OnStar Vehicle
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Locating a gas station with an Diagnostics. Click on the “My
work if the OnStar equipment is not
attendant to pump gas. Account” tab on the home page.
properly installed or it has not been
properly maintained. If equipment or . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., OnStar Personal Identification
software is added, connected, that meets accessibility needs. Number (PIN)
or modified, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems beyond the
. Providing directions to the A PIN is needed to access some of
control of OnStar may prevent closest hospital or pharmacy in the OnStar services, like Remote
service such as hills, tall buildings, urgent situations. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
tunnels, weather, electrical system Assistance. You will be prompted to
TTY Users change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a OnStar has the ability to speaking with an Advisor. To
crash, or wireless phone network communicate to the deaf, change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar
congestion or jamming. hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired and provide the Advisor with the
customers while in the vehicle. The current number.
See Radio Frequency Statement on available dealer-installed TTY
page 13‑21 for information system can provide in-vehicle Warranty
regarding Part 15 of the Federal access to all of the OnStar services, OnStar equipment may be
Communications Commission (FCC) except Virtual Advisor and OnStar warranted as part of the New
rules and Industry Canada Turn-by-Turn Navigation. Vehicle Limited Warranty. The
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

OnStar 14-7
manufacturer of the vehicle garages; or in an area with very Unable to Connect to OnStar
furnishes detailed warranty dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
information. not available, the OnStar system
should still operate to call If there is limited cellular coverage
Languages OnStar. However, OnStar could or the cellular network has reached
have difficulty identifying the maximum capacity, this message
The vehicle can be programmed to
respond in French or Spanish. Push exact location. may come on. Push Q to try the
Q and ask an Advisor. Advisors . In emergency situations, OnStar
call again or try again after driving a
can speak French or Spanish. few miles into another cellular area.
can use the last stored GPS
Potential Issues location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
responders.
Some OnStar services are disabled OnStar services require a vehicle
after five days. OnStar cannot
. A temporary loss of GPS can electrical system, wireless service,
perform Remote Door Unlock or cause loss of the ability to send and GPS satellite technologies to be
Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. available and operating for features
vehicle has been off continuously The Advisor may give a verbal to function properly. These systems
for five days. After five days, OnStar route or may ask for a call back may not operate if the battery is
can contact Roadside Assistance after the vehicle is driven into an discharged or disconnected.
and a locksmith to help gain access open area.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
to the vehicle. Cellular and GPS Antennas
The OnStar system is integrated
Global Positioning Avoid placing items over or near the into the electrical architecture of the
System (GPS) antenna to prevent blocking cellular vehicle. Do not add any electrical
. Obstruction of the GPS can and GPS signal reception. Cellular equipment. See Add-On Electrical
occur in a large city with tall reception is required for OnStar to Equipment on page 9‑49. Added
buildings; in parking garages; send remote signals to the vehicle. electrical equipment may interfere
around airports; in tunnels, with the operation of the OnStar
underpasses, or parking system and cause it to not operate.

14-8 OnStar
Privacy Permission to use, copy, modify, Except as contained in this notice,

and distribute this software for any the name of a copyright holder shall
The complete OnStar Privacy
purpose with or without fee is not be used in advertising or
Statement may be found at
hereby granted, provided that the otherwise to promote the sale, use
www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
above copyright notice and this or other dealings in this Software
users of wireless communications
permission notice appear in all without prior written authorization of
are cautioned that the privacy of any
copies. the copyright holder.
information sent via wireless cellular
communications cannot be assured. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED unzip:
Third parties may unlawfully “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the
intercept or access transmissions
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT Info-ZIP copyright and license. The
and private communications without
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES definitive version of this document
consent.
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS should be available at ftp://
OnStar - libcurl and unzip FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
acknowledgments AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF license.html indefinitely.
Certain OnStar components include THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
libcurl and unzip software. Below EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR rights reserved.
are the notices and licenses COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE For the purposes of this copyright
associated with this software: LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, the following set of individuals:
libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION CONTRACT, TORT OR Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
NOTICE OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
All rights reserved. THE SOFTWARE. Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,

OnStar 14-9
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, 2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, (compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception “MacZip” without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the addresses or of the
incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not Info-ZIP URL(s).
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
inability to use this software. disabled. the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versions–including, but “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports and “MacZip” for its own source
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces, and binary releases.
freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
this list of conditions. misrepresented as being

14-10 OnStar
2 NOTES

INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
When Should an Airbag Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Assistance Program,
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Airbags Audio Controller,
Additional Information
Adding Equipment to the Rear (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-28
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Alarm Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-22, 9-24 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
How Does an Airbag
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-12 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Antenna Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Passenger Sensing
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Automatic Transmission
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Antilock Brake Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
What Makes an Airbag
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Shift Lock Control
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Auxiliary
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34

i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Cargo

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-27 Cautions, Danger, and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Voltage and Charging
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-24
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 C Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-16
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Check
Brake
California Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-19
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Ignition
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Perchlorate Materials Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-23
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Child Restraints
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Infants and Young
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Lower Anchors and
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Capacities and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-44
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Carbon Monoxide Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Cover Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Devices
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Diagnostics
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Text Telephone (TTY) Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Connections Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Door
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Customer Information Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Service Publications Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Customer Satisfaction Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Coolant Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Drive Systems
Engine Temperature D All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-22, 9-24
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14 Driver Information
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23, 5-28
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Driving
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19 Characteristics and
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Daytime Running Lamps/ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Automatic Headlamp Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Courtesy Transportation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-25

i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6 Check and Service Engine Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 F
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Coolant Temperature Features
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Coolant Temperature Filter,
Dual Automatic Climate Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cooling System Messages . . .5-33 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
E Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Electrical Equipment, Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Electrical System Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Fluid
Engine Compartment Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-10
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Fuses and Circuit Overheated Protection Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Instrument Panel Fuse Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Fog Lamps
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Emergency Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21 Front Seats
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-8

INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Gauges Headlamps

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Engine Coolant Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Filling a Portable Fuel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Daytime Running Lamps/
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Automatic Headlamp
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-39 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Warning Lights and High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Requirements, California . . . . .9-39 General Information Heated
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fuses Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Heated and Ventilated Front
Engine Compartment Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Fuses and Circuit GM Mobility Reimbursement Heater
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Instrument Panel Fuse Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 H High Voltage Devices and
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
G Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6
Gasoline Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

i-6 INDEX
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 K Lighting

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-35
How to Wear Safety Belts Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Keyless Entry
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
I Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Lights
L Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Ignition Transmission Lock
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-37 Antilock Brake System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Lamps (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-19
Infants and Young Children,
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Engine Coolant
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17 Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Instrument Panel
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
LATCH System High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Replacing Parts after a Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14
J Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 LATCH, Lower Anchors and StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Liftgate Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

INDEX i-7
Locks Messages Mirrors

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Automatic Dimming
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Battery Voltage and Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
for Children (LATCH Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Monitor System, Tire
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Object Detection System . . . . .5-36 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-28
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
M Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Maintenance Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 N
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Navigation
Maintenance Schedule Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Recommended Fluids Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

i-8 INDEX
O OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking

OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Object Detection System
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Operation, Infotainment Brake and P (Park)
Object Detection, Side Blind
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, 7-8 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-23
Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Ordering Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-17 Passenger Airbag Status
Off-Road
Outlets Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Passenger Compartment Air
Oil
Overheated Engine Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Protection Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-30
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Perchlorate Materials
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-2
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Overview, Infotainment Personalization
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Phone
OnStar®
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 P Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Power
OnStar® Additional Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Park Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

INDEX i-9
Pregnancy, Using Safety Rear Seat Entertainment System Replacing LATCH System
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-35 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Privacy Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Replacing Safety Belt
Radio Frequency Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-35 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-22
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5 Reporting Safety Defects
Program Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Proposition 65 Warning, Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Recommended Restraints
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
R Recommended Fluids and Retained Accessory
Radio Frequency Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-21 Records Ride Control Systems
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Radios Recreational Vehicle Roads
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-12 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Reimbursement Program, Roadside Assistance
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-18 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof
Rear Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Rear Climate Control Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9 Replacement Parts Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Running the Vehicle While
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36

i-10 INDEX
S Seats (cont'd) Shift Lock Control Function

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Check, Automatic
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Shifting
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Securing Child Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
How to Wear Safety Belts
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Security Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Signals, Turn and
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-22
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Spare Tire
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Safety Defects Reporting
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Specifications and
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Service Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Accessories and Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 StabiliTrak
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-18
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13
Maintenance, General Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Seats
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Publications Ordering Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

INDEX i-11
Storage Areas Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Tires (cont'd)

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-8 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Tires When It Is Time for New
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Towing
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-42
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-45 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-70
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
System Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20, 7-1 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-44 Trailer
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Transmission
T Terminology and Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Taillamps Uniform Tire Quality Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Turn Signal and Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Transportation Program,
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Wheel Alignment and Tire Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Turn and Lane-Change
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

i-12 INDEX
U Vehicle Care Wheels

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Alignment and Tire
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-31
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Uniform Tire Quality
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Voltage Devices and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-48
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 When It Is Time for New
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-42
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
W Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
V Warning
Windshield
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Vehicle Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Winter
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Identification Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-24
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Wipers
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Wiring, High Voltage
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 8/20/12

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC - 8/20/12

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 8/20/12 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Danger, Warnings, and Notice: This means there is Symbols

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Symbol Chart O : Exterior Lamps } : Power

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Performance and Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power Door Locks K: Press to unlock the doors.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Windows Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and

Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. Lumbar Control Memory Features Second Row Seats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Third Row Seats Heated and Ventilated

Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons

2. Disconnect the rear safety belt

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The exterior lamp control is on the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Windshield Wiper/Washer Windshield Washer

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Fan Control 5. Air Delivery Mode Control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Features 4: Change the display between the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

page of favorites can contain any Radio with Touchscreen

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SRCE: Press to switch between Cruise Control [: Press to disengage cruise

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Some vehicles do not have the Power Outlets

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Universal Remote System Performance and

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors